Method for adjusting environment and time in day of environment presentation during communication session

Abstract

In some embodiments, a computer system applies a time-of-day setting to a virtual environment. In some embodiments, the time-on-day setting is updated based on an event. In some embodiments, a computer system displays content in an extended display mode. In some embodiments, a computer system joins a communication session while maintaining a display of the corresponding environment. In some embodiments, a computer system moves a portal based on user movement. In some embodiments, computer systems share a virtual environment. A computer system may display media with simulated illumination. A computer system may share an environment. In some embodiments, a computer system selects a location relative to content. The computer system may present a representation of the communication session participant based on the content. A computer system may present a user interface to control a visual appearance of an environment including media. The computer system may change the appearance of the environment based on the environment pattern.

Description

[0001] Cross - Reference to Related Applications

[0002] This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 63 / 377,020, filed on September 24, 2022; U.S. Provisional Application No. 63 / 502,407, filed on May 15, 2023; U.S. Provisional Application No. 63 / 506,127, filed on June 4, 2023; and U.S. Provisional Application No. 63 / 506,133, filed on June 4, 2023. The entire content of these provisional applications is incorporated herein by reference for all purposes. Technical Field

[0003] The present disclosure generally relates to computer systems that provide computer - generated experiences, including but not limited to electronic devices that provide virtual reality and mixed reality experiences via a display. Background Art

[0004] In recent years, the development of computer systems for augmented reality has increased significantly. Example augmented reality environments include at least some virtual elements that replace or enhance the physical world. Input devices (such as cameras, controllers, joysticks, touch - sensitive surfaces, and touch - screen displays) for computer systems and other electronic computing devices are used to interact with virtual / augmented reality environments. Example virtual elements include virtual objects such as digital images, videos, text, icons, and control elements (such as buttons and other graphics). Summary of the Invention

[0005] Some methods and interfaces for interacting with environments that include at least some virtual elements (e.g., applications, augmented reality environments, mixed reality environments, and virtual reality environments) are cumbersome, inefficient, and limited. For example, systems that provide insufficient feedback for performing actions associated with virtual objects, systems that require a series of inputs to achieve a desired result in an augmented reality environment, and systems where virtual object manipulation is complex, tedious, and error - prone impose a significant cognitive burden on users and detract from the experience of virtual / augmented reality environments. Additionally, these methods take longer than necessary, thereby wasting the energy of the computer system. This latter consideration is particularly important in battery - powered devices.

[0006] Accordingly, there is a need for computer systems with improved methods and interfaces to provide computer - generated experiences to users, such that the interaction of the user with the computer system is more effective and intuitive for the user. Such methods and interfaces optionally supplement or replace conventional methods for providing extended reality experiences. Such methods and interfaces reduce the quantity, degree, and / or nature of inputs from the user by helping the user understand the connection between the inputs provided and the device's response to those inputs, thereby forming a more effective human - machine interface.

[0007] The above-described deficiencies and other problems associated with the user interface of a computer system are reduced or eliminated by the disclosed system. In some embodiments, the computer system is a desktop computer having an associated display. In some embodiments, the computer system is a portable device (e.g., a laptop computer, a tablet computer, or a handheld device). In some embodiments, the computer system is a personal electronic device (e.g., a wearable electronic device such as a watch or a head-mounted device). In some embodiments, the computer system has a touchpad. In some embodiments, the computer system has one or more cameras. In some embodiments, the computer system has a touch-sensitive display (also referred to as a "touch screen" or "touch screen display"). In some embodiments, the computer system has one or more eye-tracking components. In some embodiments, the computer system has one or more hand-tracking components. In some embodiments, in addition to a display generation component, the computer system also has one or more output devices, which include one or more haptic output generators and / or one or more audio output devices. In some embodiments, the computer system has a graphical user interface (GUI), one or more processors, a memory, and one or more modules, a program or set of instructions stored in the memory for performing multiple functions. In some embodiments, the user interacts with the GUI through contact and gestures of a stylus and / or finger on a touch-sensitive surface, movement of the user's eyes and hands in space relative to the GUI (and / or the computer system) or the user's body (as captured by cameras and other motion sensors), and / or voice input (as captured by one or more audio input devices). In some embodiments, the functions performed through the interaction optionally include image editing, drawing, presentation, word processing, spreadsheet creation, playing games, making and receiving phone calls, video conferencing, sending and receiving emails, instant messaging, test support, digital photography, digital video recording, web browsing, digital music playback, note-taking, and / or digital video playback. The executable instructions for performing these functions are optionally included in a transient and / or non-transitory computer-readable storage medium or other computer program product configured to be executed by one or more processors.

[0008] There is a need for electronic devices with improved methods and interfaces for interacting with three-dimensional environments. Such methods and interfaces can supplement or replace conventional methods for interacting with three-dimensional environments. Such methods and interfaces reduce the amount, degree, and / or nature of input from the user and result in a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-powered computing devices, such methods and interfaces save power and increase the time interval between battery charges.

[0009] In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the computer system selectively determines the time - of - day setting based on system settings and applies the time - of - day setting to the corresponding virtual environment. In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the computer system updates the time - of - day setting for the virtual environment to night based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming. In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the computer system displays content items in an extended display mode (e.g., full - screen). In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the computer system joins a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining the display of their respective virtual environments. In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the computer system selectively moves a portal into the virtual environment based on user movement. In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the first computer system and the second computer system selectively share a virtual environment during a communication session. In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the computer system displays media in a virtual three - dimensional environment with simulated lighting effects. In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the computer system displays media in the virtual environment from a viewpoint among a plurality of available viewpoints in the virtual environment. In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the computer system and the second computer system initiate sharing of a virtual environment. In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the computer system selects a positioning relative to the shared content. In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the computer system presents representations of the participants of the communication session based on parameters associated with the shared content. In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the computer system presents a user interface for controlling the visual appearance of a three - dimensional environment including media content. In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the computer system changes the visual appearance of the three - dimensional environment according to an environmental mode.

[0010] Note that the various embodiments described above can be combined with any other embodiments described herein. The features and advantages described in this specification are not exhaustive. Specifically, many additional features and advantages will be apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art in light of the drawings, the specification, and the claims. In addition, it should be noted that the language used in this specification has been selected for readability and guidance purposes in principle, and may not have been selected to depict or delimit the subject matter of the invention. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

[0011] To better understand the various described embodiments, reference should be made to the following detailed description in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, in which like reference numerals indicate corresponding parts in all the drawings.

[0012] Figure 1A is a block diagram illustrating an operating environment of a computer system for providing an XR experience according to some embodiments.

[0013] Figures 1B to 1P is an example of a computer system for providing an XR experience in an Figure 1A operating environment.

[0014] Figure 2 is a block diagram of a controller configured to manage and coordinate a user's XR experience of a computer system according to some embodiments.

[0015] Figure 3 is a block diagram of a display generation component configured to provide a visual component of an XR experience to a user of a computer system according to some embodiments.

[0016] Figure 4 is a block diagram of a hand tracking unit configured to capture a user's gesture input of a computer system according to some embodiments.

[0017] Figure 5 is a block diagram of an eye tracking unit configured to capture a user's gaze input of a computer system according to some embodiments.

[0018] Figure 6 is a flowchart of a flash-assisted gaze tracking pipeline according to some embodiments.

[0019] Figures 7A to 7F illustrates an example of a computer system selectively determining a time-of-day setting based on system settings and applying the time-of-day setting to a corresponding virtual environment according to some embodiments.

[0020] Figures 8A to 8K is a flowchart of an exemplary method of selectively determining a time-of-day setting based on system settings and applying the time-of-day setting to a corresponding virtual environment according to some embodiments.

[0021] Figures 9A to 9F illustrates an example of a computer system updating a time-of-day setting for a virtual environment to night based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming according to some embodiments.

[0022] Figures 10A to 10H is a flowchart of a method of updating a time-of-day setting for a virtual environment to night based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming according to some embodiments.

[0023] Figures 11A to 11I illustrates an example of a computer system displaying a content item in an extended display mode (e.g., full screen) according to some embodiments.

[0024] Figures 12A to 12EIt is a flowchart illustrating a method of displaying content items in an extended display mode (e.g., full screen) according to some embodiments.

[0025] Figures 13A to 13H An example is illustrated in which a first computer system joins a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining the display of their respective virtual environments.

[0026] Figures 14A to 14Q It is a flowchart illustrating a method of joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining the display of their respective virtual environments according to some embodiments.

[0027] Figures 15A to 15G An example is illustrated in which a computer system selectively moves a portal within a virtual environment based on user movement according to some embodiments.

[0028] Figures 16A to 16H It is a flowchart illustrating a method of joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining the display of their respective virtual environments according to some embodiments.

[0029] Figures 17A to 17G An example is illustrated in which a first computer system and a second computer system selectively share a virtual environment during a communication session according to some embodiments.

[0030] Figures 18A to 18I It is a flowchart illustrating a method of selectively sharing a virtual environment during a communication session according to some embodiments.

[0031] Figures 19A to 19K An example is illustrated in which a computer system displays media in a virtual environment with simulated lighting effects from a viewpoint among multiple available viewpoints in the virtual environment according to some embodiments.

[0032] Figures 20A to 20F It is a flowchart illustrating a method of displaying media in a virtual three-dimensional environment with simulated lighting effects according to some embodiments.

[0033] Figures 21A to 21E It is a flowchart illustrating a method of displaying media in a virtual environment from a viewpoint among multiple available viewpoints in the virtual environment according to some embodiments.

[0034] Figures 22A to 22L An example is illustrated in which a computer system facilitates the sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment according to some embodiments.

[0035] Figure 23 It is a flowchart for illustrating a method of facilitating the sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment according to some embodiments.

[0036] Figures 24A to 24F1Illustrates an example of a computer system positioning the viewpoints of communication session participants relative to shared content according to some embodiments.

[0037] Figure 25 Is a flowchart for illustrating a method of positioning the viewpoints of communication session participants relative to shared content according to some embodiments.

[0038] Figures 26A to 26G Illustrates an example of a computer system presenting representations of participants in a real-time communication session based on parameters associated with shared content according to some embodiments.

[0039] Figure 27 Is a flowchart for illustrating a method of presenting representations of participants in a real-time communication session based on parameters associated with shared content according to some embodiments.

[0040] Figures 28A to 28U Illustrates an example of a computer system presenting a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed within a three-dimensional environment according to some embodiments.

[0041] Figure 29 Is a flowchart for illustrating a method of presenting a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed within a three-dimensional environment according to some embodiments.

[0042] Figures 30A to 30O Illustrates an example of a computer system changing the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content according to some embodiments.

[0043] Figure 31 Is a flowchart for illustrating a method of changing the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content according to some embodiments. Detailed Description

[0044] According to some embodiments, the present disclosure relates to user interfaces for providing extended reality (XR) experiences to users.

[0045] The systems, methods, and GUIs described herein improve user interface interactions with virtual / augmented reality environments in various ways.

[0046] In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, a computer system selectively determines a time-of-day setting based on system settings and applies the time-of-day setting to a corresponding virtual environment. In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the computer system updates the time-of-day setting for a virtual environment to nighttime based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming. In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the computer system displays a content item in an extended display mode (e.g., full screen). In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the computer system joins a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining the display of their respective virtual environments. In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the computer system selectively moves a portal into a virtual environment based on user movement. In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, a first computer system and a second computer system selectively share a virtual environment during a communication session. In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the computer system displays media in a virtual three-dimensional environment with simulated lighting effects. In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the computer system displays media in a virtual environment from a viewpoint among a plurality of available viewpoints in the virtual environment. In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the computer system and a second computer system initiate sharing of a virtual environment. In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the computer system selects a positioning relative to shared content. In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the computer system presents a representation of a participant in a communication session based on parameters associated with the shared content. In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the computer system presents a user interface for controlling a visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment including media content. In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the computer system changes a visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode.

[0047] Figures 1A to 6 A description of an example computer system for providing an XR experience to a user is provided (such as described below with respect to methods 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000, 2100, 2300, 2500, 2700, 2900, and / or 3100). Figures 7A to 7F An example is illustrated in which a computer system according to some embodiments selectively determines a time-of-day setting based on system settings and applies the time-of-day setting to a corresponding virtual environment. Figures 8A to 8K Is a flowchart of an exemplary method of selectively determining a time-of-day setting based on system settings and applying the time-of-day setting to a corresponding virtual environment according to some embodiments. Figures 7A to 7F The user interface in is for illustrating Figures 8A to 8K The process in. Figures 9A to 9FIllustrates an example in which a computer system, according to some embodiments, updates the time-of-day setting for a virtual environment to night based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming. Figures 10A to 10H Is a flowchart illustrating a method, according to some embodiments, of updating the time-of-day setting for a virtual environment to night based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming. Figures 9A to 9F The user interface in Figures 10A to 10H Illustrates the process in Figures 11A to 11I Illustrates an example technique, according to some embodiments, for displaying a content item in an extended display mode (e.g., full screen). Figures 12A to 12E Is a flowchart of a method, according to various embodiments, for displaying a content item in an extended display mode (e.g., full screen). Figures 11A to 11I The user interface in Figures 12A to 12E Illustrates the process in Figures 13A to 13H Illustrates an example technique, according to some embodiments, for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining the display of their respective virtual environments. Figures 14A to 14Q Is a flowchart of a method, according to various embodiments, for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining the display of their respective virtual environments. Figures 13A to 13H The user interface in Figures 14A to 14Q Illustrates the process in Figures 15A to 15G Illustrates an example technique, according to some embodiments, for selectively moving a portal into a virtual environment based on user movement. Figures 16A to 16H Is a flowchart of a method, according to various embodiments, for selectively moving a portal into a virtual environment based on user movement. Figures 15A to 15G The user interface in Figures 16A to 16H Illustrates the process in Figures 17A to 17G Illustrates an example technique, according to some embodiments, for selectively sharing a virtual environment during a communication session. Figures 18A to 18I Is a flowchart of a method, according to various embodiments, for selectively sharing a virtual environment during a communication session. Figures 17A to 17G The user interface in Figures 18A to 18I Illustrates the process in Figures 19A to 19K Illustrates an example in which a computer system, according to some embodiments, displays media in a virtual environment with a simulated lighting effect from a viewpoint among a plurality of available viewpoints in the virtual environment. Figures 20A to 20F Is a flowchart illustrating a method, according to some embodiments, of displaying media in a virtual three-dimensional environment with a simulated lighting effect. Figures 19A to 19K The user interface in Figures 20A to 20F Illustrates the process in Figures 21A to 21E Is a flowchart illustrating a method, according to some embodiments, of displaying media in a virtual environment from a viewpoint among a plurality of available viewpoints in the virtual environment.Figures 19A to 19K The user interface in Figures 21A to 21E illustrates the process in Figures 22A to 22L FIG. illustrates an example of a computer system facilitating sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment according to some embodiments. Figure 23 is a flowchart for illustrating a method of facilitating sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment according to some embodiments. Figures 22A to 22L The user interface in Figure 23 illustrates the process in Figures 24A to 24F1 FIG. illustrates an example of a computer system facilitating sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment according to some embodiments. Figure 25 is a flowchart for illustrating method 2500 of facilitating sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment according to some embodiments. Figures 24A to 24F1 The user interface in Figure 25 illustrates the process in Figures 26A to 26G FIG. illustrates an example of a computer system presenting a representation of participants in a real-time communication session based on parameters associated with shared content according to some embodiments. Figure 27 is a flowchart for illustrating a method of facilitating sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment according to some embodiments. Figures 26A to 26G The user interface in Figure 27 illustrates the process in Figures 28A to 28U FIG. illustrates an example of a computer system presenting a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed within a three-dimensional environment according to some embodiments. Figure 29 is a flowchart for illustrating a method of presenting a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed within a three-dimensional environment according to some embodiments. Figures 28A to 28U The user interface in Figure 29 illustrates the process in Figures 30A to 30O FIG. illustrates an example of a computer system changing a visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content according to some embodiments. Figure 31 is a flowchart for illustrating a method of changing a visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content according to some embodiments. Figures 30A to 30O The user interface in Figure 31 illustrates the process in

[0048] The processes described below enhance the operability of a device and make the user-device interface more efficient through various techniques (e.g., by helping the user provide appropriate input and reducing user errors when operating / interacting with the device), including providing improved visual feedback to the user, reducing the number of inputs required to perform an operation, providing additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls, performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without further user input, improving privacy and / or security, providing a more diverse, detailed, and / or realistic user experience while saving storage space, and / or additional techniques. These techniques also reduce power usage and extend the battery life of the device by enabling the user to use the device faster and more efficiently. Saving battery power, and thus weight, improves the ergonomics of the device. These techniques also enable real-time communication, allow the use of fewer and / or less precise sensors, resulting in a more compact, lighter, and cheaper device, and enable the device to be used under various lighting conditions. These techniques reduce energy usage, thus reducing the heat emitted by the device, which is particularly important for wearable devices, where wearing the device can become uncomfortable for the user if the device generates too much heat while operating entirely within the operating parameters of the device components.

[0049] In addition, in methods described herein where one or more steps depend on one or more conditions being met, it should be understood that the described method can be repeated in multiple iterations such that, during the repetition process, all conditions that determine the steps in the method are met in different iterations of the method. For example, if a method requires a first step (if a condition is met) and a second step (if the condition is not met), a person of ordinary skill in the art will know to repeat the stated steps until both the condition is met and the condition is not met (in no particular order). Thus, a method described as having one or more steps that depend on one or more conditions being met can be rewritten as a method that repeats until each condition described in the method is met. However, this does not require a system or computer-readable medium to state that the system or computer-readable medium contains instructions for performing conditional operations based on the satisfaction of corresponding one or more conditions and is thus capable of determining whether all possible conditions have been met without explicitly repeating the steps of the method until all conditions that determine the steps in the method are met. A person of ordinary skill in the art will also understand that, similar to a method with conditional steps, a system or computer-readable storage medium can repeat the steps of the method as many times as needed to ensure that all conditional steps have been performed.

[0050] In some embodiments, as Figure 1AAs shown, an XR experience is provided to a user via an operating environment 100 that includes a computer system 101. The computer system 101 includes a controller 110 (e.g., a processor of a portable electronic device or a remote server), a display generation component 120 (e.g., a head-mounted device (HMD), a display, a projector, a touch screen, etc.), one or more input devices 125 (e.g., an eye tracking device 130, a hand tracking device 140, other input devices 150), one or more output devices 155 (e.g., a speaker 160, a haptic output generator 170, and other output devices 180), one or more sensors 190 (e.g., an image sensor, a light sensor, a depth sensor, a haptic sensor, an orientation sensor, a proximity sensor, a temperature sensor, a position sensor, a motion sensor, a speed sensor, etc.), and optionally one or more peripheral devices 195 (e.g., home appliances, wearable devices, etc.). In some embodiments, one or more of the input devices 125, output devices 155, sensors 190, and peripheral devices 195 are integrated with the display generation component 120 (e.g., in a head-mounted device or a handheld device).

[0051] When describing an XR experience, various terms are used to distinctively refer to several related but different environments that a user can sense and / or with which a user can interact (e.g., interact using inputs detected by the computer system 101 that generates the XR experience, where these inputs cause the computer system that generates the XR experience to generate audio, visual, and / or haptic feedback corresponding to the various inputs provided to the computer system 101). The following is a subset of these terms:

[0052] Physical environment: The physical environment refers to the physical world that people can sense and / or interact with without the help of an electronic system. A physical environment such as a physical park includes physical objects such as physical trees, physical buildings, and physical people. People can directly sense and / or interact with the physical environment, such as through vision, touch, hearing, taste, and smell.

[0053] Extended Reality: In contrast, an extended reality (XR) environment is a fully or partially simulated environment in which people sense and / or interact via an electronic system. In XR, a subset of a person's physical movements or their representation is tracked, and in response, one or more characteristics of one or more virtual objects simulated in the XR environment are adjusted in a manner consistent with at least one physical law. For example, an XR system can detect a person's head rotation and, in response, adjust the graphical content and sound field presented to the person in a manner similar to how such views and sounds would change in a physical environment. In some cases (e.g., for accessibility reasons), the adjustment of the characteristics of virtual objects in the XR environment can be made in response to a representation of a physical movement (e.g., a voice command). A person can use any of their senses to sense and / or interact with XR objects, including vision, hearing, touch, taste, and smell. For example, a person can sense and / or interact with an audio object that creates a 3D or spatial audio environment that provides the perception of point audio sources in 3D space. In another example, an audio object can enable audio transparency that selectively introduces ambient sounds from the physical environment with or without computer-generated audio. In some XR environments, a person can sense and / or interact only with audio objects.

[0054] Examples of XR include virtual reality and mixed reality.

[0055] Virtual Reality: A virtual reality (VR) environment is a simulated environment designed to be completely computer-generated sensory input for one or more senses. A VR environment includes multiple virtual objects with which a person can sense and / or interact. For example, computer-generated images of trees, buildings, and avatars representing people are examples of virtual objects. A person can sense and / or interact with the virtual objects in the VR environment by a simulation of the person's presence within the computer-generated environment and / or by a simulation of a subset of the person's physical movements within the computer-generated environment.

[0056] Mixed Reality: Compared with a VR environment that is designed to be based entirely on computer-generated sensory inputs, a mixed reality (MR) environment is an analog environment that is designed to include, in addition to computer-generated sensory inputs (e.g., virtual objects), sensory inputs or their representations from the physical environment. On the virtual continuum, an MR environment is any condition between the fully physical environment at one end and the virtual reality environment at the other end, but excluding these two ends. In some MR environments, the computer-generated sensory inputs can respond to changes in the sensory inputs from the physical environment. Also, some electronic systems for presenting an MR environment can track the position and / or orientation relative to the physical environment so that virtual objects can interact with real objects (i.e., physical items or their representations from the physical environment). For example, the system can cause movements such that a virtual tree appears stationary relative to the physical ground.

[0057] Examples of mixed reality include augmented reality and augmented virtuality.

[0058] Augmented Reality: An augmented reality (AR) environment is a simulated environment in which one or more virtual objects are superimposed over a physical environment or a representation of a physical environment. For example, an electronic system for presenting an AR environment may have a transparent or translucent display through which a person can directly view the physical environment. The system can be configured to present virtual objects on the transparent or translucent display such that the person, using the system, perceives the virtual objects superimposed over the physical environment. Alternatively, the system can have an opaque display and one or more imaging sensors that capture images or video of the physical environment, which are representations of the physical environment. The system combines the images or video with the virtual objects and presents the combination on the opaque display. The person, using the system, indirectly views the physical environment through the images or video of the physical environment and perceives the virtual objects superimposed over the physical environment. As used herein, the video of the physical environment displayed on the opaque display is referred to as "passthrough video," meaning that the system uses one or more image sensors to capture images of the physical environment and uses those images when presenting the AR environment on the opaque display. Further alternatively, the system can have a projection system that projects virtual objects into the physical environment, such as as a hologram or on a physical surface, such that the person, using the system, perceives the virtual objects superimposed over the physical environment. An augmented reality environment is also a simulated environment in which a representation of the physical environment is transformed by computer-generated sensory information. For example, in providing passthrough video, the system can transform one or more sensor images to impose an alternative perspective (e.g., viewpoint) different from the perspective captured by the imaging sensor. As another example, the representation of the physical environment can be transformed by graphically modifying (e.g., magnifying) portions thereof such that the modified portions can be a representative but not a true version of the originally captured image. As yet another example, the representation of the physical environment can be transformed by graphically removing portions thereof or blurring portions thereof.

[0059] Augmented Virtuality: An augmented virtuality (AV) environment is a simulated environment in which a virtual environment or computer-generated environment incorporates one or more sensory inputs from a physical environment. The sensory inputs can be representations of one or more characteristics of the physical environment. For example, an AV park can have virtual trees and virtual buildings, but the face of a person is a realistic reproduction of an image of a physical person. As another example, a virtual object can adopt the shape or color of a physical item imaged by one or more imaging sensors. As yet another example, a virtual object can adopt a shadow that conforms to the positioning of the sun in the physical environment.

[0060] In an augmented reality, mixed reality, or virtual reality environment, a view of a three-dimensional environment is visible to a user. The view of the three-dimensional environment is typically visible to the user through a virtual viewport via one or more display generation components (e.g., a display or a pair of display modules that provide stereoscopic content to different eyes of the same user), the virtual viewport having a viewport boundary that defines the extent of the three-dimensional environment visible to the user via the one or more display generation components. In some embodiments, the region defined by the viewport boundary is smaller than the user's visual field in one or more dimensions (e.g., based on the user's visual field, the size, optical properties, or other physical characteristics of the one or more display generation components, and / or the position and / or orientation of the one or more display generation components relative to the user's eyes). In some embodiments, the region defined by the viewport boundary is larger than the user's visual field in one or more dimensions (e.g., based on the user's visual field, the size, optical properties, or other physical characteristics of the one or more display generation components, and / or the position and / or orientation of the one or more display generation components relative to the user's eyes). The viewport and the viewport boundary typically move as the one or more display generation components move (e.g., for a head-mounted device as the user's head moves, or for a handheld device such as a tablet or smartphone as the user's hand moves). The user's viewpoint determines the content visible in the viewport, the viewpoint typically specifying a position and direction relative to the three-dimensional environment, and as the viewpoint moves, the view of the three-dimensional environment will also move in the viewport. For a head-mounted device, the viewpoint is typically based on the position and direction of the user's head, face, and / or eyes to provide a perceptually accurate view of the three-dimensional environment and an immersive experience while the user is using the head-mounted device. For a handheld or stationary device, the viewpoint moves as the handheld or stationary device moves and / or as the user's positioning relative to the handheld or stationary device changes (e.g., the user moves towards, away from, up, down, right, and / or left). For a device that includes a display generation component with virtual passthrough, the portions of the physical environment visible (e.g., displayed and / or projected) via the one or more display generation components are based on the field of view of one or more cameras in communication with the display generation component, the one or more cameras typically moving as the display generation component moves (e.g., for a head-mounted device as the user's head moves, or for a handheld device such as a tablet or smartphone as the user's hand moves), since the user's viewpoint moves as the field of view of the one or more cameras moves (and the appearance of one or more virtual objects displayed via the one or more display generation components is updated based on the user's viewpoint (e.g., the display position and pose of the virtual object are updated based on the movement of the user's viewpoint)).For a display generation component with optical passthrough, portions of the physical environment that are visible via one or more display generation components (e.g., optically visible through one or more partial or fully transparent portions of the display generation component) are based on the user's field of view through the partial or fully transparent portion of the display generation component (e.g., for a head-mounted device, moving as the user's head moves, or for a handheld device such as a tablet or smartphone, moving as the user's hand moves), because the user's viewpoint moves as the user's field of view through the partial or fully transparent portion of the display generation component moves (and the appearance of one or more virtual objects is updated based on the user's viewpoint).

[0061] In some embodiments, the representation of the physical environment (e.g., via virtual passthrough or optical passthrough display) may be partially or fully occluded by the virtual environment. In some embodiments, the amount of the virtual environment displayed (e.g., the amount of the physical environment not displayed) is based on the immersion level of the virtual environment (e.g., relative to the representation of the physical environment). For example, increasing the immersion level optionally causes more of the virtual environment to be displayed, replacing and / or occluding more of the physical environment, and decreasing the immersion level optionally causes less of the virtual environment to be displayed, thereby revealing portions of the physical environment that were previously not displayed and / or occluded. In some embodiments, at a particular immersion level, one or more first background objects (e.g., in the representation of the physical environment) are visually de-emphasized (e.g., dimmed, blurred, displayed with increased transparency) more than one or more second background objects, and one or more third background objects cease to be displayed. In some embodiments, the immersion level includes the associated degree to which virtual content (e.g., virtual environment and / or virtual content) displayed by a computer system occludes background content (e.g., content other than the virtual environment and / or virtual content) around / behind the virtual environment, optionally including the number of items of the displayed background content and / or the displayed visual characteristics (e.g., color, contrast, and / or opacity) of the background content, the angular range of the virtual content displayed by a display generation component (e.g., 60 degrees for content displayed at low immersion, 120 degrees for content displayed at medium immersion, or 180 degrees for content displayed at high immersion), and / or the proportion of the field of view displayed by a display generation component occupied by the virtual content (e.g., 33% of the field of view occupied by the virtual content at low immersion, 66% of the field of view occupied by the virtual content at medium immersion, or 100% of the field of view occupied by the virtual content at high immersion). In some embodiments, the background content is included in the background on which the virtual content is displayed (e.g., the background content in the representation of the physical environment). In some embodiments, the background content includes a user interface (e.g., a user interface generated by a computer system corresponding to an application), virtual objects not associated with and / or not included in the virtual environment and / or virtual content (e.g., files or representations of other users generated by a computer system, etc.), and / or real objects (e.g., passthrough objects representing real objects in the physical environment around the user, which are visible such that they are displayed by a display generation component and / or visible via a transparent or translucent component of the display generation component because the computer system does not occlude / impede their visibility through the display generation component). In some embodiments, at a low immersion level (e.g., a first immersion level), the background, virtual, and / or real objects are displayed in a non-occluded manner. For example, a virtual environment with a low immersion level is optionally displayed concurrently with background content, which is optionally displayed at full brightness, color, and / or semi-transparency.In some embodiments, at a higher immersion level (e.g., a second immersion level higher than a first immersion level), background, virtual, and / or real objects are displayed in an occluded manner (e.g., dimmed, blurred, or removed from the display). For example, a corresponding virtual environment with a high immersion level is displayed without simultaneously displaying background content (e.g., in full screen or fully immersive mode). As another example, a virtual environment displayed at a medium immersion level is displayed simultaneously with background content that is dimmed, blurred, or otherwise de-emphasized. In some embodiments, the visual characteristics of background objects vary among the background objects. For example, at a particular immersion level, one or more first background objects are more visually de-emphasized (e.g., dimmed, blurred, and / or displayed with increased transparency) than one or more second background objects, and one or more third background objects cease to be displayed. In some embodiments, zero immersion or a zero immersion level corresponds to a virtual environment that ceases to be displayed, and instead a representation of the physical environment is displayed (optionally with one or more virtual objects, such as applications, windows, or virtual three-dimensional objects), and the representation of the physical environment is not occluded by the virtual environment. Adjusting the immersion level using physical input elements provides a fast and efficient way to adjust immersion, which enhances the operability of the computer system and makes the user-device interface more efficient.

[0062] Viewpoint-locked virtual objects: When a computer system displays a virtual object at the same position and / or orientation in the user's viewpoint, the virtual object is viewpoint-locked even if the user's viewpoint shifts (e.g., changes). In embodiments where the computer system is a head-mounted device, the user's viewpoint is locked to the forward direction of the user's head (e.g., when the user looks straight ahead, the user's viewpoint is at least a portion of the user's field of view); thus, without moving the user's head, the user's viewpoint remains fixed even when the user's gaze shifts. In embodiments where the computer system has a display generation component (e.g., a display screen) that is repositionable relative to the user's head, the user's viewpoint is the augmented reality view presented to the user on the computer system's display generation component. For example, a viewpoint-locked virtual object that is displayed in the upper left corner of the user's viewpoint when the user's viewpoint is in a first orientation (e.g., the user's head is facing north) continues to be displayed in the upper left corner of the user's viewpoint even when the user's viewpoint changes to a second orientation (e.g., the user's head is facing west). In other words, the position and / or orientation of the viewpoint-locked virtual object displayed in the user's viewpoint is independent of the user's position and / or orientation in the physical environment. In embodiments where the computer system is a head-mounted device, the user's viewpoint is locked to the orientation of the user's head such that the virtual object is also referred to as a "head-locked virtual object".

[0063] Environment-Locked Visual Objects: When a computer system displays a virtual object at a position and / or orientation in a user's field of view, the virtual object is environment-locked (alternatively, "world-locked"), where the position and / or orientation is based on a position and / or object in a three-dimensional environment (e.g., a physical environment or a virtual environment) (e.g., selected and / or anchored to the position and / or object with reference to the position and / or object). As the user's field of view moves, the position and / or object in the environment relative to the user's field of view changes, which causes the environment-locked virtual object to be displayed at different positions and / or orientations in the user's field of view. For example, an environment-locked virtual object locked to a tree directly in front of the user is displayed at the center of the user's field of view. When the user's field of view shifts to the right (e.g., the user's head turns to the right) such that the tree is now to the left of center in the user's field of view (e.g., the position of the tree in the user's field of view is offset), the environment-locked virtual object locked to the tree is displayed to the left of center in the user's field of view. In other words, the position and / or orientation at which the environment-locked virtual object is displayed in the user's field of view depends on the position and / or orientation of the position and / or object in the environment to which the virtual object is locked. In some embodiments, the computer system uses a stationary reference frame (e.g., a coordinate system anchored to a fixed position and / or object in a physical environment) to determine the orientation at which the environment-locked virtual object is displayed in the user's field of view. The environment-locked virtual object can be locked to a stationary part of the environment (e.g., a floor, a wall, a table, or other stationary object), or can be locked to a movable part of the environment (e.g., a vehicle, an animal, a person, or even a representation of a part of the user's body such as a hand, a wrist, an arm, or a foot that moves independently of the user's field of view) such that the virtual object moves as the field of view or that part of the environment moves to maintain a fixed relationship between the virtual object and that part of the environment.

[0064] In some embodiments, an environment-locked or view-locked virtual object exhibits a lazy follow behavior that reduces or delays the movement of the environment-locked or view-locked virtual object relative to the movement of a reference point that the virtual object follows. In some embodiments, when exhibiting the lazy follow behavior, when a movement of a reference point (e.g., a portion of the environment, a view point, or a point fixed relative to the view point, such as a point between 5 cm and 300 cm from the view point) that the virtual object is following is detected, the computer system intentionally delays the movement of the virtual object. For example, when the reference point (e.g., the portion of the environment or the view point) moves at a first speed, the virtual object is moved by the device to remain locked to the reference point but moves at a second speed that is slower than the first speed (e.g., until the reference point stops moving or slows down, at which point the virtual object begins to catch up with the reference point). In some embodiments, when the virtual object exhibits the lazy follow behavior, the device ignores small movements of the reference point (e.g., ignores movements of the reference point below a threshold movement amount, such as moving 0 degrees to 5 degrees or moving 0 cm to 50 cm). For example, when the reference point (e.g., the portion of the environment or the view point to which the virtual object is locked) moves a first amount, the distance between the reference point and the virtual object increases (e.g., because the virtual object is being displayed to remain fixed or substantially fixed relative to a view point or a portion of the environment that is different from the reference point to which the virtual object is locked), and when the reference point (e.g., the portion of the environment or the view point to which the virtual object is locked) moves a second amount that is greater than the first amount, the distance between the reference point and the virtual object first increases (e.g., because the virtual object is being displayed to remain fixed or substantially fixed relative to a view point or a portion of the environment that is different from the reference point to which the virtual object is locked), and then decreases when the movement amount of the reference point increases above a threshold (e.g., the "lazy follow" threshold) because the virtual object is moved by the computer system to remain fixed or substantially fixed relative to the reference point. In some embodiments, the virtual object remaining substantially fixed relative to the reference point includes the virtual object being displayed within a threshold distance (e.g., 1 cm, 2 cm, 3 cm, 5 cm, 15 cm, 20 cm, 50 cm) of the reference point in one or more dimensions (e.g., up / down, left / right, and / or forward / backward of the positioning relative to the reference point).

[0065] Hardware: There are many different types of electronic systems that enable a person to sense and / or interact with various XR environments. Examples include head-mounted systems, projection-based systems, head-up displays (HUDs), vehicle windshields integrated with display capabilities, windows integrated with display capabilities, displays formed as lenses designed to be placed on a person's eyes (e.g., similar to contact lenses), headphones / earpieces, speaker arrays, input systems (e.g., wearable or handheld controllers with or without haptic feedback), smartphones, tablets, and desktop / laptop computers. A head-mounted system can have one or more speakers and an integrated opaque display. Alternatively, the head-mounted system can be configured to accept an external opaque display (e.g., a smartphone). A head-mounted system can incorporate one or more imaging sensors for capturing images or video of the physical environment and / or one or more microphones for capturing audio of the physical environment. A head-mounted system can have a transparent or translucent display instead of an opaque display. The transparent or translucent display can have a medium through which light representing an image is directed to a person's eyes. The display can utilize digital light projection, OLED, LED, uLED, liquid crystal on silicon, laser scanning light sources, or any combination of these technologies. The medium can be an optical waveguide, holographic medium, optical combiner, optical reflector, or any combination thereof. In one embodiment, the transparent or translucent display can be configured to selectively become opaque. A projection-based system can employ retinal projection technology that projects a graphical image onto a person's retina. The projection system can also be configured to project virtual objects into the physical environment, such as as a hologram or on a physical surface. In some embodiments, the controller 110 is configured to manage and coordinate a user's XR experience. In some embodiments, the controller 110 includes a suitable combination of software, firmware, and / or hardware. Below with respect to Figure 2Controller 110 is described in more detail. In some embodiments, controller 110 is a computing device that is local or remote relative to scene 105 (e.g., a physical environment). For example, controller 110 is a local server located within scene 105. In another example, controller 110 is a remote server (e.g., a cloud server, a central server, etc.) located outside of scene 105. In some embodiments, controller 110 is communicatively coupled to display generation component 120 (e.g., an HMD, a display, a projector, a touch screen, etc.) via one or more wired or wireless communication channels 144 (e.g., Bluetooth, IEEE802.11x, IEEE 802.16x, IEEE 802.3x, etc.). In another example, controller 110 is included within the housing (e.g., a physical enclosure) of one or more of display generation component 120 (e.g., an HMD or a portable electronic device including a display and one or more processors, etc.), one or more input devices of input device 125, one or more output devices of output device 155, one or more sensors of sensor 190, and / or one or more peripheral devices of peripheral device 195, or shares the same physical housing or support structure with one or more of the above devices.

[0066] In some embodiments, display generation component 120 is configured to provide a user with an XR experience (e.g., at least the visual component of the XR experience). In some embodiments, display generation component 120 includes a suitable combination of software, firmware, and / or hardware. More detailed description of display generation component 120 is provided below with respect to Figure 3 In some embodiments, the functionality of controller 110 is provided by and / or in combination with display generation component 120.

[0067] According to some embodiments, when a user is virtually and / or physically present within scene 105, display generation component 120 provides the user with an XR experience.

[0068] In some embodiments, the display generation component is worn on a part of the user's body (e.g., on his / her head, on his / her hand, etc.). Accordingly, the display generation component 120 includes one or more XR displays provided for displaying XR content. For example, in various embodiments, the display generation component 120 surrounds the user's field of view. In some embodiments, the display generation component 120 is a handheld device (such as a smart phone or a tablet) configured to present XR content, and the user holds the device having a display facing the user's field of view and a camera facing the scene 105. In some embodiments, the handheld device is optionally placed inside a housing worn on the user's head. In some embodiments, the handheld device is optionally placed on a support (e.g., a tripod) in front of the user. In some embodiments, the display generation component 120 is an XR chamber, housing, or room configured to present XR content, where the user does not wear or hold the display generation component 120. Many user interfaces described with reference to one type of hardware for displaying XR content (e.g., a handheld device or a device on a tripod) can be implemented on another type of hardware for displaying XR content (e.g., an HMD or other wearable computing device). For example, a user interface showing an interaction with XR content triggered based on an interaction occurring in the space in front of a handheld device or a tripod-mounted device can be similarly implemented with an HMD, where the interaction occurs in the space in front of the HMD and the response to the XR content is displayed via the HMD. Similarly, a user interface showing an interaction with XR content triggered based on the movement of a handheld device or a tripod-mounted device relative to the physical environment (e.g., the scene 105 or a part of the user's body (e.g., the user's eyes, head, or hand)) can be similarly implemented with an HMD, where the movement is caused by the movement of the HMD relative to the physical environment (e.g., the scene 105 or a part of the user's body (e.g., the user's eyes, head, or hand)).

[0069] Although relevant features of the operating environment 100 are shown in Figure 1A for the sake of brevity and to not obscure more relevant aspects of the example embodiments disclosed herein, various other features are not illustrated.

[0070] Figures 1A to 1PIllustrates various examples of computer systems for performing methods and providing audio, visual, and / or tactile feedback as part of the user interfaces described herein. In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more display generation components (e.g., first display assembly 1-120a and second display assembly 1-120b and / or first optical module 11.1.1-104a and second optical module 11.1.1-104b), which are used to display to a user of the computer system virtual elements and / or representations of a physical environment optionally generated based on detected events and / or user input detected by the computer system. The user interface generated by the computer system is optionally corrected by one or more corrective lenses 11.3.2-216, which are optionally removably attached to one or more of the optical modules such that the user interface is more easily viewable by users who would otherwise use glasses or contact lenses to correct their vision. Although many of the user interfaces illustrated herein show a single view of the user interface, the user interface in the HMD optionally uses two optical modules (e.g., first display assembly 1-120a and second display assembly 1-120b and / or first optical module 11.1.1-104a and second optical module 11.1.1-104b) to display, one optical module for the user's right eye and a different optical module for the user's left eye, and presents slightly different images to the two different eyes to create an illusion of stereoscopic depth. The single view of the user interface is typically the right-eye view or the left-eye view, and the depth effect is explained in the text or using other schematic diagrams or views. In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more external displays (e.g., display assembly 1-108) for displaying status information of the computer system to a user of the computer system (when the computer system is not being worn) and / or to others in the vicinity of the computer system, the status information optionally being generated based on detected events and / or user input detected by the computer system. In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more audio output components (e.g., electronic component 1-112) for generating audio feedback, the audio feedback optionally being generated based on detected events and / or user input detected by the computer system. In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more input devices for detecting input, such as one or more sensors for detecting information about the physical environment of the device (e.g., one or more sensors in sensor assembly 1-356, and / or Figure 1I ), which information can be used (optionally in combination with one or more illuminators, such as Figure 1IThe illuminator) generates a digital pass-through image, captures visual media corresponding to the physical environment (e.g., photos and / or videos), or determines the pose (e.g., location and / or orientation) of physical objects and / or surfaces in the physical environment such that virtual objects can be placed based on the detected pose of the physical objects and / or surfaces. In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more input devices for detecting input, such as one or more sensors for detecting hand positioning and / or movement (e.g., sensor assemblies 1-356 and / or Figure 1I one or more of the sensors in), which can be used (optionally in combination with one or more illuminators, such as Figure 1I the illuminator 6-124 described in) to determine when one or more air gestures have been performed. In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more input devices for detecting input, such as one or more sensors for detecting eye movement (e.g., Figure 1I the eye tracking and gaze tracking sensors in), which can be used (optionally in combination with one or more lights, such as Figure 1OThe lights in (11.3.2 - 110) determine the attention or gaze position and / or gaze movement, which can optionally be used to detect gaze-only input based on gaze movement and / or dwell. Combinations of the various sensors described above can be used to determine the user's facial expression and / or hand movement for generating an avatar or representation of the user, such as an anthropomorphic avatar or representation for a real-time communication session, where the avatar has facial expressions, hand movements, and / or body movements based on or similar to the detected facial expressions, hand movements, and / or body movements of the user of the device. Gaze and / or attention information is optionally combined with hand-tracking information to determine the interaction between the user and one or more user interfaces based on direct and / or indirect input, such as an air gesture or input using one or more hardware input devices, such as one or more buttons (e.g., first button 1 - 128, button 11.1.1 - 114, second button 1 - 132, and / or dial or button 1 - 328), a knob (e.g., first button 1 - 128, button 11.1.1 - 114, and / or dial or button 1 - 328), a digital crown (e.g., a first button 1 - 128, button 11.1.1 - 114, and / or dial or button 1 - 328 that is pressable and twistable or rotatable), a touchpad, a touchscreen, a keyboard, a mouse, and / or other input devices. One or more buttons (e.g., first button 1 - 128, button 11.1.1 - 114, second button 1 - 132, and / or dial or button 1 - 328) are optionally used to perform system operations, such as re-centering the content in the three-dimensional environment visible to the user of the device, displaying the main user interface for launching an application, starting a real-time communication session, or initiating the display of a virtual three-dimensional background. A knob or digital crown (e.g., a first button 1 - 128, button 11.1.1 - 114, and / or dial or button 1 - 328 that is pressable and twistable or rotatable) is optionally rotatable to adjust parameters of the visual content, such as the immersion level of the virtual three-dimensional environment (e.g., the extent to which the virtual content occupies the user's viewport in the three-dimensional environment) or other parameters associated with the three-dimensional environment and the virtual content displayed via an optical module (e.g., first display component 1 - 120a and second display component 1 - 120b and / or first optical module 11.1.1 - 104a and second optical module 11.1.1 - 104b).

[0071] Figure 1BIllustrates front views, top views, and perspective views of examples of head-mounted display (HMD) devices 1-100 configured to be worn by a user and provide virtual and augmented reality (VR / AR) experiences. The HMD 1-100 may include a display unit 1-102 or component, an electronic strip assembly 1-104 connected to and extending from the display unit 1-102, and a strap assembly 1-106 fixed to the electronic strip assembly 1-104 at either end. The electronic strip assembly 1-104 and the strap 1-106 may be part of a retention assembly configured to wrap around the user's head to hold the display unit 1-102 against the user's face.

[0072] In at least one example, the strap assembly 1-106 may include a first strap 1-116 configured to wrap around the backside of the user's head and a second strap 1-117 configured to extend over the top of the user's head. As shown, the second strap may extend between a first electronic strip 1-105a and a second electronic strip 1-105b of the electronic strip assembly 1-104. The strip assembly 1-104 and the strap assembly 1-106 may be part of a fixation mechanism that extends rearward from the display unit 1-102 and is configured to hold the display unit 1-102 against the user's face.

[0073] In at least one example, the fixation mechanism includes a first electronic strip 1-105a that includes a first proximal end 1-134 coupled to the display unit 1-102 (e.g., the housing 1-150 of the display unit 1-102) and a first distal end 1-136 opposite the first proximal end 1-134. The fixation mechanism may also include a second electronic strip 1-105b that includes a second proximal end 1-138 coupled to the housing 1-150 of the display unit 1-102 and a second distal end 1-140 opposite the second proximal end 1-138. The fixation mechanism may also include a first strap 1-116 and a second strap 1-117, the first strap including a first end 1-142 coupled to the first distal end 1-136 and a second end 1-144 coupled to the second distal end 1-140, and the second strap extending between the first electronic strip 1-105a and the second electronic strip 1-105b. The strips 1-105a-b and the strap 1-116 may be coupled via a connection mechanism or component 1-114. In at least one example, the second strap 1-117 includes a first end 1-146 coupled to the first electronic strip 1-105a between the first proximal end 1-134 and the first distal end 1-136 and a second end 1-148 coupled to the second electronic strip 1-105b between the second proximal end 1-138 and the second distal end 1-140.

[0074] In at least one example, the first and second electronic strips 1-105a-b comprise plastic, metal, or other structural materials forming a substantially rigid strip 1-105a-b shape. In at least one example, the first strip 1-116 and the second strip 1-117 are formed of an elastic flexible material including woven textiles, rubber, etc. The first strip 1-116 and the second strip 1-117 can be flexible to conform to the shape of the user's head when wearing the HMD 1-100.

[0075] In at least one example, one or more of the first and second electronic strips 1-105a-b can define an internal strip volume and include one or more electronic components disposed within the internal strip volume. In one example, as Figure 1B shown, the first electronic strip 1-105a can include an electronic component 1-112. In one example, the electronic component 1-112 can include a speaker. In one example, the electronic component 1-112 can include a computing component, such as a processor.

[0076] In at least one example, the housing 1-150 defines a first front opening 1-152. The front opening is Figure 1B marked as 1-152 in dashed lines in, because the display component 1-108 is arranged to occlude the first opening 1-152 from the field of view when assembling the HMD 1-100. The housing 1-150 can also define a rear second opening 1-154. The housing 1-150 also defines an internal volume between the first opening 1-152 and the second opening 1-154. In at least one example, the HMD 1-100 includes a display component 1-108, which can include a front cover and a display screen (shown in other figures) disposed in or across the front opening 1-152 to occlude the front opening 1-152. In at least one example, the display screen of the display component 1-108, and typically the display component 1-108, has a curvature configured to follow the curvature of the user's face. The display screen of the display component 1-108 can be curved as shown to complement the user's facial features and the overall curvature from one side of the face to the other, e.g., from left to right and / or from top to bottom, where the display unit 1-102 is pressed.

[0077] In at least one example, the housing 1-150 may define a first aperture 1-126 between a first opening 1-152 and a second opening 1-154, and a second aperture 1-130 between the first opening 1-152 and the second opening 1-154. The HMD 1-100 may further include a first button 1-126 disposed in the first aperture 1-128, and a second button 1-132 disposed in the second aperture 1-130. The first button 1-128 and the second button 1-132 can be pressed through the respective apertures 1-126, 1-130. In at least one example, the first button 1-126 and / or the second button 1-132 can be a twist dial as well as a push button. In at least one example, the first button 1-128 is a pushable and twistable dial button, and the second button 1-132 is a push button.

[0078] Figure 1C Illustrated is a rear perspective view of the HMD 1-100. The HMD 1-100 may include a light seal 1-110 extending rearwardly from the housing 1-150 of the display assembly 1-108 around the perimeter of the housing 1-150, as shown. The light seal 1-110 may be configured to extend from the housing 1-150 to the user's face, surrounding the user's eyes, to block external light from being visible. In one example, the HMD 1-100 may include a first display assembly 1-120a and a second display assembly 1-120b, which are disposed at or within the second opening 1-154 defined by the housing 1-150 that faces rearward and / or disposed within the internal volume of the housing 1-150 and configured to project light through the second opening 1-154. In at least one example, each display assembly 1-120a-b may include a respective display screen 1-122a, 1-122b, which are configured to project light in a rearward direction through the second opening 1-154 toward the user's eyes.

[0079] In at least one example, referring Figure 1B and Figure 1C both, the display assembly 1-108 can be a front forward display assembly including a display screen configured to project light in a first forward direction, and the rear display screens 1-122a-b can be configured to project light in a second rearward direction opposite the first direction. As noted above, the light seal 1-110 can be configured to block light external to the HMD 1-100 from reaching the user's eyes, including light projected by the forward display screen of the display assembly 1-108 shown in the front perspective view of Figure 1B In at least one example, the HMD 1-100 may further include a curtain 1-124 that obscures the second opening 1-154 between the housing 1-150 and the rear display assemblies 1-120a-b. In at least one example, the curtain 1-124 can be elastic or at least partially elastic.

[0080] Figure 1B and Figure 1C any one of the featured parts, components, and / or elements (including their arrangements and configurations) shown may be included, either individually or in any combination, in Figures 1D to 1F any other examples of the devices, featured parts, components, and elements shown and described herein. Similarly, with reference to Figures 1D to 1F any one of the featured parts, components, and / or elements (including their arrangements and configurations) shown or described may be included, either individually or in any combination, in Figure 1B and Figure 1C the examples of the devices, featured parts, components, and elements shown.

[0081] Figure 1D FIG. shows an exploded view of an example of HMD 1-200, which includes individual parts or elements separated according to the modular and selective coupling of these parts. For example, HMD 1-200 may include a strap 1-216, which may be selectively coupled to a first electronic strip 1-205a and a second electronic strip 1-205b. The first fixed strip 1-205a may include a first electronic component 1-212a, and the second fixed strip 1-205b may include a second electronic component 1-212b. In at least one example, the first strip and the second strip 1-205a-b can be removably coupled to the display unit 1-202.

[0082] In addition, HMD 1-200 may include a light seal 1-210 configured to be removably coupled to the display unit 1-202. HMD 1-200 may also include a lens 1-218, which may be removably coupled to the display unit 1-202, for example, on a first component and a second display component including a display screen. The lens 1-218 may include a customized prescription lens configured to correct vision. As noted, each of the parts shown in Figure 1D the exploded view and described above can be removably joined, attached, reattached, and replaced to update the parts or swap out parts for different users. For example, straps such as strap 1-216, light seals such as light seal 1-210, lenses such as lens 1-218, and electronic strips such as electronic strips 1-205a-b can be swapped out according to the user, so that these parts are customized to fit and correspond to a single user of HMD 1-200.

[0083] Figure 1D any one of the featured parts, components, and / or elements (including their arrangements and configurations) shown may be included, either individually or in any combination, in Figure 1B , Figure 1C and Figures 1E to 1Fin any other examples of the devices, features, components, and parts shown and described herein. Similarly, reference Figure 1B , Figure 1C and Figures 1E to 1F any one of the features, components, and / or parts shown or described (including their arrangements and configurations) may be included individually or in any combination in Figure 1D the examples of the devices, features, components, and parts shown.

[0084] Figure 1E FIG. shows an exploded view of an example of the display unit 1-306 of the HMD. The display unit 1-306 may include a front display assembly 1-308, a frame / casing assembly 1-350, and a curtain assembly 1-324. The display unit 1-306 may further include a sensor assembly 1-356, a logic board assembly 1-358, and a cooling assembly 1-360 disposed between the frame assembly 1-350 and the front display assembly 1-308. In at least one example, the display unit 1-306 may further include a rear display assembly 1-320, which includes a first rear display screen 1-322a and a second rear display screen 1-322b disposed between the frame 1-350 and the curtain assembly 1-324.

[0085] In at least one example, the display unit 1-306 may further include a motor assembly 1-362 configured as an adjustment mechanism for adjusting the position of the display screens 1-322a-b of the display assembly 1-320 relative to the frame 1-350. In at least one example, the display assembly 1-320 is mechanically coupled to the motor assembly 1-362, and each display screen 1-322a-b has at least one motor such that the motor can translate the display screens 1-322a-b to match the pupil distance of the user's eyes.

[0086] In at least one example, the display unit 1-306 may include a dial or button 1-328 that can be pressed relative to the frame 1-350 and accessed by a user outside the frame 1-350. The button 1-328 may be electrically connected to the motor assembly 1-362 via a controller such that the button 1-328 can be manipulated by the user to cause the motors of the motor assembly 1-362 to adjust the position of the display screens 1-322a-b.

[0087] Figure 1E any one of the features, components, and / or parts shown (including their arrangements and configurations) may be included individually or in any combination in Figures 1B to 1D and Figure 1F any other examples of the devices, features, components, and parts shown and described herein. Similarly, reference Figures 1B to 1D and Figure 1FAny of the illustrated and described features, components, and / or parts (including their arrangement and configuration) may be included, either individually or in any combination, in Figure 1E the examples of the devices, features, components, and parts shown.

[0088] Figure 1F An exploded view of another example of a display unit 1-406 of an HMD device similar to other HMD devices described herein is illustrated. The display unit 1-406 may include a front display assembly 1-402, a sensor assembly 1-456, a logic board assembly 1-458, a cooling assembly 1-460, a frame assembly 1-450, a rear display assembly 1-421, and a curtain assembly 1-424. The display unit 1-406 may also include a motor assembly 1-462 for adjusting the positions of a first display sub-assembly 1-420a and a second display sub-assembly 1-420b of the rear display assembly 1-421, including first and second corresponding display screens for inter-pupillary adjustment, as described above.

[0089] Figure 1F The various parts, systems, and components shown in the exploded view are described in more detail herein with reference to Figures 1B to 1E and the subsequent figures referred to in this disclosure. Figure 1F The illustrated display unit 1-406 may be assembled and integrated with Figures 1B to 1E a fixing mechanism shown, which includes an electronic strip, a belt, and other components including a light seal, a connection assembly, etc.

[0090] Figure 1F Any of the illustrated and described features, components, and / or parts (including their arrangement and configuration) may be included, either individually or in any combination, in Figures 1B to 1E any other examples of the devices, features, components, and parts shown and described herein. Similarly, with reference to Figures 1B to 1E Any of the illustrated and described features, components, and / or parts (including their arrangement and configuration) may be included, either individually or in any combination, in Figure 1F the examples of the devices, features, components, and parts shown.

[0091] Figure 1G A perspective exploded view of a front cover assembly 3-100 of an HMD device described herein is illustrated, such as Figure 1G the front cover assembly 3-1 of the HMD 3-100 shown or any other HMD device shown and described herein. Figure 1GThe front cover assembly 3-100 shown may include a transparent or translucent cover 3-102, a shield 3-104 (or "canopy"), an adhesive layer 3-106, a display assembly 3-108 including a lenticular lens panel or array 3-110, and a structural trim 3-112. The adhesive layer 3-106 may fix the shield 3-104 and / or the transparent cover 3-102 to the display assembly 3-108 and / or the trim 3-112. The trim 3-112 may fix the various components of the front cover assembly 3-100 to the frame or base of the HMD device.

[0092] In at least one example, as Figure 1G shown, the transparent cover 3-102, the shield 3-104, and the display assembly 3-108 including the lenticular lens array 3-110 may be bent to conform to the curvature of the user's face. The transparent cover 3-102 and the shield 3-104 may be bent in two or three dimensions, e.g., bent vertically in the Z direction inside and outside the Z-X plane, and bent horizontally in the X direction inside and outside the Z-X plane. In at least one example, the display assembly 3-108 may include a lenticular lens array 3-110 and a display panel having pixels configured to project light through the shield 3-104 and the transparent cover 3-102. The display assembly 3-108 may be bent in at least one direction (e.g., the horizontal direction) to conform to the curvature of the user's face from one side (e.g., the left side) to the other side (e.g., the right side) of the face. In at least one example, each layer or component of the display assembly 3-108 (which will be shown and described in more detail in subsequent figures, but which may include the lenticular lens array 3-110 and the display layer) may be bent similarly or concentrically in the horizontal direction to conform to the curvature of the user's face.

[0093] In at least one example, the shield 3-104 may include a transparent or translucent material through which the display assembly 3-108 projects light. In one example, the shield 3-104 may include one or more opaque portions, such as an opaque ink printed portion or other opaque film portion on the back surface of the shield 3-104. When the HMD device is worn, the back surface may be the surface of the shield 3-104 facing the user's eyes. In at least one example, the opaque portion may be on the front surface of the shield 3-104 opposite the back surface. In at least one example, one or more opaque portions of the shield 3-104 may include a peripheral portion that visually hides any components around the outer perimeter of the display screen of the display assembly 3-108. In this way, the opaque portions of the shield hide any other components of the HMD device that would otherwise be visible through the transparent or translucent cover 3-102 and / or the shield 3-104, including electronic components, structural components, etc.

[0094] In at least one example, the shield 3-104 may define one or more apertured transparent portions 3-120 through which the sensor may send and receive signals. In one example, portion 3-120 is an aperture through which the sensor may extend or through which the sensor may send and receive signals. In one example, portion 3-120 is a transparent portion, or a portion that is more transparent than the surrounding translucent or opaque portion of the shield, through which the sensor may send and receive signals through the shield and through the transparent cover 3-102. In one example, the sensor may include a camera, an IR sensor, a LUX sensor, or any other visual or non-visual environmental sensor of an HMD device.

[0095] Figure 1G Any of the illustrated features, components, and / or parts (including their arrangement and configuration) may be included, either alone or in any combination, in any other example of the devices, features, components, and parts described herein. Similarly, any of the features, components, and / or parts (including their arrangement and configuration) illustrated and described herein may be included, either alone or in any combination, in Figure 1G the examples of the devices, features, components, and parts illustrated.

[0096] Figure 1H An exploded view of an example of an HMD device 6-100 is illustrated. The HMD device 6-100 may include a sensor array or system 6-102 that includes one or more sensors, cameras, projectors, etc. mounted to one or more components of the HMD 6-100. In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 may include a bracket 1-338 to which one or more sensors of the sensor system 6-102 may be secured / fastened.

[0097] Figure 1I A portion of an HMD device 6-100 including a front transparent cover 6-104 and a sensor system 6-102 is illustrated. The sensor system 6-102 may include a plurality of different sensors, transmitters, receivers, including cameras, IR sensors, projectors, etc. The transparent cover 6-104 is illustrated in front of the sensor system 6-102 to illustrate the relative positions of the various sensors and transmitters and the orientation of each sensor / transmitter of the system 6-102. As used herein, the terms "lateral," "side," "transverse," "horizontal," and other like terms refer to the orientation or direction indicated by the X axis as Figure 1J illustrated. Terms such as "vertical," "upward," "downward," and like terms refer to the orientation or direction indicated by the Z axis as Figure 1J illustrated. Terms such as "forward," "backward," "frontward," "backward," and like terms refer to the orientation or direction indicated by the Y axis as Figure 1J illustrated.

[0098] In at least one example, the transparent cover 6-104 may define the front outer surface of the HMD device 6-100, and the sensor system 6-102 including various sensors and their components may be disposed behind the cover 6-104 in the Y-axis / direction. The cover 6-104 may be transparent or translucent to allow light to pass through the cover 6-104, including both the light detected by the sensor system 6-102 and the light emitted therefrom.

[0099] As described elsewhere herein, the HMD device 6-100 may include one or more controllers, which include processors for electrically coupling the various sensors and transmitters of the sensor system 6-102 to one or more motherboards, processing units, and other electronic devices such as display screens. In addition, as will be shown in more detail with reference to other figures below, the various sensors, transmitters, and other components of the sensor system 6-102 may be coupled to Figure 1I various structural frame members, brackets, etc. of the HMD device 6-100 not shown. For the sake of clear illustration, Figure 1I the components of the sensor system 6-102 are shown un-attached and not electrically coupled to other components.

[0100] In at least one example, the device may include one or more controllers having processors configured to execute instructions stored on a memory component electrically coupled to the processors. These instructions may include or cause the processors to execute one or more algorithms for self-correcting the angles and positions of the various cameras described herein as the initial position, angle, or orientation of the camera changes over time due to an accidental drop event or other event that causes collision or deformation.

[0101] In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 may include one or more scene cameras 6-106. The system 6-102 may include two scene cameras 6-102, respectively disposed on both sides of the bridge or arch structure of the HMD device 6-100 such that each of the two cameras 6-106 generally corresponds to the position of the user's left and right eyes behind the cover 6-103. In at least one example, the scene cameras 6-106 are generally oriented forward in the Y-direction to capture images in front of the user during use of the HMD 6-100. In at least one example, the scene cameras are color cameras and provide images and content for MR video passthrough to the display screen facing the user's eyes when using the HMD device 6-100. The scene cameras 6-106 may also be used for environmental and object reconstruction.

[0102] In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 can include a first depth sensor 6-108 that generally points forward in the Y direction. In at least one example, the first depth sensor 6-108 can be used for environment and object reconstruction and for hand and body tracking of the user. In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 can include a second depth sensor 6-110 centered along the width of the HMD device 6-100 (e.g., along the X-axis). For example, the second depth sensor 6-110 can be disposed above the central nose bridge or on an adapter structure above the nose when the user wears the HMD 6-100. In at least one example, the second depth sensor 6-110 can be used for environment and object reconstruction and for hand and body tracking. In at least one example, the second depth sensor can include a LIDAR sensor.

[0103] In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 can include a depth projector 6-112 that generally faces forward to project electromagnetic waves (e.g., in the form of a pre-determined pattern of light points) into the field of view or within the field of view of the user and / or the scene camera 6-106, or into a field of view that includes and extends beyond the field of view of the user and / or the scene camera 6-106. In at least one example, the depth projector is capable of projecting electromagnetic waves of light in the form of a pattern of light points that are reflected from objects and back into the aforementioned depth sensors, including depth sensors 6-108, 6-110. In at least one example, the depth projector 6-112 can be used for environment and object reconstruction and for hand and body tracking.

[0104] In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 can include a downward-facing camera 6-114 whose field of view generally points downward relative to the HDM device 6-100 along the Z-axis. In at least one example, the downward camera 6-114 can be disposed on the left and right sides of the HMD device 6-100 as shown and is used for hand and body tracking, headset tracking, and facial avatar detection and creation for displaying a user avatar on the forward display screen of the HMD device 6-100 described elsewhere herein. For example, the downward camera 6-114 can be used to capture facial expressions and movements of the user's face below the HMD device 6-100, including the cheeks, mouth, and chin.

[0105] In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 may include a jaw camera 6-116. In at least one example, the jaw camera 6-116 may be disposed on the left and right sides of the HMD device 6-100 as shown and is used for hand and body tracking, headset tracking, and facial avatar detection and creation for displaying a user avatar on the forward display screen of the HMD device 6-100 described elsewhere herein. For example, the jaw camera 6-116 may be used to capture facial expressions and movements of the user's face below the HMD device 6-100, including the user's jaw, cheeks, mouth, and chin. For hand and body tracking, headset tracking, and facial avatar

[0106] In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 may include side cameras 6-118. The side cameras 6-118 may be oriented to capture left and right views in the X-axis or the direction relative to the HMD device 6-100. In at least one example, the side cameras 6-118 may be used for hand and body tracking, headset tracking, and facial avatar detection and recreation.

[0107] In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 may include a plurality of eye tracking and gaze tracking sensors for determining the identity, status, and gaze direction of the user's eyes during and / or before use. In at least one example, the eye / gaze tracking sensors may include a nose-eye camera 6-120 that is disposed on either side of the user's nose and is adjacent to the user's nose when the HMD device 6-100 is worn. The eye / gaze sensors may also include a bottom eye camera 6-122 disposed below the respective user's eye for capturing an image of the eye for facial avatar detection and creation, gaze tracking, and iris identification functions.

[0108] In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 may include an infrared illuminator 6-124 that points outward from the HMD device 6-100 to illuminate the external environment and any objects therein with IR light for IR detection by one or more IR sensors of the sensor system 6-102. In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 may include a flicker sensor 6-126 and an ambient light sensor 6-128. In at least one example, the flicker sensor 6-126 may detect the top light refresh rate to avoid display flicker. In one example, the infrared illuminator 6-124 may include a light-emitting diode and may be particularly used in low-light environments to illuminate the user's hand and other objects in low light for detection by the infrared sensors of the sensor system 6-102.

[0109] In at least one example, multiple sensors (including scene cameras 6-106, downward cameras 6-114, jaw cameras 6-116, side cameras 6-118, depth projectors 6-112, and depth sensors 6-108, 6-110) can be used in combination with an electrically coupled controller to combine depth data with camera data for hand tracking and for size determination in order to better perform hand tracking as well as object recognition and tracking functions of the HMD device 6-100. In at least one example, the downward camera 6-114, jaw camera 6-116, and side camera 6-118 described above and shown in Figure 1I can be wide-angle cameras capable of operating in the visible and infrared spectra. In at least one example, these cameras 6-114, 6-116, 6-118 can operate only in black-and-white light detection to simplify image processing and obtain sensitivity.

[0110] Figure 1I Any one of the illustrated features, components, and / or parts (including their arrangements and configurations) can be included, either individually or in any combination, in Figures 1J to 1L any other examples of the devices, features, components, and parts shown and described herein. Similarly, any one of the features, components, and / or parts shown and described with reference to Figures 1J to 1L can be included, either individually or in any combination, in Figure 1I the examples of the devices, features, components, and parts shown.

[0111] Figure 1J A lower perspective view of an example of an HMD 6-200 including a cover or shroud 6-204 fixed to a frame 6-230 is illustrated. In at least one example, the sensors 6-203 of the sensor system 6-202 can be disposed around the perimeter of the HDM 6-200 such that the sensors 6-203 are disposed outwardly around the perimeter of the display area or region 6-232 so as not to obstruct the viewing of the displayed light. In at least one example, the sensors can be disposed behind the shroud 6-204 and aligned with the transparent portion of the shroud, thereby allowing the sensors and projectors to allow light to pass back and forth through the shroud 6-204. In at least one example, an opaque ink or other opaque material or film / layer can be disposed on the shroud 6-204 around the display area 6-232 to hide the components of the HMD 6-200 outside the display area 6-232 rather than the transparent portion defined by the opaque portion through which the sensors and projectors transmit and receive light and electromagnetic signals during operation. In at least one example, the shroud 6-204 allows light to pass through from the display (e.g., within the display area 6-232), but does not allow light to pass radially outward from the display area around the perimeter of the display and the shroud 6-204.

[0112] In some examples, the shroud 6-204 includes a transparent portion 6-205 and an opaque portion 6-207, as described above and elsewhere herein. In at least one example, the opaque portion 6-207 of the shroud 6-204 may define one or more transparent regions 6-209 through which the sensors 6-203 of the sensor system 6-202 may transmit and receive signals. In the illustrated example, the sensors 6-203 of the sensor system 6-202 transmit and receive signals through the shroud 6-204, or more specifically through the transparent regions 6-209 (or defined thereby) of the opaque portion 6-207 of the shroud 6-204, and the sensors may include the same or similar sensors as those shown in the example of Figure 1I such as depth sensors 6-108 and 6-110, depth projectors 6-112, a first scene camera and a second scene camera 6-106, a first downward camera and a second downward camera 6-114, a first side camera and a second side camera 6-118, and a first infrared illuminator and a second infrared illuminator 6-124. These sensors are also shown in Figure 1K and Figure 1L Examples. Other sensors, sensor types, sensor quantities, and their relative positions may be included in one or more other examples of the HMD.

[0113] Figure 1J Any of the features, components, and / or parts shown (including their arrangements and configurations) may be included, either alone or in any combination, in Figure 1I and Figures 1K to 1L Any other examples of the devices, features, components, and parts shown and described herein. Similarly, any of the features, components, and / or parts shown or described with reference to Figure 1I and Figures 1K to 1L (including their arrangements and configurations) may be included, either alone or in any combination, in the examples of the devices, features, components, and parts shown in Figure 1J Shown.

[0114] Figure 1K Illustrates a front view of a portion of an example of an HMD device 6-300, including a display 6-334, brackets 6-336, 6-338, and a frame or housing 6-330. Figure 1K The example shown does not include a front cover or shroud in order to illustrate the brackets 6-336, 6-338. For example, Figure 1J The shroud 6-204 shown includes an opaque portion 6-207 that will visually cover / block the viewing of anything external (e.g., radially / peripherally external) to the display / display area 6-334, including the sensor 6-303 and the bracket 6-338.

[0115] In at least one example, the various sensors of the sensor system 6-302 are coupled to brackets 6-336, 6-338. In at least one example, the scene cameras 6-306 include tight tolerances on the angles relative to each other. For example, the tolerance on the mounting angle between two scene cameras 6-306 can be 0.5 degrees or less, such as 0.3 degrees or less. To achieve and maintain such tight tolerances, in one example, the scene cameras 6-306 can be mounted to bracket 6-338 instead of the shroud. The bracket can include a cantilever on which the scene cameras 6-306 and other sensors of the sensor system 6-302 can be mounted to maintain their position and orientation unchanged in the event of a drop event that causes any deformation of the other brackets 6-226, the housing 6-330, and / or the shroud by the user.

[0116] Figure 1K Any of the illustrated features, components, and / or parts (including their arrangement and configuration) can be included, either individually or in any combination, in Figures 1I to 1J and Figure 1L any other example of the devices, features, components, and parts shown and described herein. Similarly, reference Figures 1I to 1J and Figure 1L to any of the illustrated or described features, components, and / or parts (including their arrangement and configuration) can be included, either individually or in any combination, in Figure 1K the examples of the devices, features, components, and parts shown.

[0117] Figure 1L Illustrated is a bottom view of an example of an HMD 6-400 including a front display / cover assembly 6-404 and a sensor system 6-402. The sensor system 6-402 can be similar to other sensor systems described above and elsewhere herein, including reference Figures 1I to 1K as described. In at least one example, the chin camera 6-416 can face downward to capture images of the user's lower facial features. In one example, the chin camera 6-416 can be directly coupled to the frame or housing 6-430 or one or more internal brackets that are directly coupled to the illustrated frame or housing 6-430. The frame or housing 6-430 can include one or more holes / openings 6-415 through which the chin camera 6-416 can send and receive signals.

[0118] Figure 1L Any of the illustrated features, components, and / or parts (including their arrangement and configuration) can be included, either individually or in any combination, in Figures 1I to 1K any other example of the devices, features, components, and parts shown and described herein. Similarly, reference Figures 1I to 1KAny of the features, components, and / or parts shown and described (including their arrangements and configurations) may be included, either individually or in any combination, in Figure 1L the examples of the devices, features, components, and parts shown.

[0119] Figure 1M A rear perspective view of a interpupillary distance (IPD) adjustment system 11.1.1-102 is illustrated. The IPD adjustment system includes a first optical module and a second optical module 11.1.1-104a-b that are slidably engaged / coupled to respective guide rods 11.1.1-108a-b and motors 11.1.1-110a-b of left and right adjustment subsystems 11.1.1-106a-b. The IPD adjustment system 11.1.1-102 may be coupled to a bracket 11.1.1-112 and includes buttons 11.1.1-114 that are in electrical communication with the motors 11.1.1-110a-b. In at least one example, the buttons 11.1.1-114 may be in electrical communication with the first and second motors 11.1.1-110a-b via a processor or other circuit components such that the first and second motors 11.1.1-110a-b are activated and cause the first and second optical modules 11.1.1-104a-b to change their positions relative to each other.

[0120] In at least one example, the first and second optical modules 11.1.1-104a-b may include respective display screens that are configured to project light toward a user's eyes when the HMD 11.1.1-100 is worn. In at least one example, a user may manipulate (e.g., press and / or rotate) the buttons 11.1.1-114 to activate position adjustment of the optical modules 11.1.1-104a-b to match the interpupillary distance of the user's eyes. The optical modules 11.1.1-104a-b may also include one or more cameras or other sensor / sensor systems for imaging and measuring the user's IPD such that the optical modules 11.1.1-104a-b may be adjusted to match the IPD.

[0121] In one example, the user can manipulate button 11.1.1-114 to cause an automatic position adjustment of the first optical module and the second optical modules 11.1.1-104a-b. In one example, the user can manipulate button 11.1.1-114 to cause a manual adjustment such that the optical modules 11.1.1-104a-b move further away or closer (e.g., when the user rotates button 11.1.1-114 in one way or another) until the user visually matches her / his own IPD. In one example, the manual adjustment is communicated electronically via one or more circuits, and the power for moving the optical modules 11.1.1-104a-b via motors 11.1.1-110a-b is provided by a power source. In one example, the adjustment and movement of the optical modules 11.1.1-104a-b via manipulation of button 11.1.1-114 is mechanically actuated via movement of button 11.1.1-114.

[0122] Figure 1M Any of the illustrated features, components, and / or parts (including their arrangement and configuration) may be included, either individually or in any combination, in any other example of the devices, features, components, and parts shown in any other figures and described herein. Similarly, any of the features, components, and / or parts (including their arrangement and configuration) shown or described with reference to any other figure may be included, either individually or in any combination, in Figure 1M the example of the devices, features, components, and parts shown.

[0123] Figure 1N A front perspective view illustrating a portion of the HMD 11.1.2-100, including an external structural frame 11.1.2-102 and an internal or intermediate structural frame 11.1.2-104 that define a first aperture 11.1.2-106a and a second aperture 11.1.2-106b. The apertures 11.1.2-106a-b are shown Figure 1N in dashed lines because the view of the apertures 11.1.2-106a-b may be blocked by one or more other components of the HMD 11.1.2-100 that are coupled to the internal frame 11.1.2-104 and / or the external frame 11.1.2-102, as shown. In at least one example, the HMD 11.1.2-100 may include a first mounting bracket 11.1.2-108 that is coupled to the internal frame 11.1.2-104. In at least one example, the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108 is coupled to the internal frame 11.1.2-104 between the first aperture and the second aperture 11.1.2-106a-b.

[0124] The mounting bracket 11.1.2-108 may include an intermediate or central portion 11.1.2-109 coupled to the internal frame 11.1.2-104. In some examples, the intermediate or central portion 11.1.2-109 may not be the geometric middle or center of the bracket 11.1.2-108. Instead, the intermediate / central portion 11.1.2-109 may be disposed between a first cantilevered extension arm and a second cantilevered extension arm that extend away from the intermediate portion 11.1.2-109. In at least one example, the mounting bracket 108 includes a first cantilever 11.1.2-112 and a second cantilever 11.1.2-114 that extend away from the intermediate portion 11.1.2-109 of the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108 coupled to the internal frame 11.1.2-104.

[0125] As Figure 1N shown, the outer frame 11.1.2-102 may define a curved geometry on its lower side to accommodate the user's nose when the user wears the HMD 11.1.2-100. The curved geometry may be referred to as a nose bridge 11.1.2-111 and is shown centered on the lower side of the HMD 11.1.2-100 as illustrated. In at least one example, the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108 may be connected to the internal frame 11.1.2-104 between holes 11.1.2-106a-b such that the cantilevers 11.1.2-112, 11.1.2-114 extend downward and laterally outward away from the intermediate portion 11.1.2-109 to be geometrically complementary to the nose bridge 11.1.2-111 geometry of the outer frame 11.1.2-102. In this way, the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108 is configured to accommodate the user's nose, as noted above. The geometry of the nose bridge 11.1.2-111 accommodates the nose because the nose bridge 11.1.2-111 provides a curvature that conforms to the shape of the user's nose, providing a comfortable fit from above, over, and around.

[0126] The first cantilever 11.1.2-112 can extend away from the middle part 11.1.2-109 of the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108 in a first direction, and the second cantilever 11.1.2-114 can extend away from the middle part 11.1.2-109 of the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108 in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The first cantilever 11.1.2-112 and the second cantilever 11.1.2-114 are referred to as "cantilevered" or "cantilever" arms because each arm 11.1.2-112, 11.1.2-114 respectively includes free distal ends 11.1.2-116, 11.1.2-118 that are not attached to the inner frame 11.1.2-102 and the outer frame 11.1.2-104. In this way, the arms 11.1.2-112, 11.1.2-114 overhang from the middle part 11.1.2-109, which can be connected to the inner frame 11.1.2-104, while the distal ends 11.1.2-102, 11.1.2-104 are not attached.

[0127] In at least one example, the HMD 11.1.2-100 can include one or more components coupled to the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108. In one example, the components include a plurality of sensors 11.1.2-110a-f. Each sensor of the plurality of sensors 11.1.2-110a-f can include various types of sensors, including cameras, IR sensors, etc. In some examples, one or more of the sensors 11.1.2-110a-f can be used for object recognition in three-dimensional space, such that it is important to maintain the precise relative positions of two or more of the plurality of sensors 11.1.2-110a-f. The cantilevered nature of the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108 can protect the sensors 11.1.2-110a-f from damage and displacement in the event of an accidental drop by the user. Because the sensors 11.1.2-110a-f are cantilevered on the arms 11.1.2-112, 11.1.2-114 of the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108, the stress and deformation of the inner frame and / or the outer frame 11.1.2-104, 11.1.2-102 are not transmitted to the cantilevers 11.1.2-112, 11.1.2-114 and thus do not affect the relative positions of the sensors 11.1.2-110a-f coupled / mounted to the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108.

[0128] Figure 1NAny of the illustrated features, components, and / or parts (including their arrangements and configurations) may be included, either individually or in any combination, in any other example of the devices, features, components described herein. Similarly, any of the features, components, and / or parts (including their arrangements and configurations) shown and described herein may be included, either individually or in any combination, in Figure 1N the examples of the devices, features, components, and parts shown.

[0129] Figure 1O An example of an optical module 11.3.2-100 for use in an electronic device (such as an HMD, including the HDM devices described herein) is illustrated. As shown in one or more other examples described herein, the optical module 11.3.2-100 may be one of two optical modules within an HMD, where each optical module is aligned to project light toward a user's eye. In this manner, a first optical module may project light toward a first eye of the user via a display screen, and a second optical module of the same device may project light toward a second eye of the user via another display screen.

[0130] In at least one example, the optical module 11.3.2-100 may include an optical frame or housing 11.3.2-102, which may also be referred to as a barrel or an optical module barrel. The optical module 11.3.2-100 may also include a display 11.3.2-104 coupled to the housing 11.3.2-102, the display including one or more display screens. The display 11.3.2-104 may be coupled to the housing 11.3.2-102 such that the display 11.3.2-104 is configured to project light toward a user's eye during use when wearing the HMD to which the display module 11.3.2-100 belongs. In at least one example, the housing 11.3.2-102 may surround the display 11.3.2-104 and provide connection features for coupling other components of the optical module described herein.

[0131] In one example, the optical module 11.3.2-100 may include one or more cameras 11.3.2-106 coupled to a housing 11.3.2-102. The cameras 11.3.2-106 may be positioned relative to a display 11.3.2-104 and the housing 11.3.2-102 such that the cameras 11.3.2-106 are configured to capture one or more images of a user's eyes during use. In at least one example, the optical module 11.3.2-100 may further include a light strip 11.3.2-108 surrounding the display 11.3.2-104. In one example, the light strip 11.3.2-108 is disposed between the display 11.3.2-104 and the cameras 11.3.2-106. The light strip 11.3.2-108 may include a plurality of lights 11.3.2-110. The plurality of lights may include one or more light-emitting diodes (LEDs) or other lights configured to project light toward a user's eyes when the HMD is worn. Each of the lights 11.3.2-110 in the light strip 11.3.2-108 may be spaced apart around the light strip 11.3.2-108 and thus may be spaced evenly or unevenly around the display 11.3.2-104 at various locations on the light strip 11.3.2-108 and around the display 11.3.2-104.

[0132] In at least one example, the housing 11.3.2-102 defines a viewing opening 11.3.2-101 through which a user may view the display 11.3.2-104 when the HMD device is worn. In at least one example, the LEDs are configured and arranged to emit light through the viewing opening 11.3.2-101 onto the user's eyes. In one example, the cameras 11.3.2-106 are configured to capture one or more images of the user's eyes through the viewing opening 11.3.2-101.

[0133] As noted above, Figure 1O each of the components and features of the illustrated optical module 11.3.2-100 may be replicated in another (e.g., second) optical module provided with the HMD to interact with the user's other eye (e.g., project light and capture images).

[0134] Figure 1O Any one of the illustrated features, components, and / or parts (including their arrangement and configuration) may be included, alone or in any combination, in Figure 1P any other example of the devices, features, components, and parts shown or otherwise described herein. Similarly, reference Figure 1P to or any one of the features, components, and / or parts shown or otherwise described herein (including their arrangement and configuration) may be included, alone or in any combination, in Figure 1OIn the examples of the devices, features, components, and parts shown.

[0135] Figure 1P An example cross-sectional view of an example of an optical module 11.3.2-200 is illustrated, including a housing 11.3.2-202, a display assembly 11.3.2-204 coupled to the housing 11.3.2-202, and a lens 11.3.2-216 coupled to the housing 11.3.2-202. In at least one example, the housing 11.3.2-202 defines a first hole or passage 11.3.2-212 and a second hole or passage 11.3.2-214. The passages 11.3.2-212, 11.3.2-214 may be configured to slidably engage corresponding tracks or guide rods of an HMD device to allow the optical module 11.3.2-200 to adjust its position relative to the user's eyes to match the user's interpupillary distance (IPD). The housing 11.3.2-202 is capable of slidably engaging the guide rods to fix the optical module 11.3.2-200 in place within the HMD.

[0136] In at least one example, the optical module 11.3.2-200 may further include a lens 11.3.2-216 coupled to the housing 11.3.2-202 and disposed between the display assembly 11.3.2-204 and the user's eyes when the HMD is worn. The lens 11.3.2-216 may be configured to direct light from the display assembly 11.3.2-204 to the user's eyes. In at least one example, the lens 11.3.2-216 may be part of a lens assembly that includes a corrective lens removably attached to the optical module 11.3.2-200. In at least one example, the lens 11.3.2-216 is disposed above a light strip 11.3.2-208 and one or more eye tracking cameras 11.3.2-206 such that the cameras 11.3.2-206 are configured to capture images of the user's eyes through the lens 11.3.2-216, and the light strip 11.3.2-208 includes lights configured to project light through the lens 11.3.2-216 onto the user's eyes during use.

[0137] Figure 1P Any of the features, components, and / or parts shown (including their arrangement and configuration) may be included, either individually or in any combination, in any other examples of the devices, features, components, and parts described herein. Similarly, any of the features, components, and / or parts shown and described herein (including their arrangement and configuration) may be included, either individually or in any combination, in Figure 1P the examples of the devices, features, components, and parts shown.

[0138] Figure 2FIG. 0 is a block diagram of an example of controller 110 according to some embodiments. Although some specific features are illustrated, those skilled in the art will recognize from this disclosure that various other features are not illustrated for the sake of brevity and to not obscure more relevant aspects of the embodiments disclosed herein. To that end, by way of non-limiting example, in some embodiments, controller 110 includes one or more processing units 202 (e.g., microprocessors, application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), graphics processing units (GPUs), central processing units (CPUs), processing cores, etc.), one or more input / output (I / O) devices 206, one or more communication interfaces 208 (e.g., universal serial bus (USB), FIREWIRE, THUNDERBOLT, IEEE 802.3x, IEEE 802.11x, IEEE 802.16x, global system for mobile communications (GSM), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), global positioning system (GPS), infrared (IR), Bluetooth, ZIGBEE, and / or similar types of interfaces), one or more programming (e.g., I / O) interfaces 210, memory 220, and one or more communication buses 204 for interconnecting these components and various other components.

[0139] In some embodiments, one or more communication buses 204 include circuitry for interconnecting and controlling communication between system components. In some embodiments, one or more I / O devices 206 include at least one of a keyboard, a mouse, a touchpad, a joystick, one or more microphones, one or more speakers, one or more image sensors, one or more displays, etc.

[0140] Memory 220 includes high-speed random access memory, such as dynamic random access memory (DRAM), static random access memory (SRAM), double data rate random access memory (DDR RAM), or other random access solid state memory devices. In some embodiments, memory 220 includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. Memory 220 optionally includes one or more storage devices located remotely from one or more processing units 202. Memory 220 includes non-transitory computer-readable storage medium. In some embodiments, memory 220 or the non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of memory 220 stores the following programs, modules, and data structures, or subsets thereof, including an optional operating system 230 and an XR experience module 240.

[0141] The operating system 230 includes instructions for handling various basic system services and for performing hardware-related tasks. In some embodiments, the XR experience module 240 is configured to manage and coordinate single or multiple XR experiences of one or more users (e.g., single XR experiences of one or more users, or multiple XR experiences of corresponding groups of one or more users). To this end, in various embodiments, the XR experience module 240 includes a data acquisition unit 241, a tracking unit 242, a coordination unit 246, and a data transmission unit 248.

[0142] In some embodiments, the data acquisition unit 241 is configured to obtain data (e.g., presentation data, interaction data, sensor data, location data, etc.) from at least the display generation component 120 of Figure 1A and optionally from one or more of the input device 125, output device 155, sensor 190, and / or peripheral device 195. To this end, in various embodiments, the data acquisition unit 241 includes instructions and / or logic for instructions and heuristics and metadata for heuristics.

[0143] In some embodiments, the tracking unit 242 is configured to map the scene 105 and track the positioning / position of at least the display generation component 120 relative to Figure 1A the scene 105, and optionally track the position of one or more of the input device 125, output device 155, sensor 190, and / or peripheral device 195. To this end, in various embodiments, the tracking unit 242 includes instructions and / or logic for instructions and heuristics and metadata for heuristics. In some embodiments, the tracking unit 242 includes a hand tracking unit 244 and / or an eye tracking unit 243. In some embodiments, the hand tracking unit 244 is configured to track the positioning / position of one or more parts of the user's hand and / or the movement of one or more parts of the user's hand relative to Figure 1A the scene 105, relative to the display generation component 120, and / or relative to a coordinate system (which is defined relative to the user's hand). The hand tracking unit 244 is described in more detail below with respect to Figure 4 . In some embodiments, the eye tracking unit 243 is configured to track the positioning or movement of the user's gaze (or more generally, the user's eyes, face, or head) relative to the scene 105 (e.g., relative to the physical environment and / or relative to the user (e.g., the user's hand)) or relative to the XR content displayed via the display generation component 120. The eye tracking unit 243 is described in more detail below with respect to Figure 5 .

[0144] In some embodiments, the coordination unit 246 is configured to manage and coordinate the XR experience presented to the user by the display generation component 120, and optionally by one or more of the output device 155 and / or the peripheral device 195. To this end, in various embodiments, the coordination unit 246 includes instructions and / or logic for the instructions, as well as heuristics and metadata for the heuristics.

[0145] In some embodiments, the data sending unit 248 is configured to send data (e.g., presentation data, location data, etc.) to at least the display generation component 120, and optionally to one or more of the input device 125, the output device 155, the sensor 190, and / or the peripheral device 195. To this end, in various embodiments, the data sending unit 248 includes instructions and / or logic for the instructions, as well as heuristics and metadata for the heuristics.

[0146] Although the data acquisition unit 241, the tracking unit 242 (e.g., including the eye tracking unit 243 and the hand tracking unit 244), the coordination unit 246, and the data sending unit 248 are shown as residing on a single device (e.g., the controller 110), it should be understood that in other embodiments, any combination of the data acquisition unit 241, the tracking unit 242 (e.g., including the eye tracking unit 243 and the hand tracking unit 244), the coordination unit 246, and the data sending unit 248 may be located in separate computing devices.

[0147] In addition, Figure 2 Rather, it is more of a functional description of the various features that may be present in a particular implementation, as opposed to the structural schematic of the embodiments described herein. As will be recognized by those of ordinary skill in the art, the separately shown items may be combined, and some items may be separated. For example, Figure 2 some of the functional modules shown separately in may be implemented in a single module, and the various functions of a single functional block may be implemented by one or more functional blocks in various embodiments. The actual number of modules and the specific partitioning of functions, as well as how the features are allocated therein, will vary depending on the particular implementation, and in some embodiments, will depend in part on the specific combination of hardware, software, and / or firmware selected for the particular implementation.

[0148] Figure 3FIG. is a block diagram of an example of a display generation component 120 according to some embodiments. Although some specific features are illustrated, those skilled in the art will recognize from this disclosure that various other features are not illustrated for the sake of brevity and to not obscure more relevant aspects of the embodiments disclosed herein. To that end, by way of non-limiting example, in some embodiments, the display generation component 120 (e.g., an HMD) includes one or more processing units 302 (e.g., a microprocessor, an ASIC, an FPGA, a GPU, a CPU, a processing core, etc.), one or more input / output (I / O) devices and sensors 306, one or more communication interfaces 308 (e.g., USB, FIREWIRE, THUNDERBOLT, IEEE 802.3x, IEEE 802.11x, IEEE802.16x, GSM, CDMA, TDMA, GPS, IR, Bluetooth, ZIGBEE, and / or similar types of interfaces), one or more programming (e.g., I / O) interfaces 310, one or more XR displays 312, one or more optional internal and / or external image sensors 314, a memory 320, and one or more communication buses 304 for interconnecting these components and various other components.

[0149] In some embodiments, one or more communication buses 304 include circuitry for interconnecting and controlling communications between the various system components. In some embodiments, one or more I / O devices and sensors 306 include an inertial measurement unit (IMU), an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a thermometer, one or more physiological sensors (e.g., a blood pressure monitor, a heart rate monitor, a blood oxygen sensor, a blood glucose sensor, etc.), one or more microphones, one or more speakers, a haptic engine, and / or one or more depth sensors (e.g., structured light, time-of-flight, etc.).

[0150] In some embodiments, one or more XR displays 312 are configured to provide an XR experience to a user. In some embodiments, one or more XR displays 312 correspond to holographic, digital light processing (DLP), liquid crystal display (LCD), liquid crystal on silicon (LCoS), organic light-emitting field-effect transistor (OLET), organic light-emitting diode (OLED), surface-conduction electron-emitter display (SED), field-emission display (FED), quantum dot light-emitting diode (QD-LED), microelectromechanical systems (MEMS), and / or similar display types. In some embodiments, one or more XR displays 312 correspond to diffractive, reflective, polarization, holographic, etc. waveguide displays. For example, the display generation component 120 (e.g., an HMD) includes a single XR display. In another example, the display generation component 120 includes an XR display for each eye of the user. In some embodiments, one or more XR displays 312 are capable of presenting MR and VR content. In some embodiments, one or more XR displays 312 are capable of presenting MR or VR content.

[0151] In some embodiments, one or more image sensors 314 are configured to acquire image data corresponding to at least a portion of the user's face including the user's eyes (and may be referred to as an eye-tracking camera). In some embodiments, one or more image sensors 314 are configured to acquire image data corresponding to at least a portion of the user's hand and optionally the user's arm (and may be referred to as a hand-tracking camera). In some embodiments, one or more image sensors 314 are configured to face forward to acquire image data corresponding to a scene that the user would see in the absence of the display generation component 120 (e.g., an HMD) (and may be referred to as a scene camera). One or more optional image sensors 314 may include one or more RGB cameras (e.g., having a complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) image sensor or a charge-coupled device (CCD) image sensor), one or more infrared (IR) cameras, and / or one or more event-based cameras, etc.

[0152] Memory 320 includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM, or other random access solid-state memory devices. In some embodiments, memory 320 includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state storage devices. Memory 320 optionally includes one or more storage devices located remotely from one or more processing units 302. Memory 320 includes non-transitory computer-readable storage medium. In some embodiments, memory 320 or the non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of memory 320 stores the following programs, modules, and data structures, or subsets thereof, including optionally operating system 330 and XR rendering module 340.

[0153] Operating system 330 includes procedures for handling various basic system services and for performing hardware-related tasks. In some embodiments, XR rendering module 340 is configured to present XR content to a user via one or more XR displays 312. To this end, in various embodiments, XR rendering module 340 includes data acquisition unit 342, XR rendering unit 344, XR mapping generation unit 346, and data transmission unit 348.

[0154] In some embodiments, data acquisition unit 342 is configured to acquire data (e.g., presentation data, interaction data, sensor data, location data, etc.) at least from Figure 1A controller 110. To this end, in various embodiments, data acquisition unit 342 includes instructions and / or logic for the instructions, as well as heuristics and metadata for the heuristics.

[0155] In some embodiments, XR rendering unit 344 is configured to present XR content via one or more XR displays 312. To this end, in various embodiments, XR rendering unit 344 includes instructions and / or logic for the instructions, as well as heuristics and metadata for the heuristics.

[0156] In some embodiments, XR mapping generation unit 346 is configured to generate an XR map (e.g., a 3D map of a mixed reality scene or a map of a physical environment in which computer-generated objects can be placed to generate extended reality) based on media content data. To this end, in various embodiments, XR mapping generation unit 346 includes instructions and / or logic for the instructions, as well as heuristics and metadata for the heuristics.

[0157] In some embodiments, the data sending unit 348 is configured to send data (e.g., presentation data, location data, etc.) to at least the controller 110 and optionally to one or more of the input device 125, the output device 155, the sensor 190, and / or the peripheral device 195. To this end, in various embodiments, the data sending unit 348 includes instructions and / or logic for the instructions and heuristics and metadata for the heuristics.

[0158] Although the data acquisition unit 342, the XR presentation unit 344, the XR mapping generation unit 346, and the data sending unit 348 are shown as residing on a single device (e.g., Figure 1A the display generation component 120 of), it should be understood that in other embodiments, any combination of the data acquisition unit 342, the XR presentation unit 344, the XR mapping generation unit 346, and the data sending unit 348 may be located in separate computing devices.

[0159] Furthermore, Figure 3 Rather more serves as a functional description of the various features that may be present in a particular embodiment and is different from the schematic structural diagrams of the embodiments described herein. As will be recognized by those of ordinary skill in the art, the separately shown items may be combined and some items may be separated. For example, Figure 3 some of the functional modules shown separately in may be implemented in a single module, and the various functions of a single functional block may be implemented by one or more functional blocks in various embodiments. The actual number of modules and the specific division of functions and how the features are allocated therein will vary according to the specific implementation and, in some embodiments, will depend in part on the particular combination of hardware, software, and / or firmware selected for the specific implementation.

[0160] Figure 4 is a schematic diagram of an exemplary embodiment of the hand tracking device 140. In some embodiments, the hand tracking device 140 ( Figure 1A ) is controlled by the hand tracking unit 244 ( Figure 2 ) to track the positioning / position of one or more parts of the user's hand and / or one or more parts of the user's hand relative to Figure 1AMotion of the scene 105 (e.g., relative to a portion of the physical environment around the user, relative to the display generation component 120, or relative to a portion of the user (e.g., the user's face, eyes, or head), and / or relative to a coordinate system that is defined relative to the user's hand). In some embodiments, the hand tracking device 140 is part of the display generation component 120 (e.g., embedded in or attached to a head-mounted device). In some embodiments, the hand tracking device 140 is separate from the display generation component 120 (e.g., located in a separate housing or attached to a separate physical support structure).

[0161] In some embodiments, the hand tracking device 140 includes an image sensor 404 (e.g., one or more IR cameras, 3D cameras, depth cameras, and / or color cameras, etc.) that captures three-dimensional scene information including at least the hand 406 of a human user. The image sensor 404 captures hand images at a sufficient resolution such that the fingers and their corresponding positions can be distinguished. The image sensor 404 typically captures images of other parts of the user's body, and may also or possibly capture images of all parts of the body, and may have zoom capabilities or dedicated sensors with increased magnification to capture images of the hand at a desired resolution. In some embodiments, the image sensor 404 also captures 2D color video images of the hand 406 and other elements of the scene. In some embodiments, the image sensor 404 is used in combination with other image sensors to capture the physical environment of the scene 105, or serves as the image sensor for capturing the physical environment of the scene 105. In some embodiments, the image sensor 404 or a portion of its field of view is positioned relative to the user or the user's environment in such a way as to define an interaction space in which hand movements captured by the image sensor are treated as inputs to the controller 110.

[0162] In some embodiments, the image sensor 404 outputs a sequence of frames containing 3D map data (and in addition, possibly color image data) to the controller 110, which extracts high-level information from the map data. The high-level information is typically provided to an application running on the controller via an application programming interface (API), and the application drives the display generation component 120 accordingly. For example, a user can interact with software running on the controller 110 by moving his hand 406 and changing his hand pose.

[0163] In some embodiments, image sensor 404 projects a speckle pattern onto a scene that includes hand 406 and captures an image of the projected pattern. In some embodiments, controller 110 calculates the 3D coordinates of points in the scene (including points on the surface of the user's hand) by triangulation based on the lateral offset of the speckles in the pattern. This method is advantageous because it does not require the user to hold or wear any kind of beacon, sensor, or other marker. The method gives the depth coordinates of points in the scene at a particular distance from image sensor 404 relative to a pre-determined reference plane. In the present disclosure, it is assumed that image sensor 404 defines an orthogonal set of x, y, and z axes such that the depth coordinate of a point in the scene corresponds to the z-component measured by the image sensor. Alternatively, image sensor 404 (e.g., a hand tracking device) may use other 3D mapping methods, such as stereoscopic imaging or time-of-flight measurement, based on a single or multiple cameras or other types of sensors.

[0164] In some embodiments, hand tracking device 140 captures and processes a time series of depth maps that include the user's hand as the user moves his hand (e.g., the entire hand or one or more fingers). Software running on a processor in image sensor 404 and / or controller 110 processes the 3D map data to extract image patch descriptors of the hand in these depth maps. The software may match these descriptors to image patch descriptors stored in database 408 based on a previous learning process in order to estimate the pose of the hand in each frame. The pose generally includes the 3D positions of the user's hand joints and finger tips.

[0165] The software may also analyze the trajectories of the hand and / or fingers over multiple frames in the sequence to identify gestures. The pose estimation functionality described herein may alternate with the motion tracking functionality such that the image patch-based pose estimation is only performed once every two (or more) frames, while tracking is used to find changes in the pose that occur on the remaining frames. Pose, motion, and gesture information is provided to an application running on controller 110 via the API described above. The program may, for example, move and modify the image presented on display generation component 120 in response to the pose and / or gesture information, or perform other functions.

[0166] In some embodiments, the gesture includes an air gesture. An air gesture is detected without the user touching an input element (or independent of an input element that is part of a device) that is part of a device (e.g., computer system 101, one or more input devices 125, and / or hand tracking device 140) and is based on the detected movement of a part of the user's body (e.g., head, one or more arms, one or more hands, one or more fingers, and / or one or more legs) through the air (including the movement of the user's body relative to an absolute reference (e.g., the angle of the user's arm relative to the ground or the distance of the user's hand relative to the ground), movement relative to another part of the user's body (e.g., the movement of the user's hand relative to the user's shoulder, the movement of one of the user's hands relative to the other of the user's hands, and / or the movement of the user's finger relative to another finger or part of the hand of the user), and / or the absolute movement of a part of the user's body (e.g., a tap gesture that includes the hand moving a predetermined amount and / or speed in a predetermined pose, or a shake gesture that includes a predetermined speed or amount of rotation of a part of the user's body)).

[0167] In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the input gestures used in the various examples and embodiments described herein include air gestures for interacting with an XR environment (e.g., a virtual or mixed reality environment) performed by the movement of the user's fingers relative to other fingers or parts of the user's hand. In some embodiments, an air gesture is detected without the user touching an input element that is part of a device (or independent of an input element that is part of a device) and is based on the detected movement of a part of the user's body through the air (including the movement of the user's body relative to an absolute reference (e.g., the angle of the user's arm relative to the ground or the distance of the user's hand relative to the ground), movement relative to another part of the user's body (e.g., the movement of the user's hand relative to the user's shoulder, the movement of one of the user's hands relative to the other of the user's hands, and / or the movement of the user's finger relative to another finger or part of the hand of the user), and / or the absolute movement of a part of the user's body (e.g., a tap gesture that includes the hand moving a predetermined amount and / or speed in a predetermined pose, or a shake gesture that includes a predetermined speed or amount of rotation of a part of the user's body)).

[0168] In some embodiments where the input gesture is an air gesture (e.g., in the absence of physical contact with an input device that provides information to a computer system about which user interface element is the target of a user input, such as contact with a user interface element displayed on a touch screen, or contact with a mouse or touchpad to move a cursor to a user interface element), the gesture takes into account the user's attention (e.g., gaze) to determine the target of the user input (e.g., for direct input, as described below). Thus, in embodiments involving air gestures, for example, the input gesture is detected in combination with (e.g., simultaneously with) movement of the user's finger and / or hand towards a user interface element, along with attention (e.g., gaze) towards the user interface element to perform a pinch and / or tap input, as described below.

[0169] In some embodiments, an input gesture that points to a user interface object is performed with direct or indirect reference to the user interface object. For example, the user input is performed directly on the user interface object according to a positioning (e.g., as determined based on the user's current viewpoint) corresponding to the positioning of the user's hand relative to the user interface object in a three-dimensional environment. In some embodiments, when attention (e.g., gaze) of the user towards the user interface object is detected, the input gesture is performed indirectly on the user interface object according to the positioning of the user's hand not being at the positioning corresponding to the positioning of the user interface object in the three-dimensional environment while the user performs the input gesture. For example, for a direct input gesture, the user can initiate a gesture at or near a positioning corresponding to the display positioning of the user interface object (e.g., within a distance of 0.5 cm, 1 cm, 5 cm, or between 0 and 5 cm measured from the outer edge or the central part of the option) to direct the user's input to the user interface object. For an indirect input gesture, the user can direct the user's input to the user interface object by focusing on the user interface object (e.g., by gazing at the user interface object), and while focusing on the option, the user initiates an input gesture (e.g., at any positioning detectable by the computer system) (e.g., at a positioning not corresponding to the display positioning of the user interface object).

[0170] In some embodiments, according to some embodiments, the input gestures (e.g., air gestures) used in the various examples and embodiments described herein include pinch inputs and tap inputs for interacting with a virtual or mixed reality environment. For example, the pinch inputs and tap inputs described below are performed as air gestures.

[0171] In some embodiments, the pinch input is part of an air gesture that includes one or more of the following: a pinch gesture, a long pinch gesture, a pinch-and-drag gesture, or a double-pinch gesture. For example, a pinch gesture as an air gesture includes the movement of two or more fingers of a hand to contact each other, i.e., optionally followed by an immediate (e.g., within 0 to 1 second) interruption of contact with each other. A long pinch gesture as an air gesture includes the movement of two or more fingers of a hand contacting each other for at least a threshold amount of time (e.g., at least 1 second) before detecting an interruption of contact with each other. For example, a long pinch gesture includes a user holding a pinch gesture (e.g., where two or more fingers are in contact), and the long pinch gesture continues until an interruption of contact between two or more fingers is detected. In some embodiments, a double-pinch gesture as an air gesture includes two (e.g., or more) pinch inputs (e.g., performed by the same hand) detected consecutively and immediately (e.g., within a predefined time period) with each other. For example, a user performs a first pinch input (e.g., a pinch input or a long pinch input), releases the first pinch input (e.g., interrupts contact between two or more fingers), and performs a second pinch input within a predefined time period (e.g., within 1 second or within 2 seconds) after releasing the first pinch input.

[0172] In some embodiments, a pinch-and-drag gesture, as an air gesture (e.g., an air drag gesture or an air swipe gesture), includes a pinch gesture (e.g., a pinch gesture or a long pinch gesture) performed in combination with (e.g., following) a drag input that changes the positioning of the user's hand from a first positioning (e.g., the starting positioning of the drag) to a second positioning (e.g., the ending positioning of the drag). In some embodiments, the user maintains the pinch gesture while performing the drag input and releases the pinch gesture (e.g., opens their two or more fingers) to end the drag gesture (e.g., at the second position). In some embodiments, the pinch input and the drag input are performed by the same hand (e.g., the user pinches two or more fingers together and moves the same hand into a second position in the air using the drag gesture). In some embodiments, the pinch input is performed by the user's first hand and the drag input is performed by the user's second hand (e.g., while the user continues the pinch input with the user's first hand, the user's second hand moves in the air from a first position to a second position). In some embodiments, an input gesture as an air gesture includes an input performed using both of the user's hands (e.g., a pinch and / or tap input). For example, the input gesture includes two (e.g., or more) pinch inputs performed in combination with each other (e.g., concurrently or within a predefined time period). For example, a first pinch gesture (e.g., a pinch input, a long pinch input, or a pinch-and-drag input) is performed using the user's first hand, and in combination with performing the pinch input using the first hand, a second pinch input is performed using another hand (e.g., the second hand of the user's two hands).

[0173] In some embodiments, a tap input performed as an air gesture (e.g., pointing to a user interface element) includes the movement of the user's finger towards the user interface element, the movement of the user's hand towards the user interface element (optionally, the user's finger extends towards the user interface element), the downward movement of the user's finger (e.g., mimicking a mouse click movement or a tap on a touch screen), or other predefined movements of the user's hand. In some embodiments, a tap input performed as an air gesture is detected based on the movement characteristics of the finger or hand performing the tap gesture movement, which is a movement of the finger or hand away from the user's viewpoint and / or towards an object that is the target of the tap input, followed by the end of the movement. In some embodiments, the end of the movement is detected based on a change in the movement characteristics of the finger or hand performing the tap gesture (e.g., the end of the movement away from the user's viewpoint and / or towards an object that is the target of the tap input, the reversal of the movement direction of the finger or hand, and / or the reversal of the acceleration direction of the movement of the finger or hand).

[0174] In some embodiments, the user's attention is determined to be directed to a portion of a three-dimensional environment based on detection of a gaze directed to the portion of the three-dimensional environment (optionally, without requiring additional conditions). In some embodiments, the user's attention is determined to be directed to a portion of a three-dimensional environment based on detection of a gaze directed to the portion of the three-dimensional environment using one or more additional conditions, such as requiring the gaze to be directed to the portion of the three-dimensional environment for at least a threshold duration (e.g., dwell duration) and / or requiring the gaze to be directed to the portion of the three-dimensional environment when the user's viewpoint is within a distance threshold of the portion of the three-dimensional environment, such that the device determines that the user's attention is directed to the portion of the three-dimensional environment, where if one of these additional conditions is not met, the device determines that the attention is not directed to the portion of the three-dimensional environment to which the gaze is directed (e.g., until the one or more additional conditions are met).

[0175] In some embodiments, the detection of the readiness state configuration of the user or a portion of the user is detected by a computer system. The detection of the readiness state configuration of the hand is used by the computer system as an indication that the user may be about to use one or more air gesture inputs (e.g., pinch, tap, pinch and drag, double pinch, long pinch, or other air gestures described herein) performed by the hand to interact with the computer system. For example, based on whether the hand has a predetermined hand shape (e.g., a pre-pinch shape where the thumb and one or more fingers are extended and spaced apart to prepare for a pinch or grab gesture, or a pre-tap where one or more fingers are extended and the palm faces away from the user), based on whether the hand is in a predetermined orientation relative to the user's viewpoint (e.g., below the user's head and above the user's waist and extending at least 15 cm, 20 cm, 25 cm, 30 cm, or 50 cm from the body), and / or based on whether the hand has moved in a particular manner (e.g., moved towards an area in front of the user above the user's waist and below the user's head or away from the user's body or legs) to determine the readiness state of the hand. In some embodiments, the readiness state is used to determine whether interactive elements of the user interface respond to attention (e.g., gaze) input.

[0176] In a scenario where input is described with reference to an air gesture, it should be understood that a hardware input device attached to one or more of the user's hands or held by one or more of the user's hands can be used to detect a similar gesture, where optical tracking, one or more accelerometers, one or more gyroscopes, one or more magnetometers, and / or one or more inertial measurement units can be used to track the positioning of the hardware input device in space, and the positioning and / or movement of the hardware input device is used in place of the positioning and / or movement of one or more hands in the corresponding air gesture. In a scenario where input is described with reference to an air pose, it should be understood that a hardware input device attached to one or more of the user's hands or held by one or more of the user's hands can be used to detect a similar pose. User input can be detected using controls contained within the hardware input device, such controls as one or more touch-sensitive input elements, one or more pressure-sensitive input elements, one or more buttons, one or more knobs, one or more dials, one or more joysticks, one or more hand or finger overlays that can detect the positioning or change in positioning of parts of the hand and / or fingers relative to each other, relative to the user's body, and / or relative to the user's physical environment, and / or other hardware input device controls, where user input using the controls contained within the hardware input device is used in place of hand and / or finger gestures such as an air tap or an air pinch in the corresponding air gesture. For example, a selection input described as being performed using an air tap or an air pinch input can alternatively be detected using a button press, a tap on a touch-sensitive surface, a press on a pressure-sensitive surface, or other hardware input. As another example, a movement input described as being performed using an air pinch and drag (e.g., an air drag gesture or an air swipe gesture) can alternatively be detected based on an interaction with a hardware input control (such as a button press and hold, a touch on a touch-sensitive surface, a press on a pressure-sensitive surface, or other hardware input after the movement of the hardware input device (e.g., along with the hand associated with the hardware input device) through space). Similarly, a two-handed input that includes movement of the hands relative to each other can be performed using an air gesture and a hardware input device in a hand that is not performing an air gesture, two hardware input devices held in different hands, or two air gestures performed by different hands and / or various combinations of inputs detected by the one or more hardware input devices described above.

[0177] In some embodiments, the software can be downloaded electronically to the controller 110, for example, via a network, or can alternatively be provided on a tangible non-transitory medium such as an optical, magnetic, or electronic memory medium. In some embodiments, the database 408 is similarly stored in a memory associated with the controller 110. Alternatively or in addition, some or all of the described functions of the computer can be implemented in dedicated hardware (such as a custom or semi-custom integrated circuit or a programmable digital signal processor (DSP)). Although in Figure 4The controller 110 is shown, but by way of example, some or all of the processing functions of the controller, as a unit separate from the image sensor 404, may be performed by a suitable microprocessor and software or by dedicated circuitry within the housing of the image sensor 404 (e.g., a hand tracking device) or by other devices associated with the image sensor 404. In some embodiments, at least some of these processing functions may be performed by a suitable processor integrated with the display generation component 120 (e.g., in a television receiver, a handheld device, or a head-mounted device) or integrated with any other suitable computerized device (such as a game console or a media player). The sensing function of the image sensor 404 may similarly be integrated into a computer or other computerized device to be controlled by the sensor output.

[0178] Figure 4 Also illustrated schematically is a depth map 410 captured by the image sensor 404 according to some embodiments. As explained above, the depth map includes a matrix of pixels having corresponding depth values. The pixels 412 corresponding to the hand 406 have been segmented from the background and the wrist in the figure. The brightness of each pixel within the depth map 410 is inversely proportional to its depth value (i.e., the measured z-distance from the image sensor 404), where the gray shading becomes darker as the depth increases. The controller 110 processes these depth values to identify and segment the components of the image having human hand characteristics (i.e., a group of adjacent pixels). These characteristics may include, for example, overall size, shape, and motion from frame to frame in a sequence of depth maps.

[0179] Figure 4 Also illustrated schematically is a hand skeleton 414 that the controller 110 ultimately extracts from the depth map 410 of the hand 406. In Figure 4 this figure, the hand skeleton 414 is superimposed on the hand background 416 that has been segmented from the original depth map. In some embodiments, key feature points on the hand and optionally on the wrist or arm connected to the hand (e.g., points corresponding to knuckles, finger tips, the center of the palm, the end of the hand connected to the wrist, etc.) are identified and located on the hand skeleton 414. In some embodiments, the controller 110 uses the positions and movements of these key feature points across multiple image frames to determine, according to some embodiments, the gesture being performed by the hand or the current state of the hand.

[0180] Figure 5 An example embodiment of an eye tracking device 130 ( Figure 1A ) is illustrated. In some embodiments, the eye tracking device 130 is comprised of an eye tracking unit 243 ( Figure 2)Control is used to track the positioning and movement of the user's gaze relative to the scene 105 or relative to the XR content displayed via the display generation component 120. In some embodiments, the eye tracking device 130 is integrated with the display generation component 120. For example, in some embodiments, when the display generation component 120 is a head-mounted device (such as, a head-mounted headset, helmet, goggles, or glasses) or a handheld device placed in a wearable frame, the head-mounted device includes both components for generating XR content for the user to view and components for tracking the user's gaze relative to the XR content. In some embodiments, the eye tracking device 130 is separate from the display generation component 120. For example, when the display generation component is a handheld device or an XR room, the eye tracking device 130 is optionally a device separate from the handheld device or the XR room. In some embodiments, the eye tracking device 130 is a head-mounted device or a part of a head-mounted device. In some embodiments, the head-mounted eye tracking device 130 is optionally used in combination with a display generation component that is also head-mounted or a display generation component that is not head-mounted. In some embodiments, the eye tracking device 130 is not a head-mounted device and is optionally used in combination with a head-mounted display generation component. In some embodiments, the eye tracking device 130 is not a head-mounted device and is optionally a part of a non-head-mounted display generation component.

[0181] In some embodiments, the display generation component 120 uses a display mechanism (e.g., a left near-eye display panel and a right near-eye display panel) to display a frame including a left image and a right image in front of the user's eyes, thereby providing the user with a 3D virtual view. For example, a head-mounted display generation component may include a left optical lens and a right optical lens (referred to herein as eye lenses) located between the display and the user's eyes. In some embodiments, the display generation component may include or be coupled to one or more external cameras that capture video of the user's environment for display. In some embodiments, the head-mounted display generation component may have a transparent or semi-transparent display, and virtual objects are displayed on the transparent or semi-transparent display, through which the user can directly view the physical environment. In some embodiments, the display generation component projects virtual objects into the physical environment. The virtual objects may be projected, for example, onto a physical surface or projected as a hologram such that an individual uses the system to observe the virtual objects superimposed over the physical environment. In this case, separate display panels and image frames for the left and right eyes may not be required.

[0182] As Figure 5As shown, in some embodiments, the eye tracking device 130 (e.g., a gaze tracking device) includes at least one eye tracking camera (e.g., an infrared (IR) or near-infrared (NIR) camera), and an illumination source (e.g., an IR or NIR light source, such as an array or ring of LEDs) that emits light (e.g., IR or NIR light) toward the user's eyes. The eye tracking camera can be directed at the user's eyes to receive the IR or NIR light directly reflected from the eyes by the light source, or alternatively can be directed at a "hot" mirror located between the user's eyes and the display panel, which reflects the IR or NIR light from the eyes to the eye tracking camera while allowing visible light to pass through. The eye tracking device 130 optionally captures images of the user's eyes (e.g., as a video stream captured at 60 frames - 120 frames per second (fps)), analyzes the images to generate gaze tracking information, and transmits the gaze tracking information to the controller 110. In some embodiments, both of the user's eyes are tracked separately by corresponding eye tracking cameras and illumination sources. In some embodiments, only one of the user's eyes is tracked by corresponding eye tracking cameras and illumination sources.

[0183] In some embodiments, a device-specific calibration process is used to calibrate the eye tracking device 130 to determine the parameters of the eye tracking device for a particular operating environment 100, such as the 3D geometric relationships and parameters of the LEDs, cameras, hot mirrors (if any), eye lenses, and display screens. The device-specific calibration process can be performed at the factory or another facility before the AR / VR equipment is delivered to the end user. The device-specific calibration process can be an automatic calibration process or a manual calibration process. According to some embodiments, the user-specific calibration process can include an estimation of the eye parameters of a particular user, such as pupil position, fovea position, optical axis, visual axis, interpupillary distance, etc. According to some embodiments, once the device-specific parameters and user-specific parameters are determined for the eye tracking device 130, a flash-assisted method can be used to process the images captured by the eye tracking camera to determine the current visual axis and the user's fixation point relative to the display.

[0184] As Figure 5As shown, the eye tracking device 130 (e.g., 130A or 130B) includes an eye lens 520 and a gaze tracking system that includes at least one eye tracking camera 540 (e.g., an infrared (IR) or near-infrared (NIR) camera) positioned on the side of the user's face where eye tracking is to be performed, and an illumination source 530 (e.g., an IR or NIR light source, such as an array or ring of NIR light-emitting diodes (LEDs)) that emits light (e.g., IR or NIR light) toward the user's eye 592. The eye tracking camera 540 may be pointed at a mirror 550 (which reflects IR or NIR light from the eye 592 while allowing visible light to pass through) (e.g., as shown in the top portion of Figure 5 ), or alternatively may be pointed at the user's eye 592 to receive reflected IR or NIR light from the eye 592 (e.g., as shown in the bottom portion of Figure 5 ).

[0185] In some embodiments, the controller 110 renders AR or VR frames 562 (e.g., left and right frames for a left display panel and a right display panel) and provides the frames 562 to the display 510. The controller 110 uses the gaze tracking input 542 from the eye tracking camera 540 for various purposes, such as processing the frames 562 for display. The controller 110 optionally estimates the user's gaze point on the display 510 based on the gaze tracking input 542 obtained from the eye tracking camera 540 using a flash assist method or other suitable method. The gaze point estimated from the gaze tracking input 542 is optionally used to determine the direction in which the user is currently looking.

[0186] The following describes several possible use cases of the current gaze direction of a user and is not intended to be limiting. As an example use case, the controller 110 may render virtual content differently based on the determined direction of the user's gaze. For example, the controller 110 may generate virtual content at a higher resolution in the foveal region determined according to the current gaze direction of the user than in the peripheral region. As another example, the controller may position or move virtual content in the view at least in part based on the current gaze direction of the user. As another example, the controller may display specific virtual content in the view at least in part based on the current gaze direction of the user. As another example use case in an AR application, the controller 110 may direct an external camera for capturing the physical environment of the XR experience to focus in the determined direction. Then, the autofocus mechanism of the external camera may focus on an object or surface in the environment that the user is currently looking at on the display 510. As another example use case, the eye lens 520 may be a focusable lens, and the controller uses the gaze tracking information to adjust the focus of the eye lens 520 such that the virtual object that the user is currently looking at has an appropriate vergence to match the convergence of the user's eyes 592. The controller 110 may utilize the gaze tracking information to direct the eye lens 520 to adjust the focus such that a nearby object that the user is looking at appears at the correct distance.

[0187] In some embodiments, the eye tracking device is part of a head-mounted device that includes a display (e.g., display 510) mounted in a wearable housing, two eye lenses (e.g., eye lens 520), an eye tracking camera (e.g., eye tracking camera 540), and a light source (e.g., illumination source 530 (e.g., IR or NIR LED)). The light source emits light (e.g., IR or NIR light) towards the user's eyes 592. In some embodiments, the light source may be arranged in a ring or circle around each of the lenses, as Figure 5 shown. In some embodiments, for example, eight illumination sources 530 (e.g., LEDs) are arranged around each lens 520. However, more or fewer illumination sources 530 may be used, and other arrangements and positions of the illumination sources 530 may be used.

[0188] In some embodiments, the display 510 emits light in the visible light range and does not emit light in the IR or NIR range, and thus does not introduce noise in the gaze tracking system. Note that the position and angle of the eye tracking camera 540 are given by way of example and are not intended to be limiting. In some embodiments, a single eye tracking camera 540 is located on each side of the user's face. In some embodiments, two or more NIR cameras 540 may be used on each side of the user's face. In some embodiments, a camera 540 with a wide field of view (FOV) and a camera 540 with a narrow FOV may be used on each side of the user's face. In some embodiments, a camera 540 operating at one wavelength (e.g., 850 nm) and a camera 540 operating at a different wavelength (e.g., 940 nm) may be used on each side of the user's face.

[0189] As Figure 5 The embodiments of the gaze tracking system illustrated in, for example, may be used in computer-generated reality, virtual reality, and / or mixed reality applications to provide a computer-generated reality, virtual reality, augmented reality, and / or augmented virtual experience to the user.

[0190] Figure 6 Illustrated is a flash-assisted gaze tracking pipeline according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the gaze tracking pipeline is implemented by a flash-assisted gaze tracking system (e.g., an eye tracking device 130 as illustrated in Figure 1A and Figure 5 . The flash-assisted gaze tracking system may maintain a tracking state. Initially, the tracking state is off or "no". When in the tracking state, when analyzing the current frame to track the pupil contour and flash in the current frame, the flash-assisted gaze tracking system uses the previous information from the previous frame. When not in the tracking state, the flash-assisted gaze tracking system attempts to detect the pupil and flash in the current frame, and if successful, initializes the tracking state to "yes" and continues with the next frame in the tracking state.

[0191] As Figure 6 shown, the gaze tracking camera may capture left and right images of the user's left and right eyes. The captured images are then input into the gaze tracking pipeline for processing starting at 610. As indicated by the arrow returning to element 600, the gaze tracking system may continue to capture images of the user's eyes, for example, at a rate of 60 to 120 frames per second. In some embodiments, each set of captured images may be input into the pipeline for processing. However, in some embodiments or under some conditions, not all of the captured frames are processed by the pipeline.

[0192] At 610, for the currently captured image, if the tracking state is yes, the method proceeds to element 640. At 610, if the tracking state is no, then as indicated at 620, the image is analyzed to detect the user's pupil and flash in the image. At 630, if the pupil and flash are successfully detected, the method proceeds to element 640. Otherwise, the method returns to element 610 to process the next image of the user's eye.

[0193] At 640, if proceeding from element 610, the current frame is analyzed to track the pupil and flash based in part on previous information from a previous frame. At 640, if proceeding from element 630, the tracking state is initialized based on the pupil and flash detected in the current frame. The processing result at element 640 is checked to verify that the result of the tracking or detection can be trusted. For example, the result can be checked to determine whether the pupil and a sufficient number of flashes for performing gaze estimation are successfully tracked or detected in the current frame. At 650, if the result cannot be trusted, then at element 660, the tracking state is set to no, and the method returns to element 610 to process the next image of the user's eye. At 650, if the result is trusted, the method proceeds to element 670. At 670, the tracking state is set to yes (if it is not already yes), and the pupil and flash information is passed to element 680 to estimate the user's point of gaze.

[0194] Figure 6 It is intended to be used as an example of an eye tracking technique that can be used for a particular specific implementation. As will be appreciated by those of ordinary skill in the art, according to various embodiments, in the computer system 101 for providing an XR experience to a user, other eye tracking techniques that currently exist or are developed in the future can be used to replace the flash-assisted eye tracking technique described herein or used in combination with the flash-assisted eye tracking technique.

[0195] In some embodiments, a captured portion of the real-world environment 602 is used to provide an XR experience to the user, such as a mixed reality environment in which one or more virtual objects are superimposed over a representation of the real-world environment 602.

[0196] Accordingly, the description herein describes some implementations of a three-dimensional environment (e.g., an XR environment) that includes a representation of real-world objects and a representation of virtual objects. For example, the three-dimensional environment optionally includes a representation of a table that exists in a physical environment, which is captured and displayed in the three-dimensional environment (e.g., actively displayed via a camera and a display of a computer system or passively displayed via a transparent or semi-transparent display of the computer system). As previously described, the three-dimensional environment is optionally a mixed reality system, where the three-dimensional environment is based on the physical environment captured by one or more sensors of the computer system and displayed via a display generation component. As a mixed reality system, the computer system is optionally capable of selectively displaying portions and / or objects of the physical environment such that the corresponding portions and / or objects of the physical environment appear as if they exist in the three-dimensional environment displayed by the computer system. Similarly, the computer system is optionally capable of displaying virtual objects in the three-dimensional environment at corresponding locations that have corresponding locations in the real world such that the virtual objects appear as if they exist in the real world (e.g., the physical environment). For example, the computer system optionally displays a vase such that the vase appears as if a real vase is placed on top of a table in the physical environment. In some implementations, the corresponding locations in the three-dimensional environment have corresponding locations in the physical environment. Thus, when the computer system is described as displaying a virtual object at a corresponding location relative to a physical object (e.g., a location at or near the user's hand or a location at or near a physical table), the computer system displays the virtual object at a specific location in the three-dimensional environment such that it appears as if the virtual object is at or near the physical object in the physical environment (e.g., the virtual object is displayed at a location in the three-dimensional environment that corresponds to the location in the physical environment where the virtual object would be displayed if it were a real object at that specific location).

[0197] In some implementations, real-world objects that exist in the physical environment and are displayed in the three-dimensional environment (e.g., and / or visible via a display generation component) can interact with virtual objects that only exist in the three-dimensional environment. For example, the three-dimensional environment can include a table and a vase placed on top of the table, where the table is a view (or representation) of a physical table in the physical environment and the vase is a virtual object.

[0198] In a three-dimensional environment (e.g., a real environment, a virtual environment, or an environment that includes a mixture of real and virtual objects), an object is sometimes said to have depth or simulated depth, or an object is said to be visible, displayed, or placed at different depths. In this context, depth refers to a dimension that is different from height or width. In some embodiments, depth is defined relative to a fixed set of coordinates (e.g., where a room or object has a height, depth, and width defined relative to a fixed set of coordinates). In some embodiments, depth is defined relative to the position or viewpoint of a user, in which case the depth dimension varies based on the position of the user and / or the position and angle of the user's viewpoint. In some embodiments where depth is defined relative to the position of the user relative to a surface of the environment (e.g., the surface of the floor or ground of the environment), an object that is further from the user along a line extending parallel to the surface is considered to have greater depth in the environment, and / or the depth of the object is measured along an axis that extends outward from the user's position and is parallel to the surface of the environment (e.g., depth is defined in a cylindrical or substantially cylindrical coordinate system, where the user's position is at the center of a cylinder that extends from the user's head towards the user's feet). In some embodiments where depth is defined relative to the user's viewpoint (e.g., the direction relative to a point in space that determines which part of the environment is visible via a head-mounted device or other display), an object that is further from the user's viewpoint along a line extending parallel to the user's viewpoint is considered to have greater depth in the environment, and / or the depth of the object is measured along an axis that extends outward from the user's viewpoint and is parallel to the direction of the user's viewpoint (e.g., depth is defined in a spherical or substantially spherical coordinate system, where the origin of the viewpoint is at the center of a sphere that extends outward from the user's head). In some embodiments, depth is defined relative to a user interface container (e.g., a window or application in which an application and / or system content is displayed), where the user interface container has a height and / or width, and depth is a dimension that is orthogonal to the height and / or width of the user interface container. In some embodiments where depth is defined relative to a user interface container, when the container is placed in a three-dimensional environment or is initially displayed (e.g., such that the depth dimension of the container extends outward away from the user or the user's viewpoint), the height and / or width of the container is generally orthogonal or substantially orthogonal to a line that extends from the user's position (e.g., the user's viewpoint or the user's position) to the user interface container (e.g., the center of the user interface container or another feature point of the user interface container). In some embodiments where depth is defined relative to a user interface container, the depth of an object relative to the user interface container refers to the position of the object along the depth dimension of the user interface container. In some embodiments, multiple different containers can have different depth dimensions (e.g., different depth dimensions that extend in different directions and / or from different starting points away from the user or the user's viewpoint).In some embodiments, when defining depth relative to a user interface container, the direction of the depth dimension remains constant for the user interface container as the position of the user interface container, the user, and / or the user's viewing point changes (e.g., or when multiple different viewers are viewing the same container in a three-dimensional environment, such as during an in-person collaboration session and / or when multiple participants are in a real-time communication session with shared virtual content that includes the container). In some embodiments, for a curved container (e.g., including a container having a curved surface or a curved content area), the depth dimension optionally extends into the surface of the curved container. In some cases, z-spacing (e.g., the spacing of two objects in the depth dimension), z-height (e.g., the distance of one object from another in the depth dimension), z-position (e.g., the position of one object in the depth dimension), z-depth (e.g., the position of one object in the depth dimension), or an analog z-dimension (e.g., depth used as a dimension of an object, a dimension of the environment, a direction in space, and / or a direction in an analog space) is used to refer to the concept of depth as described above.

[0199] In some embodiments, the user can optionally use one or both hands to interact with virtual objects in a three-dimensional environment as if the virtual objects were real objects in a physical environment. For example, as described above, one or more sensors of a computer system optionally capture one or more hands of the user and display a representation of the user's hand(s) in the three-dimensional environment (e.g., in a manner similar to displaying real-world objects in the three-dimensional environment described above), or in some embodiments, the user's hand(s) can be seen via a display generation component, due to the transparency / translucency of a portion of the user interface being displayed by the display generation component, or due to the projection of the user interface onto a transparent / translucent surface or onto the user's eyes or into the user's field of view. Thus, in some embodiments, the user's hands are displayed at corresponding positions in the three-dimensional environment and are treated as if they were objects in the three-dimensional environment that can interact with virtual objects in the three-dimensional environment as if those virtual objects were physical objects in a physical environment. In some embodiments, the computer system can update the display of the representation of the user's hands in the three-dimensional environment in conjunction with the movement of the user's hands in the physical environment.

[0200] In some of the embodiments described below, the computer system optionally can determine an "effective" distance between a physical object in the physical world and a virtual object in a three-dimensional environment, e.g., for determining whether the physical object is directly interacting with the virtual object (e.g., whether a hand is touching, grasping, holding, etc. the virtual object or is within a threshold distance of the virtual object). For example, a hand directly interacting with a virtual object optionally includes one or more of the following: a finger of the hand pressing a virtual button, a hand of the user grasping a virtual vase, the hands of the user brought together and pinching / holding the user interface of an application, and two fingers performing any other type of interaction described herein. For example, when determining whether a user is interacting with a virtual object and / or how the user is interacting with the virtual object, the computer system optionally determines the distance between the user's hand and the virtual object. In some embodiments, the computer system determines the distance between the user's hand and the virtual object by determining the distance between the position of the hand in the three-dimensional environment and the position of the virtual object of interest in the three-dimensional environment. For example, the one or more hands of the user are located at a particular location in the physical world, and the computer system optionally captures the one or more hands and displays the one or more hands at a particular corresponding location in the three-dimensional environment (e.g., the location where the hand would be displayed in the three-dimensional environment if the hand were a virtual hand rather than a physical hand). Optionally, the location of the hand in the three-dimensional environment is compared with the location of the virtual object of interest in the three-dimensional environment to determine the distance between the one or more hands of the user and the virtual object. In some embodiments, the computer system optionally determines the distance between the physical object and the virtual object by comparing locations in the physical world (e.g., rather than comparing locations in the three-dimensional environment). For example, when determining the distance between one or more hands of the user and a virtual object, the computer system optionally determines the corresponding position of the virtual object in the physical world (e.g., the location where the virtual object would be located in the physical world if the virtual object were a physical object rather than a virtual object), and then determines the distance between the corresponding physical location and the one or more hands of the user. In some embodiments, the same techniques are optionally used to determine the distance between any physical object and any virtual object. Thus, as described herein, when determining whether a physical object is in contact with a virtual object or whether a physical object is within a threshold distance of a virtual object, the computer system optionally performs any of the techniques described above to map the position of the physical object to the three-dimensional environment and / or to map the position of the virtual object to the physical environment.

[0201] In some embodiments, the same or similar techniques are used to determine where and what the user's gaze is directed at, and / or where and what a physical stylus held by the user is directed at. For example, if the user's gaze is directed at a specific location in the physical environment, the computer system optionally determines the corresponding location in the three-dimensional environment (e.g., the virtual location of the gaze), and if a virtual object is located at the corresponding virtual location, the computer system optionally determines that the user's gaze is directed at the virtual object. Similarly, the computer system is optionally able to determine the direction in the physical environment that the stylus is pointed based on the orientation of the physical stylus. In some embodiments, based on this determination, the computer system determines the corresponding virtual location in the three-dimensional environment that corresponds to the location in the physical environment where the stylus is pointed, and optionally determines that the stylus is pointed at the corresponding virtual location in the three-dimensional environment.

[0202] Similarly, the embodiments described herein may refer to the position of a user (e.g., a user of a computer system) in a three-dimensional environment and / or the position of the computer system in a three-dimensional environment. In some embodiments, the user of the computer system is holding, wearing, or otherwise located at or near the computer system. Thus, in some embodiments, the position of the computer system serves as a proxy for the position of the user. In some embodiments, the position of the computer system and / or the user in the physical environment corresponds to the corresponding position in the three-dimensional environment. For example, the position of the computer system will be the position in the physical environment (and its corresponding position in the three-dimensional environment) such that if the user stands at that position and faces the corresponding portion of the physical environment visible via the display generation component, the user would see from that position objects in the physical environment that are at the same location, orientation, and / or size (e.g., in an absolute sense and / or relative to each other) as the objects that are displayed in the three-dimensional environment by the display generation component of the computer system or are visible in the three-dimensional environment via the display generation component. Similarly, if the virtual objects displayed in the three-dimensional environment are physical objects in the physical environment (e.g., physical objects placed at the same positions in the physical environment as the positions of these virtual objects in the three-dimensional environment, and having the same size and orientation in the physical environment as when in the three-dimensional environment), the position of the computer system and / or the user is the position from which the user would see from that position objects in the physical environment that are at the same location, orientation, and / or size (e.g., in an absolute sense and / or relative to each other and real-world objects) as the virtual objects displayed in the three-dimensional environment by the display generation component of the computer system.

[0203] In this disclosure, various input methods are described in relation to interaction with a computer system. When one input device or input method is used to provide an example and another input device or input method is used to provide another example, it should be understood that each example may be compatible with and optionally utilize the input device or input method described in relation to the other example. Similarly, various output methods are described in relation to interaction with a computer system. When one output device or output method is used to provide an example and another output device or output method is used to provide another example, it should be understood that each example may be compatible with and optionally utilize the output device or output method described in relation to the other example. Similarly, various methods are described in relation to interaction with a virtual environment or a mixed reality environment via a computer system. When interaction with a virtual environment is used to provide an example and a mixed reality environment is used to provide another example, it should be understood that each example may be compatible with and optionally utilize the methods described in relation to the other example. Accordingly, this disclosure discloses embodiments that are combinations of features of multiple examples without exhaustively listing all features of the embodiments in the description of each example embodiment.

[0204] User interface and associated processes

[0205] Attention is now turned to embodiments of a user interface ("UI") and associated processes that may be implemented on a computer system, such as a portable multifunctional device or a head-mounted device, having a display generation component, one or more input devices, and optionally one or more cameras.

[0206] Figures 7A to 7F An example is illustrated in which a computer system, according to some embodiments, selectively determines a time-of-day setting based on system settings and applies the time-of-day setting to a corresponding virtual environment.

[0207] Figure 7A An example is illustrated in which computer system 101 displays a three-dimensional environment 704 from the viewpoint of user 706 (e.g., facing the distant wall 714 of the physical environment in which computer system 101 is located) illustrated in top view 718 via a display generation component (e.g., the display generation component 120 of FIG. 1). Top view 718 also illustrates zone boundaries 729a - 729c in three-dimensional environment 704, as will be described later.

[0208] As described above with reference to FIGS. 1 to Figure 6 described, computer system 101 optionally includes a display generation component (e.g., a touchscreen or a non-touchscreen display) and a plurality of image sensors (e.g., Figure 3The image sensor 314). The image sensor optionally includes one or more of the following: a visible light camera; an infrared camera; a depth sensor; or any other sensor that the computer system 101 can use to capture one or more images of the user or a part of the user (e.g., one or more hands of the user) when the user interacts with the computer system 101. In some embodiments, the user interfaces illustrated and described below may also be implemented on a head-mounted display that includes a display generation component for displaying the user interface or a three-dimensional environment to the user, and sensors for detecting the movement of the physical environment and / or the user's hand (such as movement that is interpreted by the computer system as a gesture, such as an air gesture) (e.g., an external sensor facing away from the user), and / or sensors for detecting the user's gaze (e.g., an internal sensor facing inward towards the user's face).

[0209] As Figure 7A shown, the computer system 101 captures one or more images of the physical environment (e.g., the operating environment 100) around the computer system 101, including one or more objects in the physical environment around the computer system 101. In some embodiments, the computer system 101 displays a representation of the physical environment in a three-dimensional environment 704, or portions of the physical environment are visible via the display generation component 120 of the computer system 101. For example, the three-dimensional environment 704 includes portions of the walls, ceiling, and floor in the physical environment of the user 706. The three-dimensional environment 704 also includes a corner table 708, a coffee table 710, and an end table 712, which are real-world physical objects in the real-world environment 702 of the user 706, as shown in the corresponding positions in the top view 718. For example, the corner table 708 is located between the first zone boundary 729a and the distant wall 714. The end table 712 is located between the first zone boundary 729a and the third zone boundary 729c. The coffee table 710 is located between the second zone boundary 729b and the third zone boundary 729c.

[0210] In Figure 7A it, the three-dimensional environment 704 also includes an application user interface, such as a video application user interface 726 for displaying video content 727. In some embodiments, the video application user interface 726 is a different type of application, such as an instant messaging user interface or a content browsing user interface. In some embodiments, the three-dimensional environment 704 includes displayed three-dimensional objects, such as a virtual TV, a virtual clock, a virtual alarm clock, a virtual speaker system, a virtual artwork, and / or a virtual environment (e.g., as will be described later), or any other virtual object displayed by the computer system 101 that is not included in the physical environment of the computer system 101. As shown in the top view 718, the video application user interface 726 is located along the second zone boundary 729b.

[0211] In Figure 7A the three-dimensional environment 704 further includes a control center user interface 724 (e.g., a first user interface of a system user interface and / or a control center user interface). As shown in the top view 718, the control center user interface 724 is positioned along the second zone boundary 729b. In some embodiments, the control center user interface 724 includes a virtual environment selection user interface element 728a (illustrated as element "1"), a focus mode control user interface element 728b (illustrated as element "2"), an auto-dim user interface element 728c (illustrated as element "3"), a volume control user interface element 728d (illustrated as element "4"), an immersion slider user interface element 728e (illustrated as element "5"), and a brightness slider user interface element 728f (illustrated as element "6"). As further illustrated in the three-dimensional environment 704, an immersion level indicator 716 is displayed in the lower left portion of the three-dimensional environment 704. As shown, the immersion level is currently 0% immersion. The immersion level is described in more detail with reference to method 800.

[0212] Figure 7A1 Illustrates concepts similar and / or identical to the concepts shown in Figure 7A (having many of the same reference numerals). It should be understood that, unless otherwise indicated below, Figure 7A1 the elements shown in Figures 7A to 7F having the same reference numerals as the elements shown in Figure 7A1 include a computer system 101, which includes a display generation component 120 (or the same). In some embodiments, the computer system 101 and the display generation component 120 respectively have Figures 7A to 7F one or more of the characteristics of the computer system 101 shown in Figure 3 and the display generation component 120 shown in FIGS. 1 and Figures 7A to 7F In some embodiments, the computer system 101 and the display generation component 120 shown in Figure 7A1 have one or more of the characteristics of the computer system 101 and the display generation component 120 shown in

[0213] In Figure 7A1 the display generation component 120 includes one or more internal image sensors 314a oriented towards the user's face (e.g., refer to Figure 5The described eye tracking camera 540). In some embodiments, the internal image sensor 314a is used for eye tracking (e.g., detecting the user's gaze). The internal image sensor 314a is optionally disposed on the left and right portions of the display generation component 120 to enable eye tracking of the user's left and right eyes. The display generation component 120 also includes external image sensors 314b and 314c facing outward from the user to detect and / or capture the physical environment and / or the movement of the user's hand. In some embodiments, the image sensors 314a, 314b, and 314c have one or more of the characteristics of the reference Figures 7A to 7F image sensor 314 described.

[0214] In Figure 7A1 , the display generation component 120 is illustrated as displaying content optionally corresponding to the content described as being displayed and / or visible via the display generation component 120. In some embodiments, the content is displayed by a single display included in the display generation component 120 (e.g., Figures 7A to 7F the display 510). In some embodiments, the display generation component 120 includes two or more displays (e.g., a left display panel and a right display panel for the user's left and right eyes respectively, as described in reference Figure 5 ), and the display outputs of these displays are combined (e.g., by the user's brain) to create a view of the content shown in Figure 5 . Figure 7A1

[0215] The display generation component 120 has a field of view corresponding to the content shown in Figure 7A1 (e.g., the field of view captured by the external image sensors 314b and 314c and / or visible to the user via the display generation component 120, indicated by the dashed line in this top view). Since the display generation component 120 is optionally a head-mounted device, the field of view of the display generation component 120 is optionally the same as or similar to the user's field of view.

[0216] In Figure 7A1 , the user is depicted as performing an air pinch gesture (e.g., when the user's attention is directed to option 728a, as indicated by the fixation point 798, using the hand 720) to provide input to the computer system 101 to provide user input pointing to the content displayed by the computer system 101. This description is intended to be exemplary and not restrictive; the user optionally uses different air gestures and / or other forms of input described in reference Figures 7A to 7F to provide user input.

[0217] In some embodiments, the computer system 101 responds to user input as described in reference Figures 7A to 7F .

[0218] In Figure 7A1 the example, since the user's hand is within the field of view of the display generation component 120, it is visible within the three-dimensional environment. That is, the user can optionally see any part of their own body within the field of view of the display generation component 120 in the three-dimensional environment. It should be understood that one or more or all aspects of the present disclosure as shown or described and / or referenced in the corresponding method are optionally implemented on the computer system 101 and the display generation unit 120 in a manner similar or analogous to Figures 7A to 7F that shown Figure 7A1 or described.

[0219] As illustrated in the top view 718, the user 706 is shown sitting on the couch 722 while interacting with the computer system 101. When interacting with the computer system 101, in Figure 7A this example, the computer system 101 detects a selection input from the user's hand 720 pointing to the virtual environment selection user interface element 728a displayed in the control center user interface 724. For example, the first computer system 101 is configured to detect a selection input made via a tap or a hand gesture in the air (such as pointing or pinching) towards the interface element 728a. In response to selecting the virtual environment selection user interface element 728a, the computer system 101 displays the environment selection user interface 730 in the three-dimensional environment 704, as Figure 7B shown. For example, the computer system 101 updates the three-dimensional environment 704 and replaces the control center user interface 724 with the environment selection user interface 730.

[0220] As Figure 7B shown, the environment selection user interface 730 includes a first time-of-day setting interface 732 and / or a second time-of-day setting interface 734. The computer system 101 displays the first time-of-day setting interface 732 or the second time-of-day setting interface 734 according to the corresponding settings of the computer system. For example, if the corresponding settings of the computer system are set to a first value, the first time-of-day setting interface 732 is optionally displayed. If the corresponding settings of the computer system are set to a second value, the second time-of-day setting interface 734 is optionally displayed. In some embodiments, the first value and the second value respectively correspond to different lighting characteristics of the corresponding virtual environment, such as a light mode or a dark mode. In some embodiments, if the corresponding settings are not set to a specific value, both the first time-of-day setting interface 732 and the second time-of-day setting interface 734 are displayed.

[0221] In some embodiments, the first time-of-day setting interface 732 corresponds to a light mode (e.g., a partially cloudy and sunny morning period, or a sunny and cloudless afternoon period). Figure 7BThe time-of-day setting interface 730 in includes selectable options for selecting corresponding virtual environments, with the corresponding time-of-day settings applied thereto displayed. For example, the time-of-day setting interface 730 includes selectable options B1, B2, and B3. In one example, B1 corresponds to a beach scene virtual environment, which optionally includes virtual elements such as a beach, palm trees, and / or umbrellas. In another example, B2 corresponds to a mountain scene virtual environment, which optionally includes virtual elements such as mountains, trees, animals, and / or skiers. In another example, B3 corresponds to a park virtual environment, which optionally includes a playground, a basketball court, and / or a barbecue pit. Thus, at the time-of-day setting interface 732, selecting one of the selectable options (e.g., B1, B2, or B3) corresponding to the corresponding virtual environment will optionally result in the application of a light mode for the selected corresponding virtual environment.

[0222] In some embodiments, the second time-of-day setting interface 734 corresponds to a dark mode (e.g., at night when it is dark and the sun has set). Figure 7B The second time-of-day setting interface 734 in includes selectable options for selecting corresponding virtual environments, with the corresponding time-of-day settings applied thereto displayed. For example, the second time-of-day setting interface 734 includes selectable options B1, B2, and B3. As noted above, B1 optionally corresponds to a beach scene virtual environment, B2 optionally corresponds to a mountain scene, and B3 optionally corresponds to a park environment. At the second time-of-day setting interface 734, selecting one of the selectable options (e.g., B1, B2, or B3) corresponding to the corresponding virtual environment will optionally result in the application of a dark mode for the selected corresponding virtual environment.

[0223] In some embodiments, the environment selection user interface 730 includes an ambiance effect interface 736. The display of the ambiance effect interface 736 is optionally independent of whether the corresponding settings of the computer system 101 have a first value or a second value. As Figure 7BAs shown, the ambiance effect interface 736 includes selectable options E1, E2, and E3. In some embodiments, a request to display an ambiance effect (e.g., select E1, E2, or E3) causes the computer system 101 to modify one or more visual characteristics of the physical environment visible in the three-dimensional environment 702 such that the physical environment appears to be enhanced as if via color and / or exposure adjustment, as described in more detail with reference to method 800. In some embodiments, applying an ambiance effect to the physical environment modifies one or more visual characteristics of the physical environment such that the physical environment appears to be in a different time, location, and / or condition (e.g., morning light rather than afternoon light, sunny rather than cloudy). In some embodiments, applying an ambiance effect to the physical environment modifies the physical environment to appear dim and / or humid.

[0224] As Figure 7B Further shown, the computer system 101 is configured to detect a selection input from the user's hand 720 pointing to the selectable option B1 in the first time-of-day setting interface 732, the selection input initiating the display of a beach scene virtual environment, and the first time-of-day setting being applied to the environment. In response to detecting the selection of the selectable option B1 from the first time-of-day setting interface 732, a beach scene virtual environment is displayed in the three-dimensional environment 704, as Figure 7C shown. Specifically, the computer system 101 updates the three-dimensional environment 704 to include a beach scene virtual environment 745 having a visual appearance corresponding to the first time-of-day setting corresponding to the light mode.

[0225] As Figure 7C shown, the first time-of-day setting interface 730 remains displayed in the three-dimensional environment 704, and the selectable option B1 is shaded to indicate that the currently displayed virtual environment 745 corresponds to B1. As shown, the virtual environment 745 includes a virtual sun 740, a virtual table and umbrella 742, and virtual trees 744. Since the first time-of-day setting is applied to the virtual environment 745, the virtual environment 745 corresponds to a light mode simulated time of day, which includes a visual appearance corresponding to a sunlit environment in the simulated physical space of the beach scene. As Figure 7C further shown in the three-dimensional environment 704 of, the virtual environment 745 is displayed in a partially immersive manner (e.g., as described in more detail with reference to method 800). For example, increasing the immersion level optionally causes more of the virtual environment 745 to be displayed, replacing and / or obscuring more of the physical environment, and decreasing the immersion level optionally causes less of the virtual environment to be displayed, thereby revealing portions of the physical environment that were previously not displayed and / or obscured. As shown by the immersion level indicator 716, the shadow in the immersion level indicator 716 indicates that the immersion level of the virtual environment 745 is approximately 60% immersion.

[0226] As shown in the top view 718, at the immersion level of the virtual environment 745 shown in Figure 7C , the virtual environment 745 optionally extends from the second zone boundary 729b to the distant wall 714 in the three-dimensional environment 704. As Figure 7C illustrated, the representation of the virtual sun 740 is located between the first zone boundary 729a and the distant wall 714, the representation of the virtual table and umbrella 742 is located between the first zone boundary 729a and the distant wall 714, and the representation of the virtual trees 744 is located between the first zone boundary 729a and the second zone boundary 729b. As Figure 7C further illustrated, the video application user interface 726 and the environment selection user interface 730 are positioned along the second zone boundary 729b. As Figure 7C shown, the real-world physical objects remain at their previous positions in the three-dimensional environment 704. For example, as previously described, the corner table 708 is located between the first zone boundary 729a and the distant wall 714, the side table 712 is located between the first zone boundary 729a and the third zone boundary 729c, the coffee table 710 is located between the second zone boundary 729b and the third zone boundary 729c, and the sofa 722 is located between the third zone boundary 729c and the rear wall.

[0227] Figure 7D illustrates that the computer system 101 displays the three-dimensional environment 704, which includes the virtual environment 745, and the time-of-day setting for the second day is applied to the virtual environment 745. As Figure 7D shown, in response to detecting an input selecting option B1 in the time-of-day setting interface 734 in Figure 7B , the computer system 101 displays a beach scene virtual environment with a visual appearance corresponding to the time-of-day setting for the second day corresponding to the dark mode. As Figure 7D shown, the virtual environment 745 includes a virtual moon 746, virtual stars 748, a virtual table and umbrella 742, and virtual trees 744. Since the time-of-day setting for the second day is applied to the virtual environment 745, the virtual environment 745 has a visual appearance corresponding to the night mode time-of-day in the simulated physical space of the beach scene (e.g., a dark beach environment having a visual appearance corresponding to a time-of-day darker than the time-of-day of the beach environment corresponding to the light mode).

[0228] As Figure 7D further illustrated in the three-dimensional environment 704 in Figure 7DAs shown in the three-dimensional environment 704, when the virtual environment 745 with the second time-of-day setting is displayed, the portions of the three-dimensional environment 702 not blocked by the virtual environment 745 (such as the floor and a portion of the coffee table 710) are displayed darker, blurrier, and / or with fewer colors (compared to when the virtual environment 745 with the first time-of-day setting is displayed, as shown in Figure 7C . In some embodiments, the second time-of-day setting does not cause the computer system 101 to change the visual appearance of virtual content that is not part of the virtual environment. For example, the computer system does not change the appearance of an application such as the video application user interface 726. As further shown in the three-dimensional environment 704 in Figure 7D , compared to the virtual environment 745 displayed using the first time-of-day setting shown in Figure 7C , the virtual environment 745 is displayed at the same level of immersion. Specifically, as shown by the immersion level indicator 716, the shading in the immersion level indicator 716 indicates that the immersion level of the virtual environment 745 remains at approximately 60% immersion.

[0229] As shown in the top view 718 in Figure 7D , the representations of the virtual moon 746 and the virtual stars 748 are located between the first zone boundary 729a and the distant wall 714. The remaining elements remain in the same positions they had in Figure 7C . As further illustrated in the three-dimensional environment 704, optionally the control center user interface 724 is displayed to allow the user to select one or more selectable elements from the control center user interface 724. For example, the computer system 101 detects a selection input from the user's hand 720 directed at the immersion slider user interface element 728e (illustrated as element "5") for increasing the immersion level, as shown in Figure 7E . In some embodiments, the selection input is a pinch and / or drag on the immersion slider user interface element 728e for increasing the immersion level.

[0230] Figure 7E Illustrated in Figure 7D is the virtual environment 745, the immersion level of which increases in response to an input detected from the hand 720 in Figure 7D . Specifically, as shown by the immersion level indicator 716, the shading in the immersion level indicator 716 indicates that the immersion level of the virtual environment 745 has increased to approximately 90% immersion. The increase in immersion causes the computer system 101 to display more of the virtual environment 745, replacing and / or obscuring more of the physical environment. For example, as shown in Figure 7E , the increase in immersion obscures more of the floor. As shown in the top view 718, at 90% immersion, the virtual environment 745 extends from the zone boundary 731b to the distant wall 714.

[0231] Figure 7F illustrates a three - dimensional environment 704 in response to the computer system 101 detecting an input for selecting an ambiance effect option from the user interface 730 for the illustrated environment. Referring to Figure 7B , the computer system 101 detects a selection input from the user's hand 720 that points to the selectable option E2, which applies a corresponding ambiance effect to the three - dimensional environment 704. In response to this selection, as Figure 7B illustrates, the visual characteristics of the physical environment are enhanced and / or changed; for example, simulated light is shown as entering through the virtual window 750, which optionally causes more ambient light to be present in the three - dimensional environment 704 (compared to the amount of ambient light in the physical environment), and thus increases the corresponding lighting effect. For example, Figure 7F the simulated light entering through the virtual window 750 in Figure 7F causes various shadows to be virtually projected onto various real - world objects in the physical environment, and these shadows did not previously exist. As shown, the simulated light entering through the virtual window 750 causes the corner table 708 to virtually project a simulated shadow 752, the side table 712 to virtually project a simulated shadow 754, and the coffee table 710 to virtually project a simulated shadow 756. Additional details regarding applying an ambiance effect to the three - dimensional environment 704 are described with reference to method 800.

[0232] Figures 8A to 8K is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary method of selectively determining a time - of - day setting based on system settings and applying the time - of - day setting to a corresponding virtual environment according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, method 800 is executed at a computer system (e.g., the computer system 101 in FIG. 1, such as a tablet computer, a smart phone, a wearable computer, or a head - mounted device), which includes a display - generating component (e.g., the display - generating component 120 in FIGS. 1, Figure 3 and Figure 4 ) (e.g., a head - up display, a monitor, a touch screen, a projector, etc.) and one or more cameras (e.g., a camera pointing downward at the user's hand (e.g., a color sensor, an infrared sensor, and other depth - sensing cameras) or a camera pointing forward from the user's head). In some embodiments, method 800 is managed by instructions stored in a non - transitory computer - readable storage medium and executed by one or more processors of the computer system, such as one or more processors 202 of the computer system 101 (e.g., Figure 1A the control unit 110 in

[0233] In some embodiments, method 800 is performed at a computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices. For example, a mobile device (e.g., a tablet, smartphone, media player, or wearable device), or a computer or other electronic device. In some embodiments, the display generation component is a display integrated with the electronic device (optionally a touchscreen display), an external display such as a monitor, projector, television, and / or a hardware component (optionally integrated or external) for projecting a user interface or making the user interface visible to one or more users. In some embodiments, the one or more input devices include electronic devices or components capable of receiving user input (e.g., capturing user input, detecting user input) and transmitting information associated with the user input to the computer system. Examples of input devices include a touchscreen, a mouse (e.g., external), a trackpad (optionally integrated or external), a touchpad (optionally integrated or external), a remote control device (e.g., external), another mobile device (e.g., separate from the computer system), a handheld device (e.g., external), a controller (e.g., external), a camera, a depth sensor, an eye tracking device, and / or a motion sensor (e.g., a hand tracking device, a hand motion sensor). In some embodiments, the computer system communicates with a hand tracking device (e.g., one or more cameras, depth sensors, proximity sensors, and / or touch sensors (e.g., a touchscreen or touchpad)). In some embodiments, the hand tracking device is a wearable device, such as a smart glove. In some embodiments, the hand tracking device is a handheld input device, such as a remote control or a stylus.

[0234] In some embodiments, when a three-dimensional environment (e.g., an environment corresponding to the physical environment surrounding the display generation component; in some embodiments, the three-dimensional environment has one or more of the characteristics of the three-dimensional environments in methods 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, and / or 1800. In some embodiments, the three-dimensional environment is generated, displayed, or otherwise made viewable by the computer system (e.g., an extended reality (XR) environment, such as a virtual reality (VR) environment, a mixed reality (MR) environment, and / or an augmented reality (AR) environment). In some embodiments, the physical environment is visible through a transparent portion of the display generation component (e.g., true or real passthrough). In some embodiments, a representation of the physical environment is displayed in the three-dimensional environment via the display generation component (e.g., virtual or video passthrough), visible via the display generation component, such as Figure 7B environment 704 in, the computer system receives (802a) a first input via one or more input devices, such as from Figure 7Bthe hand 720 therein (e.g., tapping in space or making a hand air gesture, such as an air point or an air pinch at an icon or other selectable option in an augmented reality (AR) or virtual reality (VR) environment, to initiate and / or display a virtual environment; or input, using an interface controller in the AR or VR environment to provide input for selecting an icon or other selectable option for initiating and / or displaying a virtual environment (such as a corresponding virtual environment described later). In some embodiments, the first input includes, when the user's attention is directed to an icon or selectable option, causing the hand of the user of the computer system to perform a pinching air gesture in which the index finger and thumb of the user's hand come together and touch. In some embodiments, the first user input is a sole focus and / or sole gaze input (e.g., does not include input from one or more parts of the user other than those parts providing the focus input).

[0235] In some embodiments, the first input corresponds to a request to display a corresponding virtual environment representing a simulated physical space, such as a request to display Figure 7B background 1 therein (e.g., the corresponding virtual environment optionally has one or more of the characteristics of the virtual environments of methods 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, and / or 1800). In some embodiments, the corresponding virtual environment is a representation that optionally replaces the physical environment (e.g., full immersion) or is optionally displayed simultaneously with the representation of the physical environment (e.g., partial immersion) in a three-dimensional environment. Some examples of virtual environments include a lake environment, a mountain environment, a sunset scene, a sunrise scene, a nighttime environment, a grassland environment, and / or a concert scene. In some embodiments, the virtual environment is based on a real physical location, such as a museum and / or an aquarium. In some embodiments, the virtual environment is a location designed by an artist. Thus, displaying the virtual environment in a three-dimensional environment optionally provides the user with a virtual experience as if the user were physically located in the virtual environment.

[0236] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input (802b), and based on determining that the corresponding settings of the computer system have a first value and the corresponding virtual environment is a first virtual environment (e.g., the corresponding settings include settings corresponding to and / or defining the time of day of the first virtual environment, and the first value optionally corresponds to a daytime or morning time when it is sunny), the computer system displays (802c) in a three-dimensional environment a first virtual environment having a first visual appearance (e.g., a first size, a first brightness, a first opacity, a first clarity (or blurriness) level, and / or a first immersion level) corresponding to the first time of day in the physical space simulated by the first virtual environment, such as Figure 7CThe time of day in the virtual environment 745 (e.g., the first time of day optionally corresponds to a simulated time of day such as a light mode (e.g., 10:00 in the morning when it is cloudy turning sunny, or 3:00 in the afternoon when it is clear and cloudless)). For example, the first virtual environment optionally includes a first brightness, a first opacity, a first clarity (or blurriness) level, and / or a first quantity of virtual objects (e.g., rainbows, sunlight, and / or flying birds) at the first time of day.

[0237] In some embodiments, based on determining that the corresponding setting of the computer system has a second value (e.g., the second value optionally corresponds to a dark mode when the sky darkens and the sun sets), the second value being different from the first value (e.g., the first value and the second value are optionally associated with different time characteristics of the day (e.g., light mode or dark mode)), and the corresponding virtual environment being the first virtual environment, the computer system displays (802d) in a three-dimensional environment the first virtual environment having a second visual appearance corresponding to a second time of day in the physical space simulated by the first virtual environment (e.g., the second time of day optionally corresponds to a simulated time of day, such as a dark mode (e.g., 11:00 at night when the sun has set and the moon and stars are shining in the sky)), where the second visual appearance is different from the first visual appearance and the second time of day is different from the first time of day, such as Figure 7DThe time of day in the environment 745. For example, the second visual appearance optionally corresponds to a second size, second brightness (or second darkness), second opacity, second clarity (or blurriness) level, and / or second immersion level in a three-dimensional environment. In some embodiments, the second visual appearance corresponding to the second time of day is associated with a visual appearance that is darker than the first visual appearance corresponding to the first time of day. In some embodiments, the second visual appearance corresponding to the second time of day is associated with a second quantity of virtual objects in a first virtual environment corresponding to a darker visual appearance (e.g., the moon and stars shining in the sky). Thus, the first value and the second value are optionally associated with different lighting characteristics of the first virtual environment. For example, the first value is optionally associated with a display value that is brighter (e.g., higher light intensity) and / or lighter than the second value. Additionally, the first virtual environment corresponding to the second value optionally includes more or fewer virtual objects than the first virtual environment corresponding to the first value. Thus, the corresponding setting of the first value (or second value) optionally involves the lighting characteristics applied to the virtual objects in the first virtual environment and optionally may also control other features of the first virtual environment, such as the number of virtual objects displayed in the first virtual environment. Automatically selecting the time of day (e.g., the first time of day or the second time of day) for the virtual environment based on the settings of the computer system provides a more realistic and immersive user experience, reduces the amount of input required to select the time of day to apply to the virtual environment, and simplifies the interaction between the user and the computer system.

[0238] In some embodiments, displaying a first virtual environment having a first visual appearance corresponding to a first time of day (e.g., the first time of day optionally corresponds to a simulated time of day, such as a light mode) includes displaying the first virtual environment (804a) with simulated lighting corresponding to the first time of day, such as Figure 7C the simulated daylight lighting in the environment 745. In some embodiments, the simulated lighting corresponding to the first time of day affects the brightness level of the first virtual environment, including virtual elements in the virtual environment. In some embodiments, the simulated lighting comes from light sources such as light bulbs, flashlights, lighters, fluorescent tubes, candles, matches, the sun, and / or lasers. The simulated lighting from the light sources is optionally adjusted to a corresponding light intensity corresponding to the first time of day.

[0239] In some embodiments, displaying a first virtual environment having a second visual appearance corresponding to a second time of day includes displaying the first virtual environment (804b) with simulated lighting corresponding to the second time of day, such as Figure 7DDaytime simulated lighting of the environment 745 in. In some embodiments, the simulated lighting corresponding to the second time of day affects the brightness level and optionally comes from a light source such as a light bulb, flashlight, lighter, lamp tube, candle, match, moonlight, and / or laser. The simulated lighting from the light source optionally includes a corresponding light intensity adjusted to correspond to the second time of day. Displaying the first virtual environment with simulated lighting reduces the number of inputs required to adjust the lighting in the virtual environment and simplifies the interaction between the user and the computer system.

[0240] In some embodiments, the simulated lighting includes simulated natural lighting (806) from a simulated natural light source, such as Figure 7C the simulated sun in. In some embodiments, the simulated natural lighting optionally comes from a natural light source such as the sun, moon, stars, volcano, flame, jellyfish, firefly, glowworm, or other simulated natural light source corresponding to the corresponding time of day. Displaying the first virtual environment with simulated lighting including simulated natural lighting reduces the number of inputs required to adjust the lighting in the virtual environment to include a natural light source and simplifies the interaction between the user and the computer system.

[0241] In some embodiments, displaying the first virtual environment with a first visual appearance includes displaying in the first virtual environment a first virtual element (e.g., a virtual palm tree, a virtual picnic table, or a virtual umbrella) (808a) virtually illuminated by simulated lighting (e.g., the sun) corresponding to the first time of day, such as simulated sunlight Figure 7C the umbrella in, and displaying the second virtual environment with a second visual appearance includes displaying in the first virtual environment a first virtual element (808b) virtually illuminated by simulated lighting (e.g., the moon and / or stars) corresponding to the second time of day, such as simulated moonlight Figure 7D the umbrella in. For example, the first virtual environment optionally includes a beach scene that optionally includes virtual elements such as a beach, palm trees, and / or an umbrella. The first virtual element is optionally a virtual palm tree that is optionally virtually illuminated by the simulated sun for the first time of day. For the second time of day, the same virtual palm tree is optionally illuminated by the simulated moon and stars. Displaying the same element in the virtual environment with simulated lighting corresponding to different times of day provides a more consistent presentation of the virtual environment because the same element is illuminated by the simulated lighting, thereby reducing errors in the interaction with the computer system and simplifying the interaction between the user and the computer system.

[0242] In some embodiments, a corresponding setting (810) is selected based on user input, such as if Figure 7CUser 706 in sets the time - of - day setting of environment 745 (e.g., the input optionally includes the user's hand performing a pinching air gesture, tapping on a touchpad, clicking on a touchpad, and / or selection of one or more buttons on a handheld controller). In some embodiments, the three - dimensional environment includes a control - center user interface, which optionally includes a first selectable element corresponding to the time - of - day characteristic of the light mode and a second selectable element corresponding to the time - of - day characteristic of the dark mode. For example, a user of a computer system can optionally switch from the light mode to the dark mode or from the dark mode to the light mode via the control - center user interface according to their personal preferences. In another example, a user of a computer system can optionally change the text size, change the volume output setting, and / or change the Wi - Fi setting via the controller - center user interface. Allowing the user of the first computer system to manually select the time - of - day characteristics corresponding to the light mode and the dark mode enables efficient access to changing the time - of - day characteristics of the virtual environment, thereby improving user - device interaction.

[0243] In some embodiments, the corresponding setting having a first value (e.g., light mode) or a second value (e.g., dark mode) is determined automatically by the computer system without detecting an input (812) corresponding to the selection of the first value or the second value, such as if the computer system 101 automatically sets Figure 7CTime setting of the day in the environment 745. In some embodiments, the automatic determination of the first value or the second value applied to the corresponding setting is automatically determined based on meeting criteria such as the current weather condition at the computer system or the current time of day at the electronic device. In some embodiments, the automatic value of the corresponding setting varies according to the location of the electronic device because the current weather condition optionally varies according to the location of the computer device (e.g., sunny in Los Angeles, rainy in Seattle), and / or because the current time of day depends on the location of the electronic device and / or different time zones (e.g., the current time in Los Angeles is 3:00 p.m., while the current time in Hawaii will be 12:00 p.m.). For example, if it is 9:00 a.m. at the computer system, the first value is optionally applied. If the current weather is dark and rainy, the second value is optionally applied. If it is 8:00 p.m. at the computer system and the computer system is located in sunny Alaska in the summer, the first value is optionally applied. In some embodiments, if it is 11:00 p.m. at the computer system (regardless of the weather), the second value is optionally applied. In some embodiments, if the weather at the computer system is sunny (regardless of the time), the first value is optionally applied. Automatically determining the first value or the second value to be applied to the corresponding setting reduces the number of inputs required to select the corresponding value to be applied (e.g., the time of day), thereby reducing errors in the interaction with the computer system.

[0244] In some embodiments, the automatic determination of the computer system includes (814a) automatically setting the first value (e.g., light mode) for the corresponding setting according to determining that the current time of day at the computer system is the first time of day, and (814b) automatically setting the second value (e.g., dark mode) for the corresponding setting according to determining that the current time of day at the computer system is the second time of day different from the first time of day (814c). In some embodiments, the automatic determination of the first value or the second value applied to the corresponding setting is automatically determined based on the current time when the request to display the corresponding virtual environment is initiated and / or when the corresponding virtual environment has been displayed (e.g., automatically switching the corresponding virtual environment between different times of day when the corresponding virtual environment has been displayed). For example, if the current time of day is between 6:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., the first value is optionally automatically applied. In another example, if the current time of day is between 6:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., the second value is optionally automatically applied. Automatically determining the first value or the second value to be applied to the corresponding setting based on the current time of day reduces the number of inputs required to select the corresponding value to be applied (e.g., the time of day), thereby reducing errors in the interaction with the computer system.

[0245] In some embodiments, the automatic determination by the computer system includes (816a): automatically setting a first value (e.g., light mode) for a corresponding setting (816b) based on determining that the light level in the physical space at the computer system (e.g., the physical environment around the computer system and / or the user, such as the living room where the computer system is located) is a first light level, such as if Figure 7C the light in the space where computer system 101 in Figure 7C is at a first level, and automatically setting a second value (e.g., dark mode) for the corresponding setting (816c) based on determining that the light level in the physical space at the computer system is a second light level different from the first light level, such as if

[0246] the light in the space where computer system 101 in Figure 7C is at a second level. In some embodiments, the automatic determination of the first or second value applied to the corresponding setting is automatically determined based on the light level in the environment where the computer system and / or the user is located (such as a living room, bedroom, garage, office, and / or park location). In some embodiments, the light level can be measured in lux, which is a unit of measurement of light intensity. For example, at an outdoor location during the day, the light level can be in the range of approximately 10,000 lux to 25,000 lux. At an outdoor location at night, the light level can be approximately 20 lux to 50 lux. For example, if the light level at the location where the computer system is located is between 51 lux and 100,000 lux, the first value is automatically applied (and / or if the light level is greater than a threshold of 5 lux, 10 lux, 25 lux, 50 lux, 100 lux, 200 lux, 500 lux, or 1000 lux). In another example, if the light level at the location where the computer system is located is between 0 lux and 50 lux, the second value is automatically applied (and / or if the light level is less than a threshold of 5 lux, 10 lux, 25 lux, 50 lux, 100 lux, 200 lux, 500 lux, or 1000 lux). In another example, if the computer system is located in a sunny park, the first value is automatically applied. In another example, if the computer system is located in a dark garage, the second value is automatically applied. Automatically determining the first or second value to be applied to the corresponding setting based on the light level in the room reduces the number of inputs required to select the corresponding value (e.g., time of day) to be applied to match the light in the corresponding environment where the computer system is located, thereby reducing errors in the interaction with the computer system.

[0246] In some embodiments, before displaying a first virtual environment having a first visual appearance or a second visual appearance, the computer system displays (818), via a display generation component, a control center user interface (e.g., as described with reference to step 810), the control center user interface being for controlling one or more functions of the computer system and including one or more selectable options that can be selected to set a corresponding setting to a first value (e.g., light mode) or a second value (e.g., dark mode), such as described with reference to step 810, such as Figure 7C the control center 730 in. For example, if a first selectable option is selected in the control center, the virtual environment will optionally include a beach scene having time-of-day lighting characteristics of the light mode. In another example, if a second selectable option is selected in the control center, the virtual environment will optionally include a beach scene having time-of-day lighting characteristics of the dark mode. Allowing a user of the first computer system to manually select the time-of-day characteristics in the control center user interface enables seamless and efficient access to changing the time-of-day characteristics of the corresponding virtual environment, thereby improving user-device interaction.

[0247] In some embodiments, when the control center user interface is displayed via the display generation component, the computer system receives (820), via one or more input devices, a second input pointing to one or more selectable options, such as pointing Figure 7B to an input of the control center 730 in (e.g., the one or more selectable options are optionally icons and / or thumbnails that can correspond to a first value or a second value, a virtual environment, an immersion level, an atmosphere effect, and / or a volume intensity level. In some embodiments, the selection input includes an air pinch gesture detected when the user's attention is directed to a relevant selectable option, a click on a touch-sensitive surface, and / or a mouse click), sets the corresponding setting to the first value or the second value according to the second input, and stops displaying the control center user interface, such as Figure 7C and Figure 7Das shown (e.g., while continuing to display the corresponding virtual environment). In some embodiments, the control center user interface optionally includes one or more selectable options that point to different time characteristics and / or ambiance effects of the day. For example, if a first value corresponding to the time characteristic of the light mode of the day is selected, the time characteristic of the light mode of the day is optionally applied to the corresponding virtual environment, and the control center user interface stops being displayed in the three-dimensional environment. In some embodiments, after a specified threshold (e.g., 0 seconds, 1 second, 2 seconds, 4 seconds, 6 seconds, 8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, or 40 seconds) after receiving a second input, the control center user interface stops being displayed. In some embodiments, the control center user interface fades out (e.g., from low transparency to maximum transparency) until the control center user interface is no longer visible in the three-dimensional environment. Stopping the display of the control center user interface after selecting the first value or the second value enhances the user's virtual experience by removing elements in the three-dimensional environment that may block selected portions of the corresponding virtual environment, thereby improving the user-device interaction.

[0248] In some embodiments, the computer system displays (822a) a virtual environment selection user interface via a display generation component, where the virtual environment selection user interface includes a first selectable option that can be selected to display a first virtual environment, such as Figure 7B user interface 730 in (e.g., a beach environment, a mountain environment, a park environment, a city environment, and / or an amusement park environment). In some embodiments, according to determining that the corresponding setting has a first value (e.g., light mode), the first selectable option and a visual indication corresponding to the first time of day (e.g., an icon representing the first virtual environment and the corresponding first time of day) are displayed (822b) together, such as Figure 7B options B1 - B3 in, and according to determining that the corresponding setting has a second value (e.g., dark mode), the first selectable option and a visual indication corresponding to the second time of day (e.g., an icon representing the first virtual environment and the corresponding second time of day) are displayed (822c) together, such as Figure 7BOptions B1 - B3 in []. In some embodiments, the three - dimensional environment includes a virtual environment selection user interface that includes one or more selectable options corresponding to virtual environments that can be selected for display. For example, the virtual environments that can be selected for display optionally include different types of virtual environments, such as beach, mountain environment, urban environment, and / or amusement park environment. In some embodiments, the selectable options to be displayed in the virtual environment selection user interface are displayed together with corresponding visual indicators, such as icons representing the corresponding virtual environments (e.g., images of virtual environment scenes) and corresponding first time of day and / or second time of day. In some embodiments, the icons representing the corresponding virtual environments include images of the corresponding virtual scenes and the corresponding time - of - day appearance applied to the images. For example, a first icon representing an urban environment includes a partial image of a night - time city corresponding to the second time of day (e.g., dark mode). In another example, a second icon representing an urban environment includes a partial image of a daytime city corresponding to the first time of day (e.g., light mode). In some embodiments, the icons are unique and provide an indication of the selectable option corresponding to the corresponding virtual environment and the corresponding first time of day and / or second time of day. Displaying the selectable options of the corresponding virtual environments and the visual indicators corresponding to the first time of day or the second time of day in the virtual environment selection user interface clearly conveys the characteristics of the virtual environment - the characteristics that will be displayed when the corresponding selectable option is selected, thus reducing errors in interactions with the computer system.

[0249] In some embodiments, the visual indicator corresponding to the first time of day includes a visual representation of a first visual appearance of a first virtual environment corresponding to the first time of day (e.g., a thumbnail of the first virtual environment corresponding to the first time of day, such as a preview of a portion of the first virtual environment at the first time of day) (824a), such as if Figure 7B the user interface 730 in [] includes such a preview. In some embodiments, the visual representation of the first visual appearance of the first virtual environment corresponding to the first time of day is a thumbnail that provides a preview of the first virtual environment corresponding to the first time of day. For example, the virtual environment selection user interface optionally includes a selectable option corresponding to a park environment and a thumbnail of the park environment with a light mode applied to the park environment. For example, the thumbnail of the park environment optionally shows a preview of the park, including a bright and dazzling sun.

[0250] In some embodiments, the visual indication corresponding to the second time of day includes a visual representation of a second visual appearance of the first virtual environment corresponding to the second time of day (e.g., a thumbnail of the first virtual environment corresponding to the second time of day, such as a preview of a portion of the first virtual environment at the second time of day) (824b), such as if Figure 7B the user interface 730 in includes such a preview. In some embodiments, the visual representation of the second visual appearance of the first virtual environment corresponding to the second time of day is a thumbnail that provides a preview of the first virtual environment corresponding to the second time of day. Displaying selectable options for the corresponding virtual environment and visual representations corresponding to the first time of day and / or the second time of day in the virtual environment selection user interface clearly conveys the characteristics of the virtual environment - the characteristics that will be displayed when the corresponding selectable option is selected, thus reducing errors in interactions with the computer system.

[0251] In some embodiments, in response to detecting a first input and based on determining that the corresponding virtual environment is a second virtual environment (826a) different from the first virtual environment, and based on determining that the corresponding settings of the computer system have a second value (e.g., dark mode), the computer system displays (826b) the second virtual environment in a three-dimensional environment, the second virtual environment having a third visual appearance corresponding to a third time of day in the physical space simulated by the second virtual environment, where the third time of day is different from the second time of day, such as different times of day simulated for different virtual environments 745 in dark mode. In some embodiments, the third visual appearance optionally corresponds to different times of night, such as dusk, midnight, and pre-dawn. In some embodiments, the third visual appearance optionally corresponds to a third size, a third brightness (or third darkness), a third opacity, a third clarity (or blurriness) level, and / or a third immersion level in the three-dimensional environment. In some embodiments, the third visual appearance corresponding to the third time of day is associated with a visual appearance that is darker and / or brighter compared to the first visual appearance corresponding to the first time of day and / or the second visual appearance corresponding to the second time of day. In some embodiments, the third visual appearance corresponding to the third time of day is associated with a third number of virtual objects in the second virtual environment corresponding to a darker visual appearance (e.g., the moon and stars shining in the sky). Enabling the display of the second virtual environment having the third visual appearance corresponding to the third time of day allows for maintaining an appropriate time of day in different virtual environments, thus avoiding the virtual environment interfering with the rest of the content displayed in the user interface.

[0252] In some embodiments, in response to detecting a first input and based on determining that the corresponding virtual environment is a second virtual environment (828a) that is different from the first virtual environment, and based on determining that the corresponding settings of the computer system have a first value (e.g., light mode), the computer system displays (828b) the second virtual environment in a three-dimensional environment, the second virtual environment having a third visual appearance corresponding to a third time of day in the physical space simulated by the second virtual environment, where the third time of day is different from the first time of day, such as different times of day simulated for different virtual environments 745 in light mode. In some embodiments, the third visual appearance optionally corresponds to different daytime times of day, such as morning, afternoon, and evening. In some embodiments, the third visual appearance optionally corresponds to a third size, a third brightness (or third darkness), a third opacity, a third clarity (or blurriness) level, and / or a third immersion level in the three-dimensional environment. In some embodiments, the third visual appearance corresponding to the third time of day is associated with a visual appearance that is brighter and / or darker than the first visual appearance corresponding to the first time of day and / or the second visual appearance corresponding to the second time of day. In some embodiments, the third visual appearance corresponding to the third time of day is associated with a third number of virtual objects in the second virtual environment corresponding to a darker visual appearance (e.g., moon and stars shining in the sky). Enabling the display of the second virtual environment having the third visual appearance corresponding to the third time of day allows for maintaining an appropriate time of day across different virtual environments, thereby avoiding the virtual environment interfering with the rest of the content displayed in the user interface.

[0253] In some embodiments, in response to detecting a first input, the physical environment of the user of the computer system is visible simultaneously with the first virtual environment (830a) (e.g., in a three-dimensional environment visible via a display generation component), such as a portion of the physical environment visible in Figure 7D In some embodiments, in response to detecting a first input (830b), and based on determining that the corresponding settings of the computer system have a first value (e.g., light mode) and the corresponding virtual environment is the first virtual environment, the computer system maintains (830c) the visual salience of the user's physical environment in the three-dimensional environment, such as the salience of the physical environment in Figure 7C In some embodiments, based on determining that the corresponding settings of the computer system have a second value (e.g., dark mode) and the corresponding virtual environment is the first virtual environment, the computer system reduces (830d) the visual salience of the user's physical environment in the three-dimensional environment, such as Figure 7DThe saliency of the physical environment. In some embodiments, reducing the visual saliency of the user's physical environment in the three-dimensional environment optionally includes reducing the brightness, opacity, and / or clarity in the three-dimensional environment of the portion of the physical environment that is visible outside the first virtual environment. For example, the first virtual environment is optionally visible simultaneously with the physical environment that optionally includes a coffee table. If the corresponding setting of the computer system has a second value, the visual saliency of the coffee table is optionally reduced. Selectively reducing or maintaining the visual saliency of the physical environment in the three-dimensional environment based on the settings of the computer system reduces the number of inputs required to change the visual saliency and simplifies the interaction of the user with the computer system.

[0254] In some embodiments, the computer system receives (832), via one or more input devices, a second input corresponding to a request to display an ambient effect applied to the user's physical environment (e.g., as described with reference to step 820 and step 822, the second input is optionally a selection from a control center user interface and / or a virtual environment selection user interface), such as Figure 7B the input pointing to E1 - E3 in which the user's physical environment is visible in the three-dimensional environment. In some embodiments, in response to receiving the second input, the computer system displays (832b) the physical environment with the ambient effect, where the visual appearance of the ambient effect is independent of whether the corresponding setting of the computer system has a first value or a second value, such as Figure 7F shown. In some embodiments, the request to display the ambient effect modifies one or more visual characteristics of the physical environment such that the physical environment appears to be enhanced as if via color and / or exposure adjustment. In some embodiments, applying the ambient effect to the physical environment modifies one or more visual characteristics of the physical environment such that the physical environment appears to be in a different time, location, and / or condition (e.g., morning light instead of afternoon light, sunny day instead of cloudy day). In some embodiments, applying the ambient effect to the physical environment modifies the physical environment to appear dim and / or damp. Displaying the physical environment with the selected ambient effect provides a fast and efficient way to provide an immersive experience while maintaining the visibility of the physical environment, thus promoting the interaction between the user and the physical environment and simplifying the interaction of the user with the computer system.

[0255] In some embodiments, when the second input is received (e.g., as described with reference to step 822, the second input is optionally a selection from a virtual environment selection user interface), the computer system displays the virtual environment selection user interface in front of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment, and wherein the second input points to the virtual environment selection user interface (834a), such as Figure 7BAs shown. In some embodiments, in response to receiving a second input, the computer system updates (834b) the visual appearance of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment to correspond to an ambiance effect, such as Figure 7F As shown. In some embodiments, the three-dimensional environment includes a virtual environment selection user interface that optionally includes one or more elements pointing to one or more ambiance effects. For example, if a first element pointing to a first ambiance effect is selected, the first element is optionally highlighted and / or includes a visual indication indicating the selection of the first ambiance effect, and the portions of the environment shown behind and / or around the virtual environment selection user interface are updated to be shown with the selected ambiance effect. Updating one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment to correspond to the selected ambiance effect provides the user with a quick and efficient way to determine which ambiance effect is currently being applied to the physical environment, thus reducing the amount of input required to determine which ambiance effect to select and simplifying the interaction of the user with the computer system.

[0256] In some embodiments, the computer system receives (836a) via one or more input devices a second input corresponding to a request to display a first type of virtual content (e.g., the corresponding virtual environment is generated by a first application at the computer system), where the corresponding virtual environment corresponds to a second type of virtual content different from the first type (e.g., the corresponding virtual environment is generated by a second application at the computer system). In some embodiments, in response to receiving the second input, the computer system displays (836b) the first type of virtual content via a display generation component, regardless of whether the corresponding setting has a first value or a second value, such as Figures 7C to 7DThe display of the user interface 726 in. In some embodiments, the first type of virtual content is optionally a video application or any other application that includes three-dimensional content. In some embodiments, the visual appearance when displaying the first type of virtual content is independent of the first value and the second value. For example, if the first type of virtual content is a video player application, the corresponding time-of-day setting (e.g., light mode and / or dark mode) is optionally not applied to the content being displayed by the video player application. In some embodiments, in response to an input corresponding to a request to display the corresponding virtual content (e.g., virtual environment), if the corresponding virtual content is of the first type, the corresponding virtual content is displayed in light mode or dark mode (e.g., as described with reference to step 802), regardless of whether the corresponding time-of-day setting has the first value or the second value (e.g., the light mode or dark mode selection is defined by the corresponding virtual content). In some embodiments, if the corresponding virtual content is of the second type, depending on whether the corresponding time-of-day setting has the first value or the second value (e.g., as described with reference to step 802), the corresponding virtual content is displayed in light mode or dark mode (e.g., as described with reference to step 802). Displaying the first type of virtual content regardless of whether the corresponding setting has the first value or the second value ensures that the time-of-day setting is not applied in inappropriate situations, thereby reducing the need for input to correct such applications and simplifying the interaction between the user and the computer system.

[0257] In some embodiments, the first type of virtual content is displayed simultaneously (838a) with one or more portions (e.g., a physical environment and / or portions of the corresponding virtual environment) outside the first type of virtual content of the three-dimensional environment, such as shown in Figures 7C to 7D outside the user interface 726 in. In some embodiments, in response to receiving a second input (838b), based on determining that the corresponding setting has the first value (e.g., light mode), the computer system displays (838c) one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment with a first corresponding visual appearance, such as Figure 7C the appearance of the portions outside the user interface 726 in. In some embodiments, based on determining that the corresponding setting has the second value (e.g., dark mode), the computer system displays (838d) one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment with a second corresponding visual appearance different from the first corresponding visual appearance, such as Figure 7DThe appearance of the portion outside the user interface 726. In some embodiments, the first type of virtual content is optionally a video application or any other application that includes three-dimensional content, and neither selecting the first value nor the second value changes the visual appearance of the first type of virtual content. For example, a three-dimensional environment includes a video application for displaying three-dimensional content and a corresponding virtual environment around the video application. When the corresponding setting is selected as the first value (e.g., light mode), the selection of the first value changes the visual appearance of the corresponding virtual environment to correspond to the light mode. However, the visual appearance of the video application is optionally not changed. Displaying the first type of virtual content regardless of whether the corresponding setting is changed to the first value or the second value ensures that the time-of-day setting is not applied inappropriately while maintaining the ability to modify the visual appearance of the corresponding virtual environment, thereby simplifying the user's interaction with the computer system.

[0258] In some embodiments, in response to detecting a first input, the physical environment of the user of the computer system is visible simultaneously with the first virtual environment (840a), such as in Figure 7B In some embodiments, in response to detecting a first input (840b), based on determining that the corresponding setting of the computer system has a first value and the corresponding virtual environment is the first virtual environment, the computer system reduces (840c) the visual salience of the user's physical environment in the three-dimensional environment by a first amount (e.g., as described with reference to step 830), such as reducing Figure 7C the salience of the physical environment in. In some embodiments, based on determining that the corresponding setting of the computer system has a second value and the corresponding virtual environment is the first virtual environment, the computer system reduces (840d) the visual salience of the user's physical environment in the three-dimensional environment by a second amount different from the first amount (e.g., as described with reference to step 830), such as reducing Figure 7D the salience of the physical environment in. In some embodiments, a computer system with the first value reduces the visual salience of the physical environment by the first amount, and a computer system with the second value reduces the visual salience of the physical environment by the second amount. Selectively reducing the visual salience of the physical environment by the first amount or the second amount based on the settings of the computer system reduces the number of inputs required to change the visual salience of the physical environment to correspond to the visual appearance of the corresponding virtual environment and simplifies the user's interaction with the computer system.

[0259] In some embodiments, when a first virtual environment is displayed via a display generation component, the computer system receives (842a), via one or more input devices, a second input corresponding to a request to change the immersion level of the first virtual environment from a first immersion level to a second immersion level different from the first immersion level (e.g., a request to change the immersion level from 25% to 75%), where the second input is directed to a hardware input element communicatively coupled to the computer system (e.g., pressing a physical button on the computer system, or rotating a physical dial on the computer system), such as a button on computer system 101.

[0260] In some embodiments, in response to receiving the second input, the computer system displays (842b) the first virtual environment at the second immersion level, such as Figures 7D to 7EAs shown. In some embodiments, the immersion is the immersion described with reference to methods 1400, 1600, and / or 1800. In some embodiments, the amount of virtual environment shown (e.g., the amount of physical environment not shown) is based on the immersion level. For example, increasing the immersion level optionally causes more of the virtual environment to be shown, replacing and / or occluding more of the physical environment, and decreasing the immersion level optionally causes less of the virtual environment to be shown, thereby revealing portions of the physical environment that were previously not shown and / or occluded. In some embodiments, at a particular immersion level, one or more first background objects are visually de-emphasized (e.g., dimmed, blurred, and / or shown with increased transparency) more than one or more second background objects, and one or more third background objects stop being shown. In some embodiments, the immersion level includes the associated degree to which virtual content (e.g., virtual environment and / or virtual content) shown by a computer system occludes background content (e.g., content other than the virtual environment and / or virtual content) around / behind the virtual environment, optionally including the number of items of background content shown and / or the visual characteristics (e.g., color, contrast, and / or opacity) of the background content shown, the angular range of virtual content shown via a display generation component (e.g., 60 degrees for content shown at low immersion, 120 degrees for content shown at medium immersion, or 180 degrees for content shown at high immersion), and / or the proportion of the field of view shown via a display generation component occupied by the virtual content (e.g., 33% of the field of view occupied by virtual content at low immersion, 66% of the field of view occupied by virtual content at medium immersion, or 100% of the field of view occupied by virtual content at high immersion). In some embodiments, the background content is included in the background on which the virtual content is shown. In some embodiments, the background content includes a user interface (e.g., a user interface generated by a computer system corresponding to an application), virtual objects not associated with and / or not included in the virtual environment and / or virtual content (e.g., files or other user representations generated by a computer system, etc.), and / or real objects (e.g., passthrough objects representing real objects in the physical environment around the user, which are visible such that they are shown via a display generation component and / or visible via a transparent or translucent component of the display generation component because the computer system does not occlude / hinder their visibility through the display generation component). In some embodiments, at a low immersion level (e.g., a first immersion level), the background, virtual, and / or real objects are shown in an unoccluded manner. For example, a virtual environment with a low immersion level is optionally shown simultaneously with background content, which is optionally shown at full brightness, color, and / or semi-opacity.In some embodiments, at a higher immersion level (e.g., a second immersion level higher than the first immersion level), background, virtual, and / or real objects are displayed in an occluded manner (e.g., dimmed, blurred, or removed from the display). For example, a corresponding virtual environment with a high immersion level is displayed without simultaneously displaying background content (e.g., in full-screen or fully immersive mode). As another example, a virtual environment displayed at a medium immersion level is displayed simultaneously with background content that is dimmed, blurred, or otherwise de-emphasized. In some embodiments, the visual characteristics of background objects vary among the background objects. For example, at a particular immersion level, one or more first background objects are more visually de-emphasized (e.g., dimmed, blurred, and / or displayed with increased transparency) than one or more second background objects, and one or more third background objects cease to be displayed. Adjusting the immersion level using physical input elements provides a quick and efficient way to adjust the immersion, which enhances the operability of the computer system and makes the user-device interface more efficient.

[0261] In some embodiments, when a first virtual environment is displayed via a display generation component, the computer system receives (844), via one or more input devices, a second input corresponding to a request to change the immersion level of the first virtual environment from a first immersion level to a second immersion level different from the first immersion level (e.g., a request to change the immersion level from 25% to 50%), where the second input points to a control center user interface displayed via the display generation component (e.g., the control center user interface optionally has one or more of the characteristics of the control center user interface described with reference to step 820), such as an input from Figures 7D to 7E the hand 720. In some embodiments, the three-dimensional environment includes a control center user interface that optionally includes elements that can be selected to adjust the immersion level. For example, the control center user interface optionally includes a slider, where the user's finger can touch the slider and manually adjust the immersion level. In another example, focusing on the slider and making an air tap in space, and then moving the user's hand to adjust the slider to achieve the immersion feeling. In another example, focusing on the slider and performing an air pinch gesture with the user's hand, and then moving the hand while maintaining the air pinch hand shape to adjust the slider to achieve the immersion feeling.

[0262] In some embodiments, in response to receiving the second input, the computer system displays (844) the first virtual environment at the second immersion level (e.g., as described, for example, with reference to step 842), such as Figure 7EAs shown. Adjusting the immersion level via the control center user interface provides a quick and efficient way to adjust the immersion, which enhances the operability of the computer system and makes the user-device interface more efficient.

[0263] In some embodiments, when the first virtual environment is not visible via the display generation component (846a), the computer system receives (846b) via one or more input devices a second input corresponding to a request to change a corresponding setting from having a first value to having a second value (e.g., as described with reference to step 820, the second input is optionally a selection from the control center user interface), such as a setting Figure 7B in the settings.

[0264] In some embodiments, in response to receiving the second input, the computer system changes (846c) the corresponding setting from having a first value to having a second value, such as changing Figure 7B the time-of-day setting in the settings. In some embodiments, the first virtual environment is not visible because the user of the computer system stops displaying the first virtual environment and / or reduces the immersion (e.g., as described with reference to step 842) to 0% immersion. Changing the corresponding setting when the first virtual environment is not visible simplifies the interaction between the user and the computer system.

[0265] In some embodiments, the computer system displays (848a) via the display generation component selectable elements for adjusting the audio volume corresponding to the first virtual environment generated by the computer system (such as Figure 7A and Figure 7A1 the volume controls in the user interface 724 in the settings (e.g., the audio portion of the first virtual environment, such as the sound of waves in a beach virtual environment or the chirping of birds in a forest virtual environment). As described above with reference to step 820, the selectable elements that can be interacted with to adjust the volume are optionally included in the control center user interface. In some embodiments, the selectable element is a slider and can be selected from the control center user interface). In some embodiments, when the selectable element is displayed, the computer system receives (848b) via one or more input devices a second input pointing to the selectable element, such as an input pointing to the volume control in the user interface 724. For example, the control center user interface optionally includes a selectable element represented by a slider, which can optionally be manipulated similar to the manipulation of the immersion slider described with reference to step 844.

[0266] In some embodiments, in response to receiving a second input, the computer system adjusts (848c) the audio volume corresponding to the first virtual environment according to the second input. In some embodiments, the three-dimensional environment includes selectable elements (e.g., located at positions within or near the virtual environment selection user interface) that can be selected to adjust the volume generated by the computer system. For example, selecting a selectable element can be optionally used to adjust the volume to a desired level. Adjusting the volume level via the displayed interface provides a quick and efficient way to change the volume of the audio generated by the computer system, which enhances the operability of the computer system and makes the user-device interface more efficient.

[0267] It should be understood that the specific order in which the operations in method 800 are described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which these operations can be performed. Those of ordinary skill in the art will think of various ways to reorder the operations described herein.

[0268] Figures 9A to 9F An example is illustrated in which a computer system according to some embodiments updates the time-of-day setting for a virtual environment to night based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming.

[0269] Figure 9A An example of a computer system 101 that displays a three-dimensional environment 904 via a display generation component (e.g., the display generation component 120 of FIG. 1) is illustrated. As described above with reference to FIGS. 1 to Figure 6 As described, the computer system 101 optionally includes a display generation component (e.g., a touchscreen or non-touchscreen display) and a plurality of image sensors (e.g., Figure 3 image sensor 314). The image sensors optionally include one or more of the following: a visible light camera; an infrared camera; a depth sensor; or any other sensor that the computer system 101 can use to capture one or more images of the user or a portion of the user (e.g., one or more hands of the user) when the user interacts with the computer system 101. In some embodiments, the user interfaces illustrated and described below can also be implemented on a head-mounted display that includes a display generation component for displaying the user interface or the three-dimensional environment to the user, and sensors for detecting movement of the physical environment and / or the user's hand (such as movement that is interpreted by the computer system as a gesture such as an air gesture), and / or sensors for detecting the user's gaze (e.g., an internal sensor facing the user's face). The figures herein illustrate the three-dimensional environment presented to the user (e.g., and displayed by the display generation component of the computer system 101) and a top view of the three-dimensional environment associated with the computer system 101 (e.g., such as Figure 9AThe top view in 918) is used to illustrate the relative positions of real-world elements from the physical environment and virtual elements in a three-dimensional environment (e.g., virtual content, virtual objects, and / or virtual environments).

[0270] As Figure 9A shown, the computer system 101 captures one or more images of the physical environment 902 (e.g., the operating environment 100) around the computer system 101, including one or more objects in the physical environment 902 around the computer system 101, such as the table 910A. In some embodiments, the computer system 101 displays a representation of the physical environment 902 in the three-dimensional environment 904, or a portion of the physical environment 902 is visible via the display generation component 120 of the computer system 101. For example, the three-dimensional environment 904 includes the table 910A in the physical environment 902 of the user 906 and a portion of the floor.

[0271] In some embodiments, the virtual environment 945A is an optionally simulated three-dimensional environment that is displayed in the three-dimensional environment 904 either simultaneously with the representation of the physical environment 902 (e.g., partially immersed, as Figure 9A illustrated) or optionally instead of the representation of the physical environment 902 (e.g., fully immersed). Some examples of the virtual environment 945A include a classroom background (as Figure 9A illustrated), a mountain background, a beach background, a sports event background, and / or other virtual backgrounds. In some embodiments, the virtual environment 945A is location-based. In some embodiments, the virtual environment 945A is a location designed by an artist. In some embodiments, the virtual environment 945A is a simulated physical space, as described in more detail with reference to method 1000. Thus, displaying the virtual environment 945A in the three-dimensional environment 904 provides the user with a virtual experience as if the user were physically located in the virtual environment 945A. In Figure 9A it, the virtual environment 945A corresponding to the classroom background includes virtual elements such as virtual bookshelves 942A and virtual computers 944a. As illustrated, the computer system 101 displays the virtual environment 945A according to the time of day (e.g., daytime) as described with reference to method 1000. Thus, the virtual environment 945A includes a classroom scene illuminated by a virtual sun 940a.

[0272] In Figure 9A it, the three-dimensional environment 904 also includes virtual content, such as virtual content 926A. The virtual content 926A optionally includes a user interface (e.g., a content browsing user interface) of an application for playing back content (e.g., movies, TV shows, and / or photos). In Figure 9AIn [the figure], the virtual content 926A for playing back content (e.g., a content browsing user interface) includes a playback control toggle switch 946 for playing or pausing the content and an auto - dim toggle switch 913 (e.g., enabling or disabling auto - dim), as described in reference method 1000. In some embodiments, the three - dimensional environment 904 includes three - dimensional objects (e.g., a virtual clock, a virtual ball, or a virtual car), user interfaces of other applications (e.g., an instant messaging user interface), or any other elements displayed by the computer system 101 that are not included in the physical environment 902 of the computer system 101.

[0273] As illustrated in the top - view 918, the user 906 is sitting on the couch 922 in the physical environment 902 while interacting with the computer system 101. In the top - view 918, the table 910b is a real - world object in the physical environment 902 that has been captured by one or more sensors of the computer system 101, and a representation of the table 910a is included in the three - dimensional environment 904 (e.g., a photo - realistic representation, a simplified representation, a cartoon, or a comic), or the table 910a is visible via passive see - through by the display generation component 120. In the top - view 918, the corner table 908b and the side table 912b of the physical environment 902 from the user 906 are represented as dashed lines because the corner table 908b and the side table 912b are not visible in the three - dimensional environment 904. That is, the part of the physical environment 902 that includes the corner table 908b and the side table 912b is not visible to the user 906 because the virtual environment 945a has replaced the part of the physical environment that includes the corner table 908b and the side table 912b. As shown in the top - view 1118, at the Figure 9A immersion level of the virtual environment 1145a shown in [the figure], the virtual environment 1145a optionally extends from the dashed line 970 to the distant wall 914 in the three - dimensional environment 904.

[0274] In Figure 9A [the figure], the computer system 101 is displaying an immersion level indicator 916. In some embodiments, the immersion level indicator 916 indicates the current immersion level (e.g., among the maximum number of immersion levels) when the computer system 101 is displaying the three - dimensional environment 904. In some embodiments, the immersion level includes the amount of the view of the physical environment 902 that is occluded (e.g., replaced) by the virtual environment 945a. For example, as shown in the top - view 918, the virtual environment 945a extends from the dashed line 970 to the distant wall 914 at a first immersion level. Although the corner table 908b is not visible in the three - dimensional environment 904, the part of the physical environment that is not occluded by the virtual environment 945a (including the side table 912b and the table 910b) is displayed in the three - dimensional environment 904. However, the virtual computer 944b and the virtual content 926b (e.g., beyond the dashed line 970) are not displayed in the three - dimensional environment 904 at the first immersion level.

[0275] In Figure 9A Figure 9A , the computer system 101 optionally displays the three-dimensional environment 904 according to a second immersion level. For example, as shown in the top view 918, the virtual environment 945a extends from the dashed line 972 to the distant wall 914 at the second immersion level. Although the corner table 908b and the side table 912b are not visible in the three-dimensional environment 904, the portions of the physical environment that are not occluded by the virtual environment 945a (including the table 910b) are displayed in the three-dimensional environment 904.

[0276] In addition, as shown in the top view 918, the third immersion level is the maximum immersion level (e.g., full immersion), where any portion of the physical environment 902 is not viewable in the three-dimensional environment 904. For example, as shown in the top view 918, the virtual environment 945a extends from the dashed line 974 to the distant wall 914 at the third immersion level. That is, the virtual environment 945a (e.g., including the virtual bookshelf 942b, the virtual computer 944b, the virtual sun 940b, and the virtual content 926b) has replaced the physical environment 902. Although Figure 9A The three-dimensional environment 904 is illustrated according to the second immersion level, but the computer system 101 can optionally modify the immersion level (e.g., modify to the first immersion level or the third immersion level) based on user input.

[0277] Figure 9A1 Illustrates concepts similar and / or identical to the Figure 9A concepts shown in (with many of the same reference numerals). It should be understood that unless otherwise indicated below, Figure 9A1 the elements shown in Figures 9A to 9F with the same reference numerals as the elements shown in Figure 9A1 include the computer system 101, which includes a display generation component 120 (or the same). In some embodiments, the computer system 101 and the display generation component 120 respectively have Figures 9A to 9F one or more of the characteristics of the computer system 101 shown in and FIG. 1 and Figure 3 the characteristics of the display generation component 120 shown in, and in some embodiments, Figures 9A to 9F the computer system 101 and the display generation component 120 shown in Figure 9A1 have one or more of the characteristics of the computer system 101 and the display generation component 120 shown in

[0278] In Figure 9A1 Figure 9A1 , the display generation component 120 includes one or more internal image sensors 314a oriented towards the user's face (e.g., refer to Figure 5The described eye tracking camera 540). In some embodiments, the internal image sensor 314a is used for eye tracking (e.g., to detect the user's gaze). The internal image sensor 314a is optionally disposed on the left and right portions of the display generation component 120 to enable eye tracking of the user's left and right eyes. The display generation component 120 also includes external image sensors 314b and 314c facing outward from the user to detect and / or capture the physical environment and / or the movement of the user's hand. In some embodiments, the image sensors 314a, 314b, and 314c have one or more of the characteristics of the reference Figures 9A to 9F image sensor 314 described.

[0279] In Figure 9A1 , the display generation component 120 is illustrated as displaying content optionally corresponding to the content described as being displayed and / or visible via the display generation component 120. In some embodiments, the content is displayed by a single display (e.g., Figures 9A to 9F the display 510) included in the display generation component 120. In some embodiments, the display generation component 120 includes two or more displays (e.g., a left display panel and a right display panel for the user's left and right eyes respectively, as described in reference Figure 5 ), and the display outputs of these displays are combined (e.g., by the user's brain) to create Figure 5 the view of the content shown in Figure 9A1 .

[0280] The display generation component 120 has a field of view corresponding to the content shown in Figure 9A1 (e.g., the field of view captured by the external image sensors 314b and 314c and / or visible to the user via the display generation component 120, indicated by the dashed line in this top view). Since the display generation component 120 is optionally a head-mounted device, the field of view of the display generation component 120 is optionally the same as or similar to the user's field of view.

[0281] In Figure 9A1 , the user is depicted as performing an air pinch gesture (e.g., when the user's attention is directed to option 946, as indicated by the fixation point 998, using the hand 920a) to provide input to the computer system 101 to provide user input pointing to the content displayed by the computer system 101. This description is intended to be exemplary and not restrictive; the user optionally uses different air gestures and / or other forms of input described in reference Figures 9A to 9F to provide user input.

[0282] In some embodiments, the computer system 101 responds to user input as described in reference Figures 9A to 9F .

[0283] In Figure 9A1 the example of, since the user's hand is within the field of view of the display generation component 120, it is visible within the three-dimensional environment. That is, the user can optionally see any part of their own body within the field of view of the display generation component 120 in the three-dimensional environment. It should be understood that one or more or all aspects of the present disclosure as shown or described and / or with reference to the corresponding method are optionally implemented on the computer system 101 and the display generation unit 120 in a manner similar or analogous to Figures 9A to 9F as shown Figure 9A1 or described and / or with reference to the corresponding method.

[0284] In Figure 9A , the virtual content 926A (e.g., playback of content) is currently paused, and the auto-dimming toggle switch 913 is enabled. Additionally, Figure 9A the computer system 101 in

[0285] receives an input (e.g., an air pinch gesture performed by the hand 920A when the user's attention is directed to the toggle switch 946) from the hand 920A of the user 906 to the playback control toggle switch 946 corresponding to the request to play the virtual content 926A, as described in more detail with reference to the method 1000. Figure 9B In response to receiving the request to play the virtual content 926A, the computer system 101 plays Figures 9A to 9B the virtual content 926A in Figure 9BAs shown. In some embodiments, the virtual lighting effect 950 generated from the content (as described in reference method 1200) is applied to the portion of the three-dimensional environment 904 outside the virtual content 926a. In some embodiments, the virtual lighting effect 950 appears to be virtually projected by the virtual content 926a onto the portion of the three-dimensional environment 904 outside the virtual content 926a. In Figure 9B the virtual environment 945a occupies the same portion of the three-dimensional environment 904 as described in reference Figure 9A As described.

[0286] In Figure 9B the computer system displays a user interface 952 (e.g., user interface A). In some embodiments, the user interface 952 includes a first set of options 954 for displaying a virtual environment (e.g., a background such as a classroom background (B1), a beach background (B2), or a mountain background (B3)) according to a second time of day (e.g., night). In some embodiments, the user interface includes a second set of options 956 for displaying a virtual environment (e.g., a background such as a classroom background (B1), a beach background (B2), or a mountain background (B3)) according to a first time of day (e.g., day). Additionally, in some embodiments, the user interface includes a third set of options 958 for displaying an ambiance effect (e.g., E1, E2, or E3) and / or a fourth option 960 corresponding to the volume control of the virtual content 926A.

[0287] In Figure 9B the computer system 101 receives an input (e.g., an air pinching gesture by the hand 920a when the user's attention is directed to the playback control toggle switch 946) from the hand 920A of the user 906 that corresponds to a request to point and pause the virtual content 926A. Alternatively, the computer system 101 receives an input (e.g., an air pinching gesture by the hand 920B when the user's attention is directed to option B1 in the option 956) from the hand 920B of the user 906 that corresponds to a selection of displaying the classroom background (B1) according to a first time of day (e.g., day) from the user interface 952. In Figure 9B the faded appearance of the hand 920B indicates an alternative example where the computer system 101 receives a selection of B1 from the second set of options 956.

[0288] In response to receiving a request to pause the virtual content 926A (as Figure 9B described), the computer system 101 pauses Figure 9C the virtual content 926A in. Additionally, the computer system 101 maintains the visual appearance of the virtual environment 945A corresponding to a second time of day (e.g., night) because the auto-dimming toggle switch 913 is inFigure 9C remains enabled. For example, the visual appearance of the virtual environment 945A is dimmed and / or includes virtual moon and stars 941a corresponding to a second time of day (e.g., night). The computer system 101 optionally continues to dim (e.g., darken) the portion of the physical environment that is displayed in the three-dimensional environment. That is, optionally dim and / or darken the three-dimensional environment 904 outside the virtual content 926a. In Figure 9C the virtual environment 945a occupies the same portion of the three-dimensional environment 904 as described in reference Figure 9A .

[0289] Based on receiving a selection of option B1 in the second set of options 956 as described in the alternative example in reference Figure 9B , the computer system 101 optionally updates the visual appearance (e.g., classroom background) of the virtual environment 945A from a second time of day (e.g., night) to a first time of day (e.g., day), as Figure 9D shown. For example, the visual appearance of the virtual environment 945A is brighter and / or includes a virtual sun 940a corresponding to the first time of day (e.g., day). Specifically, the virtual environment 945A is optionally updated to the same simulated physical space as before, but with a visual appearance corresponding to that physical space during the day rather than at night. In Figure 9D the virtual environment 945a occupies the same portion of the three-dimensional environment 904 as described in reference Figure 9A . Additionally, the computer system 101 displays the user interface 952 as described in Figure 9B based on receiving user input to display the user interface 952. To indicate Figure 9D the selection of displaying the classroom background according to the first time of day (e.g., day) in, option B1 in the second set of options 956 is visually (e.g., different color, different highlighting, and / or different filling) distinguished from options B2 and B3 in the second set of options 956.

[0290] In some embodiments, in response to the user 906's attention 962 being away from the virtual content 926a and / or the virtual content 926a being paused, the computer system 101 will Figure 9B update the visual appearance of the virtual environment 945A in from a second time of day (e.g., night) to a first time of day (e.g., day), as Figure 9D shown.

[0291] Additionally, Figure 9DIllustrates receiving an input from the hand 920a of the user 906 pointing to the playback control toggle switch 946 for playing the virtual content 926a, and an additional input from the hand 920a of the user 906 corresponding to the selection of an ambiance effect (e.g., E1) from the third set of options 958.

[0292] In response to receiving Figure 9D the request to play the virtual content 926a and the selection of the ambiance effect (e.g., E1) in Figure 9E the computer system 101 in Figure 9D plays the virtual content 926a and stops displaying the virtual environment (e.g., from Figure 9E the virtual environment 945a). Since the virtual environment is not displayed in Figure 9E the parts of the physical environment that were previously occluded by the virtual environment (e.g., the corner table 908a and the side table 912a) are now viewable by the user 906 in the three-dimensional environment 904. Accordingly, the corner table 908b and the side table 912b are represented by solid lines rather than dashed lines in the top view 918. To indicate the selection of the Figure 9E ambiance effect (e.g., E1) in Figure 9E the option E1 in the third set of options 958 is visually (e.g., different color, different highlighting, and / or different filling) distinguished from the options E2 and E3 in the third set of options 958. Based on the selection of the ambiance effect (e.g., E1), Figure 9E the computer system 101 in Figure 9E applies an ambiance effect that simulates a change in lighting, a particle effect, or other simulation effects that change the appearance of the user's physical environment, optionally without stopping or occluding the display of the physical environment 902 of the user 906 (e.g., as described with reference to the method 1000). For example, in Figure 9E the computer system 101 displays a shadow 909a corresponding to the corner table 908a, a shadow 923a corresponding to the side table 912a, and a shadow 921a corresponding to the table 910a. Additionally, since Figure 9E the virtual content 926a in Figure 9E is playing and the auto-dim toggle switch 913 is enabled, the computer system 101 reduces the visual salience of the three-dimensional environment 904 outside the virtual content 926a by dimming, reducing the brightness, reducing the color saturation, and / or increasing the blur of the three-dimensional environment 904 outside the virtual content 926a, as described with reference to the method 1000.

[0293] In addition, Figure 9E illustrates that the computer system 101 receives an input from the hand 920a of the user 906 corresponding to the selection of the option B1 in the first set of options 954 from the user interface 952.

[0294] Based on receiving the selection of the option B1 in the first set of options 956, Figure 9FThe computer system 101 in Figure 9F displays a virtual environment 945a (e.g., a classroom background) corresponding to a second time of day (e.g., night). In Figure 9A , the virtual environment 945a occupies the same portion of the three-dimensional environment 904 as described in reference Figure 9F . Thus, the virtual environment 945a includes virtual moon and stars 941a. In

[0295] Figures 10A to 10H is a flowchart illustrating a method 1000 for reducing the visual salience of immersive virtual content and displaying areas of possible interaction. In some embodiments, the method 1000 is executed at a computer system (e.g., the computer system 101 in FIG. 1, such as a tablet computer, a smart phone, a wearable computer, or a head-mounted device), the computer system including a display generation component (e.g., the display generation component 120 in FIGS. 1, Figure 3 and Figure 4 )(e.g., a head-up display, a display, a touch screen, a projector, etc.) and one or more cameras (e.g., a camera pointing downward at the user's hand (e.g., a color sensor, an infrared sensor, and other depth-sensing cameras) or a camera pointing forward from the user's head). In some embodiments, the method 1000 is managed by instructions stored in a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium and executed by one or more processors of the computer system, such as one or more processors 202 of the computer system 101 (e.g., Figure 1A the control unit 110 in

[0296] In some embodiments, method 1000 is performed at a computer system (such as computer system 101 in FIG. 1) that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices. In some embodiments, the computer system has one or more of the characteristics of the computer system in methods 800, 1200, 1400, 1600, and / or 1800. In some embodiments, the display generation component has one or more of the characteristics of the display generation component in methods 800, 1200, 1400, 1600, and / or 1800. In some embodiments, the one or more input devices have one or more of the characteristics of the one or more input devices in methods 800, 1200, 1400, 1600, and / or 1800.

[0297] In some embodiments, the computer system displays (1002a), via the display generation component, a three-dimensional environment (such as Figure 9A and Figure 9A1 the three-dimensional environment 904 in Figure 9A and Figure 9A1 that includes a virtual environment (such as the virtual environment 945a in

[0298] In some embodiments, when displaying a virtual environment that represents a simulated physical space, the computer system detects (1002b) an event associated with the automatic dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment, such as the playback of Figure 9A and Figure 9A1 the virtual content 926a in In some embodiments, the event includes the playback of content via a media application (e.g., playing a movie or a TV show). In some embodiments, the event includes using an application such as an instant messaging application or a photo application that has an automatic dimming feature. In some embodiments, automatically dimming one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment includes reducing the visual prominence (e.g., reducing its brightness, sharpness, and / or color saturation) of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment relative to different portions of the three-dimensional environment (e.g., the user interface or other portions of the three-dimensional environment associated with, corresponding to, and / or performing the event). In some embodiments, one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment in which the visual prominence has been reduced include one or more portions of the user's physical environment / computer system and / or virtual content displayed via the d...

Claims

1. A method, the method comprising: at a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices: when a three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generation component, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request to display a corresponding virtual environment that represents an analog physical space; and in response to detecting the first input: displaying, in the three-dimensional environment, the first virtual environment having a first visual appearance corresponding to a first time of day in the physical space simulated by the first virtual environment, based on determining that a corresponding setting of the computer system has a first value and that the corresponding virtual environment is the first virtual environment; and displaying, in the three-dimensional environment, the first virtual environment having a second visual appearance corresponding to a second time of day in the physical space simulated by the first virtual environment, based on determining that the corresponding setting of the computer system has a second value different from the first value and that the corresponding virtual environment is the first virtual environment, wherein the second visual appearance is different from the first visual appearance and the second time of day is different from the first time of day.

2. The method according to claim 1, wherein: displaying the first virtual environment having the first visual appearance corresponding to the first time of day includes displaying the first virtual environment with simulated lighting corresponding to the first time of day, and displaying the first virtual environment having the second visual appearance corresponding to the second time of day includes displaying the first virtual environment with simulated lighting corresponding to the second time of day.

3. The method according to claim 2, wherein the simulated lighting includes simulated natural lighting from a simulated natural light source.

4. The method according to any one of claims 2 to 3, wherein: displaying the first virtual environment having the first visual appearance includes displaying, in the first virtual environment, a first virtual element that is virtually illuminated by the simulated lighting corresponding to the first time of day, and displaying the second virtual environment having the second visual appearance includes displaying, in the first virtual environment, the first virtual element that is virtually illuminated by the simulated lighting corresponding to the second time of day.

5. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the corresponding setting is selected based on a user input.

6. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the corresponding setting having the first value or the second value is automatically determined by the computer system without detecting an input corresponding to a selection of the first value or the second value.

7. The method according to claim 6, wherein the automatic determination by the computer system includes: automatically setting the first value for the corresponding setting based on determining that the current time of day at the computer system is the first time of day; and Automatically set the second value for the corresponding setting based on determining that the time of the current day at the computer system is a second day different from the time of the first day.

8. The method according to any one of claims 6 to 7, wherein the automatic determination by the computer system includes: Automatically set the first value for the corresponding setting according to determining that the light level in the physical space at the computer system is a first light level; And Automatically set the second value for the corresponding setting according to determining that the light level in the physical space at the computer system is a second light level different from the first light level.

9. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 8, the method further comprising: Before displaying the first virtual environment having the first visual appearance or the second visual appearance, display a control center user interface via the display generation component, the control center user interface being used to control one or more functions of the computer system and including one or more selectable options, the one or more selectable options being capable of being selected to set the corresponding setting to the first value or the second value.

10. The method according to claim 9, the method further comprising: When the control center user interface is displayed via the display generation component, receive a second input pointing to the one or more selectable options via the one or more input devices, set the corresponding setting to the first value or the second value according to the second input, and stop displaying the control center user interface.

11. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 10, the method further comprising: Display a virtual environment selection user interface via the display generation component, wherein the virtual environment selection user interface includes a first selectable option that can be selected to display the first virtual environment, Wherein: According to determining that the corresponding setting has the first value, display the first selectable option together with a visual indication corresponding to the time of the first day; and According to determining that the corresponding setting has the second value, display the first selectable option together with a visual indication corresponding to the time of the second day.

12. The method according to claim 11, wherein: The visual indication corresponding to the time of the first day includes a visual representation of the first visual appearance of the first virtual environment corresponding to the time of the first day, and The visual indication corresponding to the time of the second day includes a visual representation of the second visual appearance of the first virtual environment corresponding to the time of the second day.

13. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 12, the method further comprising: In response to detecting the first input and according to determining that the corresponding virtual environment is a second virtual environment different from the first virtual environment: In response to determining that the corresponding setting of the computer system has the second value, display, in the three-dimensional environment, the second virtual environment having a third visual appearance corresponding to a third time of day in the physical space simulated by the second virtual environment, wherein the third time of day is different from the second time of day.

14. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 13, the method further comprising: In response to detecting the first input and based on determining that the corresponding virtual environment is a second virtual environment different from the first virtual environment: In response to determining that the corresponding setting of the computer system has the first value, display, in the three-dimensional environment, the second virtual environment having a third visual appearance corresponding to a third time of day in the physical space simulated by the second virtual environment, wherein the third time of day is different from the first time of day.

15. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 14, wherein in response to detecting the first input, the physical environment of the user of the computer system is visible simultaneously with the first virtual environment, the method further comprising: In response to detecting the first input: Based on determining that the corresponding setting of the computer system has the first value and the corresponding virtual environment is the first virtual environment, maintain the visual salience of the physical environment of the user in the three-dimensional environment; And Based on determining that the corresponding setting of the computer system has the second value and the corresponding virtual environment is the first virtual environment, reduce the visual salience of the physical environment of the user in the three-dimensional environment.

16. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 15, the method further comprising: Receiving, via the one or more input devices, a second input corresponding to a request to display an ambient effect applied to the physical environment of the user, the physical environment of the user being visible in the three-dimensional environment, and In response to receiving the second input, display the physical environment having the ambient effect, wherein the visual appearance of the ambient effect is independent of whether the corresponding setting of the computer system has the first value or the second value.

17. The method according to claim 16, wherein when the second input is received, the computer system displays a virtual environment selection user interface in front of one or more parts of the three-dimensional environment, and wherein the second input points to the virtual environment selection user interface, the method further comprising: In response to receiving the second input, update the visual appearance of the one or more parts of the three-dimensional environment to correspond to the ambient effect.

18. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 17, the method further comprising: Receiving, via the one or more input devices, a second input corresponding to a request to display a first type of virtual content, wherein the corresponding virtual environment corresponds to a second type of virtual content different from the first type; And In response to receiving the second input, display the virtual content of the first type via the display generation component, regardless of whether the corresponding setting has the first value or the second value.

19. The method according to claim 18, wherein the virtual content of the first type is displayed simultaneously with one or more parts of the three-dimensional environment outside the virtual content of the first type, and the method further comprises: In response to receiving the second input: Display one or more parts of the three-dimensional environment with a first corresponding visual appearance according to determining that the corresponding setting has the first value; And Display one or more parts of the three-dimensional environment with a second corresponding visual appearance different from the first corresponding visual appearance according to determining that the corresponding setting has the second value.

20. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 19, wherein in response to detecting the first input, the physical environment of the user of the computer system is visible simultaneously with the first virtual environment, and the method further comprises: In response to detecting the first input: Reduce the visual salience of the physical environment of the user in the three-dimensional environment by a first amount according to determining that the corresponding setting of the computer system has the first value and the corresponding virtual environment is the first virtual environment; And Reduce the visual salience of the physical environment of the user in the three-dimensional environment by a second amount different from the first amount according to determining that the corresponding setting of the computer system has the second value and the corresponding virtual environment is the first virtual environment.

21. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 20, the method further comprises: When displaying the first virtual environment via the display generation component, receive a second input corresponding to a request to change the immersion level of the first virtual environment from a first immersion level to a second immersion level different from the first immersion level via the one or more input devices, wherein the second input points to a hardware input element communicating with the computer system; And In response to receiving the second input, display the first virtual environment at the second immersion level.

22. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 21, the method further comprises: When displaying the first virtual environment via the display generation component, receive a second input corresponding to a request to change the immersion level of the first virtual environment from a first immersion level to a second immersion level different from the first immersion level via the one or more input devices, wherein the second input points to a control center user interface displayed via the display generation component; And In response to receiving the second input, display the first virtual environment at the second immersion level.

23. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 22, the method further comprises: When the first virtual environment cannot be visible via the display generation component: Receiving, via the one or more input devices, a second input corresponding to a request to change the respective setting from having the first value to having the second value; and in response to receiving the second input, changing the respective setting from having the first value to having the second value.

24. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 23, the method further comprising: displaying, via the display generating component, selectable elements for adjusting the volume of audio corresponding to the first virtual environment generated by the computer system; when the selectable elements are displayed, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a second input pointing to the selectable elements; and in response to receiving the second input, adjusting the volume of the audio corresponding to the first virtual environment according to the second input.

25. A computer system, the computer system communicating with a display generating component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; a memory; and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: when a three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generating component, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request to display a respective virtual environment representing a simulated physical space; and in response to detecting the first input: displaying, in the three-dimensional environment, the first virtual environment having a first visual appearance corresponding to a first time of day in the physical space simulated by the first virtual environment, based on determining that the respective setting of the computer system has a first value and the respective virtual environment is the first virtual environment; and displaying, in the three-dimensional environment, the first virtual environment having a second visual appearance corresponding to a second time of day in the physical space simulated by the first virtual environment, based on determining that the respective setting of the computer system has a second value different from the first value and the respective virtual environment is the first virtual environment, wherein the second visual appearance is different from the first visual appearance and the second time of day is different from the first time of day.

26. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system communicating with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform a method including: when a three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generating component, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request to display a respective virtual environment representing a simulated physical space; and in response to detecting the first input: In response to determining that the corresponding setting of the computer system has a first value and the corresponding virtual environment is a first virtual environment, display, in the three-dimensional environment, the first virtual environment having a first visual appearance corresponding to a first time of day in the physical space simulated by the first virtual environment; and In response to determining that the corresponding setting of the computer system has a second value different from the first value and the corresponding virtual environment is the first virtual environment, display, in the three-dimensional environment, the first virtual environment having a second visual appearance corresponding to a second time of day in the physical space simulated by the first virtual environment, wherein the second visual appearance is different from the first visual appearance and the second time of day is different from the first time of day.

27. A computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; Means for: when a three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generation component, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request to display a corresponding virtual environment that simulates a physical space; And Means for: in response to detecting the first input: In response to determining that the corresponding setting of the computer system has a first value and the corresponding virtual environment is a first virtual environment, display, in the three-dimensional environment, the first virtual environment having a first visual appearance corresponding to a first time of day in the physical space simulated by the first virtual environment; and In response to determining that the corresponding setting of the computer system has a second value different from the first value and the corresponding virtual environment is the first virtual environment, Display, in the three-dimensional environment, the first virtual environment having a second visual appearance corresponding to a second time of day in the physical space simulated by the first virtual environment, wherein the second visual appearance is different from the first visual appearance and the second time of day is different from the first time of day.

28. A computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; And One or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and are configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method according to any one of claims 1 to 24.

29. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform the method according to any one of claims 1 to 24.

30. A computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; a memory; and means for performing the method according to any one of claims 1 to 24.

31. A method, the method comprising: at a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices: displaying, via the display generation component, a three-dimensional environment including a virtual environment; when displaying the virtual environment representing an analog physical space, detecting an event associated with the automatic dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment; and in response to detecting the event associated with the automatic dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment: updating the display of the virtual environment to a visual appearance corresponding to a second time of day within the set of times of day in the analog physical space, based on determining that the virtual environment is to be displayed with a visual appearance corresponding to a first time of day outside the set of times of day in the analog physical space, wherein the second time of day is different from the first time of day; and continuing to display the virtual environment with the visual appearance corresponding to the corresponding time of day in the analog physical space, based on determining that the virtual environment is to be displayed with the visual appearance corresponding to the corresponding time of day in the analog physical space.

32. The method according to claim 31, the method comprising: when the virtual environment is not being displayed, and when the automatic dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment is active, detecting a second event associated with displaying the virtual environment via the one or more input devices; and in response to detecting the second event associated with displaying the virtual environment, displaying the virtual environment with the visual appearance corresponding to the second time of day in the analog physical space.

33. The method according to any one of claims 31 to 32, the method further comprising: displaying, via the display generation component, the three-dimensional environment including a second virtual environment different from the virtual environment, wherein the second virtual environment represents a second analog physical space; when displaying the second virtual environment, detecting a second event associated with the automatic dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment; and in response to detecting the second event associated with the automatic dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment: updating the display of the second virtual environment to a visual appearance corresponding to a fourth time of day within the set of times of day in the analog physical space, based on determining that the second virtual environment is to be displayed with a visual appearance corresponding to a third time of day outside the set of times of day in the second analog physical space, wherein the fourth time of day is different from the third time of day.

34. The method according to any one of claims 31 to 33, wherein the event associated with automatic dimming includes the initiation of the playback of content.

35. The method according to claim 34, wherein the visual appearance of the virtual environment is updated according to the determined visual appearance of the virtual environment corresponding to the time of the first day, regardless of whether the event is associated with a first application or a second application different from the first application.

36. The method according to any one of claims 31 to 35, wherein an option for changing the auto-dimming setting is displayed in a content playback user interface associated with the playback of the content.

37. The method according to any one of claims 31 to 36, wherein the option for changing the auto-dimming setting is displayed in a control user interface of the computer system.

38. The method according to any one of claims 31 to 37, wherein the virtual environment is displayed simultaneously with a representation of a virtual object associated with the event in the three-dimensional environment and the physical environment of a user of the computer system, wherein the virtual object is different from the virtual environment, and the method further comprises: Reducing the visual salience of the representation of the user's physical environment in response to detecting the event associated with the auto-dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment.

39. The method according to claim 38, wherein reducing the visual salience of the representation of the user's physical environment comprises changing the visual appearance of the representation of the user's physical environment based on the visual appearance of the virtual environment corresponding to the time of the second day.

40. The method according to any one of claims 31 to 39, the method comprising: When displaying the virtual environment, detecting a second event not associated with the auto-dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment; And In response to detecting the second event not associated with auto-dimming: Continuing the display of the visual appearance of the virtual environment corresponding to the time of the second day according to the determined visual appearance of the virtual environment corresponding to the time of the second day in the simulated physical space.

41. The method according to any one of claims 31 to 40, the method comprising in response to detecting the event associated with auto-dimming: Continuing the display of the visual appearance of the virtual environment corresponding to the time of the second day according to the determined visual appearance of the virtual environment corresponding to the time of the second day.

42. The method according to any one of claims 31 to 41, wherein detecting the event associated with the auto-dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment comprises: Detecting that the event is associated with auto-dimming according to the determination that the event is associated with the playback of three-dimensional content, regardless of whether auto-dimming is enabled or disabled at the computer system.

43. The method according to any one of claims 31 to 42, the method comprising: When a three-dimensional environment including one or more virtual effects applied to a user's physical environment is displayed via the display generation component, detect a corresponding event; and in response to detecting the corresponding event and based on determining that the corresponding event is associated with automatic dimming, reduce the visual salience of a portion of the physical environment.

44. The method according to claim 43, the method comprising: in response to detecting the corresponding event and based on determining that the corresponding event is not associated with automatic dimming, refrain from reducing the visual salience of the portion of the physical environment.

45. The method according to any one of claims 31 to 44, wherein the event is associated with the playback of content included in the three-dimensional environment, the method further comprising: in response to detecting the event associated with automatic dimming and based on determining that one or more criteria are met, display one or more virtual lighting effects generated based on the content displayed in the virtual environment in the three-dimensional environment, wherein the one or more virtual lighting effects are applied to one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment outside the content.

46. The method according to any one of claims 31 to 44, the method comprising: when the virtual environment is displayed with the visual appearance corresponding to the second time of day, and when a portion of the three-dimensional environment outside the virtual object associated with the event has reduced visual salience, detect that the attention of a user of the computer system is not directed to the virtual object associated with the event via the one or more input devices; and in response to detecting that the attention of the user is not directed to the virtual object associated with the event: continue the display of the virtual environment with the visual appearance corresponding to the second time of day; and increase the visual salience of the portion of the virtual environment outside the virtual object associated with the event.

47. The method according to any one of claims 31 to 46, wherein the event is associated with content displayed in the three-dimensional environment, the method further comprising: when the virtual environment is displayed with the visual appearance corresponding to the second time of day in the simulated physical space, detect a change in the state of the content; and in response to detecting the change in the state of the content, update the display of the virtual environment to have the visual appearance corresponding to the first time of day in the simulated physical space.

48. The method according to any one of claims 31 to 46, wherein the event is associated with content displayed in the three-dimensional environment, the method further comprising: when the virtual environment is displayed with the visual appearance corresponding to the second time of day in the simulated physical space, detect a change in the state of the content; and In response to detecting a change in the state of the content, maintaining the display of the virtual environment in the visual appearance corresponding to the time of the second day in the simulated physical space.

49. A computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; And One or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: Displaying a three-dimensional environment including a virtual environment via the display generation component; When displaying the virtual environment representing a simulated physical space, detecting an event associated with the automatic dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment; And in response to detecting the event associated with the automatic dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment: Based on determining that the virtual environment is displayed in a visual appearance corresponding to a time of a first day outside a set of times of day in the simulated physical space, updating the display of the virtual environment to be displayed in a visual appearance corresponding to a time of a second day within the set of times of day in the simulated physical space, wherein the time of the second day is different from the time of the first day; And Based on determining that the virtual environment is displayed in the visual appearance corresponding to a corresponding time of day within the set of times of day in the simulated physical space, continuing to display the virtual environment in the visual appearance corresponding to the corresponding time of day in the simulated physical space.

50. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform a method including: Displaying a three-dimensional environment including a virtual environment via the display generation component; When displaying the virtual environment representing the simulated physical space, detect an event associated with the automatic dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment; And in response to detecting the event associated with the automatic dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment: Based on determining that the virtual environment is displayed in a visual appearance corresponding to a time of a first day outside a set of times of day in the simulated physical space, updating the display of the virtual environment to be displayed in a visual appearance corresponding to a time of a second day within the set of times of day in the simulated physical space, wherein the time of the second day is different from the time of the first day; And Based on determining that the virtual environment is displayed in the visual appearance corresponding to a corresponding time of day within the set of times of day in the simulated physical space, continuing to display the virtual environment in the visual appearance corresponding to the corresponding time of day in the simulated physical space.

51. A computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; Means for displaying, via the display generation component, a three-dimensional environment including a virtual environment; Means for: when displaying the virtual environment representing an analog physical space, detecting an event associated with the automatic dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment; And in response to detecting the event associated with the automatic dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment: Updating the display of the virtual environment to a visual appearance corresponding to a second time of day within the set of times of day in the analog physical space, where the second time of day is different from the first time of day, based on determining that the virtual environment is to be displayed with a visual appearance corresponding to the first time of day outside the set of times of day in the analog physical space; And Continuing to display the virtual environment with the visual appearance corresponding to the corresponding time of day in the analog physical space, based on determining that the virtual environment is to be displayed with the visual appearance corresponding to the corresponding time of day within the set of times of day in the analog physical space.

52. A computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; And One or more programs, where the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method according to any one of claims 31 to 48.

53. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform the method according to any one of claims 31 to 48.

54. A computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; And Means for performing the method according to any one of claims 31 to 48.

55. A method, the method comprising: At a computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices: When a three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generation component, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first user input corresponding to a request to display corresponding media content in the three-dimensional environment in an extended display mode, where the corresponding media content occupies a larger portion of the user's field of view in the extended display mode than when displayed in a compact display mode; In response to receiving the first user input, a virtual environment selection user interface is displayed in the three-dimensional environment in the extended display mode via the display generation component, and the virtual environment selection user interface includes a first selectable option that can be selected to display the corresponding media content within a first virtual environment; When the virtual environment selection user interface is displayed, a second user input corresponding to the selection of a corresponding selectable option is received via the one or more input devices; and In response to receiving the second user input, based on determining that the second user input selects the first selectable option, the corresponding media content corresponding to the first selectable option is displayed within the first virtual environment via the display generation component.

56. The method according to claim 55, wherein when the first user input for displaying the corresponding media content in the extended display mode is detected, the corresponding media content is displayed in the compact display mode, and wherein displaying the corresponding media content in the extended display mode includes replacing the display of the corresponding media content in the compact display mode with the corresponding media content in the extended display mode.

57. The method according to claim 55, wherein when the first user input for displaying the corresponding media content in the extended display mode is detected, the corresponding media content is not displayed, and wherein displaying the corresponding media content in the extended display mode includes displaying the corresponding media content in the three-dimensional environment after receiving the first input.

58. The method according to any one of claims 55 to 57, wherein the virtual environment selection user interface includes a plurality of selectable options, the plurality of selectable options including the first selectable option and a second selectable option, and the second selectable option can be selected to display the corresponding media content within a second virtual environment different from the first virtual environment.

59. The method according to claim 58, the method further comprising: In response to receiving the second user input, based on determining that the second user input selects the second selectable option, the corresponding media content corresponding to the second selectable option is displayed within the second virtual environment via the display generation component.

60. The method according to any one of claims 55 to 59, wherein: Based on determining that the corresponding media content is first media content, the virtual environment selection user interface includes a first set of one or more selectable options corresponding to a first set of one or more virtual environments based on the first media content; and Based on determining that the corresponding media content is second media content different from the first media content, the virtual environment selection user interface includes a second set of one or more selectable options corresponding to a second set of one or more virtual environments based on the second media content.

61. The method according to claim 60, wherein the first set of one or more virtual environments includes corresponding virtual environments that are not included in the second set of one or more virtual environments.

62. The method according to claim 61, wherein the corresponding virtual environment is received by the computer system together with the first media content.

63. The method according to any one of claims 60 to 62, wherein the first media content corresponds to a first portion of the corresponding media content, and the second media content corresponds to a second portion of the corresponding media content that is different from the first portion.

64. The method according to any one of claims 55 to 63, the method further comprising displaying the corresponding media content within a system default environment in response to receiving a second user input corresponding to a selection of a second selectable option, wherein the virtual environment selection user interface includes the second selectable option.

65. The method according to any one of claims 55 to 64, the method further comprising displaying the corresponding media content within a corresponding virtual environment currently selected by the user in response to receiving a second user input corresponding to a selection of a second selectable option, wherein the virtual environment selection user interface includes the second selectable option.

66. The method according to any one of claims 55 to 65, the method further comprising displaying the corresponding media content within a corresponding virtual environment in response to receiving a second user input corresponding to a selection of a second selectable option, the corresponding virtual environment having a visual appearance corresponding to a time of day in a first day in the physical space simulated by the corresponding virtual environment, wherein the virtual environment selection user interface includes the second selectable option.

67. The method according to any one of claims 55 to 66, wherein the corresponding media content does not include three-dimensional content, the method further comprising: receiving, via the one or more input devices, a third user input corresponding to a request to display second corresponding media content, wherein the second corresponding media content is not displayed in the three-dimensional environment when the third user input is received; and in response to receiving the third user input: displaying the second corresponding media content in the extended display mode according to a determination that the second corresponding media content includes three-dimensional content; and displaying the second corresponding media content in the compact display mode according to a determination that the second corresponding media content does not include three-dimensional content.

68. The method according to any one of claims 55 to 67, the method further comprising: when displaying the first virtual environment in a case where the corresponding media content is not displayed in the extended display mode, displaying the first virtual environment with a first visual appearance corresponding to a time of day in a first day set based on a time of day defined by the user; and When displaying the corresponding media content in the extended display mode, the first virtual environment is displayed with a second visual appearance corresponding to a second time of day that is not based on the time-of-day setting defined by the user.

69. The method according to any one of claims 55 to 68, the method further comprising: In response to receiving the second user input corresponding to the selection of the first selectable option: Updating the system virtual environment to the first virtual environment according to a determination that one or more criteria are met, including criteria met when the first virtual environment can be used as the system virtual environment; and Abandoning updating the system virtual environment to the first virtual environment according to a determination that the one or more criteria are not met.

70. A computer system, the computer system communicating with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; And One or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: When a three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generation component, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first user input corresponding to a request to display corresponding media content in the three-dimensional environment in an extended display mode, wherein the corresponding media content occupies a larger portion of the user's field of view in the extended display mode compared to when the corresponding media content is displayed in a compact display mode; In response to receiving the first user input, displaying, via the display generation component, a virtual environment selection user interface in the three-dimensional environment in the extended display mode, the virtual environment selection user interface including a first selectable option that can be selected to display the corresponding media content within a first virtual environment; When the virtual environment selection user interface is displayed, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a second user input corresponding to the selection of a corresponding selectable option; And In response to receiving the second user input, according to a determination that the second user input has selected the first selectable option, displaying, via the display generation component, the corresponding media content corresponding to the first selectable option within the first virtual environment.

71. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system communicating with a display generation component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform a method including: When a three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generation component, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first user input corresponding to a request to display corresponding media content in the three-dimensional environment in an extended display mode, wherein the corresponding media content occupies a larger portion of the user's field of view in the extended display mode compared to when the corresponding media content is displayed in a compact display mode; In response to receiving the first user input, a virtual environment selection user interface is displayed in the three-dimensional environment in the extended display mode via the display generation component, and the virtual environment selection user interface includes a first selectable option that can be selected to display the corresponding media content within a first virtual environment; When the virtual environment selection user interface is displayed, a second user input corresponding to the selection of a corresponding selectable option is received via the one or more input devices; and In response to receiving the second user input, and based on determining that the second user input has selected the first selectable option, the corresponding media content corresponding to the first selectable option is displayed within the first virtual environment via the display generation component.

72. A computer system, the computer system communicating with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; a memory; means for: when a three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generation component, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first user input corresponding to a request to display corresponding media content in the three-dimensional environment in an extended display mode, wherein the corresponding media content occupies a larger portion of the user's field of view in the extended display mode compared to when the corresponding media content is displayed in a compact display mode; means for: in response to receiving the first user input, displaying, via the display generation component, a virtual environment selection user interface in the three-dimensional environment in the extended display mode, the virtual environment selection user interface including a first selectable option that can be selected to display the corresponding media content within a first virtual environment; means for: when the virtual environment selection user interface is displayed, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a second user input corresponding to the selection of a corresponding selectable option; and means for: in response to receiving the second user input, and based on determining that the second user input has selected the first selectable option, displaying, via the display generation component, the corresponding media content corresponding to the first selectable option within the first virtual environment.

73. A computer system, the computer system communicating with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; a memory; and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and are configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method according to any one of claims 55 to 69.

74. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system communicating with a display generation component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform the method according to any one of claims 55 to 69.

75. A computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; And Means for performing the method according to any one of claims 55 to 69.

76. A method, the method comprising: At a first computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices: Displaying a first virtual environment via the display generation component; When displaying the first virtual environment, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request for a first user of the first computer system to join a communication session, the communication session including a second user of a second computer system different from the first computer system, wherein the second computer system is displaying a second virtual environment different from the first virtual environment; and In response to receiving the first input, joining the communication session with the user of the second computer system while maintaining the display of the first virtual environment via the display generation component, wherein the first user of the first computer system is communicating with a spatial representation of the second user at a corresponding location within the first virtual environment, wherein: The spatial representation of the second user moves within the first virtual environment based on the movement of the second user; and After the first computer system joins the communication session with the user of the second computer system, the second computer system maintains the display of the second virtual environment, wherein the second user of the second computer system is communicating with a spatial representation of the first user within the second virtual environment, and the spatial representation of the first user moves within the second virtual environment based on the movement of the first user.

77. The method according to claim 76, the method further comprising: When the first computer system and the second computer system are in the communication session, wherein the first computer system is displaying the first virtual environment and the second computer system is displaying the second virtual environment, detecting that one or more criteria are met; And In response to detecting that the one or more criteria are met, displaying, via the display generation component, a corresponding shared virtual environment shared by the first computer system and the second computer system in the communication session, wherein when the corresponding shared virtual environment is shared by the first computer system and the second computer system in the communication session, the spatial representation of the second user is displayed by the first computer system within the corresponding shared virtual environment and the spatial representation of the first user is displayed by the second computer system within the corresponding shared virtual environment.

78. The method according to claim 77, wherein the one or more criteria include criteria that are satisfied when the first computer system receives an indication during the communication session that the second computer system has switched from displaying the second virtual environment to displaying the corresponding shared virtual environment.

79. The method according to claim 77, wherein the one or more criteria include criteria that are satisfied when a second input corresponding to a request to confirm the display of the corresponding shared virtual environment at the first computer system is received, the method further comprising: Receiving, while the first computer system and the second computer system are in the communication session and while the first virtual environment is being displayed via the display generating component, an indication that the second computer system has changed from displaying the second virtual environment to displaying the corresponding shared virtual environment that is different from the first virtual environment; In response to receiving the indication that the second computer system has changed from displaying the second virtual environment to displaying the corresponding shared virtual environment, displaying, via the display generating component, a confirmation user interface for confirming the display of the corresponding shared virtual environment at the first computer system; And While the confirmation user interface and the first virtual environment are being displayed, receiving, via the one or more input devices, the second input corresponding to the request to confirm the display of the corresponding shared virtual environment at the first computer system.

80. The method according to any one of claims 77 to 79, wherein the one or more criteria include criteria that are satisfied when the corresponding shared virtual environment has been downloaded to the first computer system.

81. The method according to any one of claims 77 to 80, wherein the one or more criteria include criteria that are satisfied when a second input for sharing the corresponding shared virtual environment is detected at the first computer system, the method further comprising: While the first computer system and the second computer system are in the communication session, displaying, via the display generating component, an information user interface for the communication session, the information user interface being for controlling one or more characteristics of the communication session; And While the information user interface is being displayed, receiving, via the one or more input devices, the second input directed to the information user interface.

82. The method according to any one of claims 77 to 81, the method further comprising: Receiving, via the one or more input devices, a second input corresponding to a request to switch from displaying the first virtual environment to displaying a third virtual environment that is different from the first virtual environment before the one or more criteria are satisfied; And In response to receiving the second input: Based on determining that the first computer system and the second computer system are in the communication session, a virtual environment sharing user interface is displayed via the display generating component, and the virtual environment sharing user interface is used to indicate whether the third virtual environment should be shared with the second computer system in the communication session, wherein the one or more criteria include criteria that are satisfied when an input for sharing the third virtual environment with the second computer system as the corresponding shared virtual environment is received at the first computer system.

83. The method according to claim 82, wherein the virtual environment sharing user interface includes a first selectable option and a second selectable option, the first selectable option can be selected to share the third virtual environment with the second computer system as the corresponding shared virtual environment, and the second selectable option can be selected to display the third virtual environment at the first computer system without sharing the third virtual environment with the second computer system.

84. The method according to any one of claims 77 to 83, the method further comprising: In response to detecting that the one or more criteria are satisfied: Based on determining that the satisfaction of the one or more criteria corresponds to accepting a request from the second computer system to share the corresponding shared virtual environment with the first computer system, the corresponding shared virtual environment is displayed via the display generating component without changing the system virtual environment of the first computer system; and Based on determining that the satisfaction of the one or more criteria corresponds to a request to switch from displaying the first virtual environment to displaying the corresponding shared virtual environment, the request not being based on a request from the second computer system to share the corresponding shared virtual environment with the first computer system, the corresponding shared virtual environment is displayed via the display generating component and the system virtual environment of the first computer system is changed to the corresponding shared virtual environment.

85. The method according to any one of claims 82 to 84, the method further comprising: In response to receiving the second input: Based on determining that the first computer system is not in a communication session with another computer system, the third virtual environment is displayed via the display generating component without displaying the virtual environment sharing user interface.

86. The method according to any one of claims 77 to 85, the method further comprising: When the first computer system and the second computer system are in the communication session, a virtual environment selection user interface is displayed via the display generating component, wherein: Based on determining that a first corresponding virtual environment is being shared by the first computer system and the second computer system in the communication session, the virtual environment selection user interface includes a first visual indication that indicates that the first corresponding virtual environment is being shared by the first computer system and the second computer system in the communication session, and Based on determining that a second corresponding virtual environment different from the first corresponding virtual environment is being shared by the first computer system and the second computer system in the communication session, the virtual environment selection user interface includes a second visual indication that indicates that the second corresponding virtual environment is being shared by the first computer system and the second computer system in the communication session.

87. The method according to any one of claims 77 to 86, the method further comprising: When the first computer system and the second computer system are in the communication session, display a virtual environment selection user interface via the display generation component, and visually distinguish one or more downloaded environments from one or more non-downloaded environments.

88. The method according to any one of claims 77 to 87, the method further comprising: When the first computer system and the second computer system are in the communication session and when the first virtual environment is displayed via the display generation component, receive an indication that the second computer system has changed from displaying the second virtual environment to displaying the corresponding shared virtual environment different from the first virtual environment; and In response to receiving the indication that the second computer system has changed from displaying the second virtual environment to displaying the corresponding shared virtual environment, display a confirmation user interface via the display generation component for confirming the display of the corresponding shared virtual environment at the first computer system.

89. The method according to claim 88, wherein the confirmation user interface includes a first selectable option and a second selectable option, the first selectable option can be selected to confirm the display of the corresponding shared virtual environment, the second selectable option can be selected to reject the display of the corresponding shared virtual environment, the method further comprising: When the confirmation user interface is displayed, receive a second input pointing to the confirmation user interface via the one or more input devices; And In response to receiving the second input: Based on determining that the second input corresponds to a selection of the first selectable option, display the corresponding shared virtual environment via the display generation component; and Based on determining that the third input corresponds to a selection of the second selectable option, maintain the display of the first virtual environment without displaying the corresponding shared virtual environment via the display generation component.

90. The method according to any one of claims 88 to 89, wherein after the second computer system is displaying the corresponding shared virtual environment, receive the indication that the second computer system has changed from displaying the second virtual environment to displaying the corresponding shared virtual environment.

91. The method according to any one of claims 77 to 90, wherein the one or more criteria are satisfied based on a corresponding computer system in the communication session switching from displaying a first corresponding virtual environment to displaying a second corresponding virtual environment.

92. The method according to any one of claims 77 to 91, wherein the one or more criteria are satisfied based on the corresponding computer system in the communication session initiating the sharing of the corresponding content in the communication session.

93. The method according to claim 92, wherein the one or more criteria include criteria satisfied when a second input for confirming the sharing of the corresponding shared virtual environment with the first computer system and the second computer system in the communication session is detected, and the method further comprises: In response to detecting that the one or more criteria are not satisfied, exiting the communication session with the second computer system.

94. The method according to any one of claims 92 to 93, the method further comprising: When the first computer system and the second computer system are in the communication session: When, in response to the second input, the corresponding shared virtual environment is displayed via the display generating component and when the corresponding content is being shared in the communication session, receiving an indication that the sharing of the corresponding content in the communication session has ended via the one or more input devices; And In response to receiving the indication that the sharing of the corresponding content in the communication session has ended, stopping the display of the corresponding shared virtual environment and displaying the first virtual environment via the display generating component.

95. The method according to any one of claims 77 to 94, wherein when the corresponding shared virtual environment is shared by the first computer system and the second computer system in the communication session: The first computer system displays the corresponding shared virtual environment from a first direction relative to a reference in the corresponding shared virtual environment, including displaying a corresponding portion of the corresponding shared virtual environment having a corresponding position relative to the corresponding shared virtual environment from the first direction relative to the reference; and The second computer system displays the corresponding shared virtual environment from a second direction different from the first direction relative to the reference in the corresponding shared virtual environment, including displaying a corresponding portion of the corresponding shared virtual environment having a corresponding position relative to the corresponding shared virtual environment from the second direction relative to the reference.

96. The method according to any one of claims 77 to 95, wherein when the corresponding shared virtual environment is shared by the first computer system and the second computer system in the communication session: The first computer system displays the corresponding shared virtual environment from a first direction relative to a reference in the corresponding shared virtual environment, the first direction corresponding to a first simulated position of the first user in the corresponding shared virtual environment, wherein a spatial representation of the second user is displayed within the display from the first direction of the corresponding shared virtual environment, and The second computer system displays the corresponding shared virtual environment from a second direction different from the first direction with respect to the reference in the corresponding shared virtual environment, the second direction corresponding to a second simulated position of the second user in the corresponding shared virtual environment, wherein the spatial representation of the first user is displayed within the display of the corresponding shared virtual environment from the second direction.

97. The method according to any one of claims 77 to 96, wherein when a third virtual environment is being displayed by the first computer system and the second computer system during the communication session, and wherein the third virtual environment is not shared by the first computer system and the second computer system in the communication session: The first computer system displays the third virtual environment from a first direction with respect to a reference in the third virtual environment, wherein the spatial representation of the second user is displayed within the display of the third virtual environment from the first direction, and the second computer system displays the third virtual environment from the first direction with respect to the reference in the third virtual environment, wherein the spatial representation of the first user is displayed within the display of the third virtual environment from the first direction.

98. The method according to any one of claims 77 to 97, wherein when the first computer system and the second computer system are in the communication session: Displaying the first virtual environment before satisfying the one or more criteria includes displaying the first virtual environment at a first immersion level, and The corresponding shared virtual environment displayed in the communication session and shared by the first computer system and the second computer system includes: In response to detecting that the one or more criteria are satisfied, including displaying the corresponding shared virtual environment at the first immersion level.

99. The method according to any one of claims 77 to 96, the method further comprising: In response to detecting that the one or more criteria are satisfied: According to a determination that an immersion level associated with the first computer system is higher than a threshold immersion level, display the corresponding shared virtual environment shared by the first computer system and the second computer system in the communication session without changing the immersion level associated with the first computer system; And According to a determination that the immersion level associated with the first computer system is lower than the threshold immersion level, display the corresponding shared virtual environment shared by the first computer system and the second computer system in the communication session and change the immersion level associated with the first computer system.

100. The method according to any one of claims 76 to 99, the method further comprising: When the first computer system and the second computer system are in the communication session and independent of the immersion level at which the second computer system is using to display a first corresponding virtual environment When displaying a second corresponding virtual environment at a first immersion level, receive, via the one or more input devices, a second input corresponding to a request to change the immersion level of the second corresponding virtual environment from the first immersion level to a second immersion level; And In response to receiving the second input, display the second corresponding virtual environment via the display generation component at the second immersion level.

101. The method according to any one of claims 76 to 100, the method further comprising: When the first computer system and the second computer system are in the communication session and independent of the volume level of the second computer system: When the volume level of the first computer system is a first volume level, receive a second input corresponding to a request to change the volume level of the first computer system from the first volume level to a second volume level different from the first volume level via the one or more input devices; and In response to receiving the second input, change the volume level of the first computer system from the first volume level to the second volume level.

102. The method according to any one of claims 76 to 101, the method further comprising: When corresponding content is being shared in the communication session: When the corresponding content is being shared in a compact mode in the communication session, display a corresponding virtual environment via the display generation component at a first immersion level; When the corresponding virtual environment is being displayed at the first immersion level, receive an indication that the corresponding content is being shared in an extended mode in the communication session; and In response to receiving the indication that the corresponding content is being shared in the extended mode in the communication session: According to determining that the first immersion level is less than a threshold immersion level, increase the immersion level of the corresponding virtual environment to a second immersion level greater than the first immersion level; And According to determining that the first immersion level is greater than the threshold immersion level, Maintain the immersion level of the corresponding virtual environment at the first immersion level.

103. The method according to any one of claims 76 to 102, the method further comprising: When the first computer system and the second computer system are in the communication session and when a first corresponding virtual environment is being displayed at the first computer system: According to determining that the first corresponding virtual environment is shared by the first computer system and the second computer system in the communication session, synchronize the time of day setting used by the first computer system to display the first corresponding virtual environment with the time of day setting used by the second computer system to display the first corresponding virtual environment; And According to determining that the first corresponding virtual environment is not shared by the first computer system and the second computer system in the communication session, forgo synchronizing the time of day setting used by the first computer system to display the first corresponding virtual environment with the time of day setting used by the second computer system to display a second corresponding virtual environment.

104. The method according to claim 103, wherein synchronizing the time - of - day setting of the first computer system for displaying the first corresponding virtual environment with the time - of - day setting of the second computer system for displaying the first corresponding virtual environment includes: Receiving, via the one or more input devices, a second input corresponding to a request to change the time - of - day setting at the first computer system to a first setting; In response to receiving the second input, initiating a process of setting the time - of - day setting at the second computer system to the first setting, including causing the second computer system to display the first corresponding virtual environment according to the first setting; Receiving, via the one or more input devices, an indication that the time - of - day setting at the second computer system has changed to a second setting; And In response to receiving the indication that the time - of - day setting at the second computer system has changed to the second setting, initiating a process of setting the time - of - day setting at the first computer system to the second setting and displaying the first corresponding virtual environment according to the second setting.

105. The method according to claim 104, the method further comprising: In response to receiving the indication that the time - of - day setting at the second computer system has changed to the second setting, generating a notification indicating that the second user has changed the time - of - day setting at the second computer system to the second setting.

106. A first computer system, the first computer system communicating with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the first computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; And One or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: Displaying a first virtual environment via the display generation component; When displaying the first virtual environment, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request for a first user of the first computer system to join a communication session, the communication session including a second user of a second computer system different from the first computer system, wherein the second computer system is displaying a second virtual environment different from the first virtual environment; and In response to receiving the first input, joining the communication session with the user of the second computer system while maintaining the display of the first virtual environment via the display generation component, wherein the first user of the first computer system is communicating with a spatial representation of the second user at a corresponding location within the first virtual environment, wherein: The spatial representation of the second user moves within the first virtual environment based on the movement of the second user; and After the first computer system joins the communication session with the user of the second computer system, the second computer system maintains the display of the second virtual environment, where the second user of the second computer system is communicating with the spatial representation of the first user located within the second virtual environment, and the spatial representation of the first user moves within the second virtual environment based on the movement of the first user.

107. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a first computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, cause the first computer system to perform a method including the following operations: Display a first virtual environment via the display generation component; When displaying the first virtual environment, receive, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request for the first user of the first computer system to join a communication session, the communication session including a second user of a second computer system different from the first computer system, where the second computer system is displaying a second virtual environment different from the first virtual environment; and In response to receiving the first input, join the communication session with the user of the second computer system while maintaining the display of the first virtual environment via the display generation component, where the first user of the first computer system is communicating with the spatial representation of the second user located at a corresponding position within the first virtual environment, where: The spatial representation of the second user moves within the first virtual environment based on the movement of the second user; And After the first computer system joins the communication session with the user of the second computer system, the second computer system maintains the display of the second virtual environment, where the second user of the second computer system is communicating with the spatial representation of the first user located within the second virtual environment, and the spatial representation of the first user moves within the second virtual environment based on the movement of the first user.

108. A first computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the first computer system including: One or more processors; Memory; Means for displaying a first virtual environment via the display generation component; Means for: when displaying the first virtual environment, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request for the first user of the first computer system to join a communication session, the communication session including a second user of a second computer system different from the first computer system, where the second computer system is displaying a second virtual environment different from the first virtual environment; And Apparatus for the following operations: in response to receiving the first input, join the communication session with the user of the second computer system while maintaining the display of the first virtual environment via the display generation component, wherein the first user of the first computer system is communicating with a spatial representation of the second user at a corresponding location within the first virtual environment, wherein: the spatial representation of the second user moves within the first virtual environment based on the movement of the second user; and after the first computer system joins the communication session with the user of the second computer system, the second computer system maintains the display of the second virtual environment, wherein the second user of the second computer system is communicating with a spatial representation of the first user within the second virtual environment, and the spatial representation of the first user moves within the second virtual environment based on the movement of the first user.

109. A first computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the first computer system comprising: one or more processors; a memory; and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method according to any one of claims 76 to 105.

110. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a first computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, cause the first computer system to perform the method according to any one of claims 76 to 105.

111. A first computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the first computer system comprising: one or more processors; a memory; and means for performing the method according to any one of claims 76 to 105.

112. A method comprising: at a computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices: when the viewpoint of the user of the computer system is a first viewpoint with respect to a three-dimensional environment including the displayed virtual environment, wherein the virtual environment is displayed at a first angle with respect to a reference frame based on the physical environment in which the user is located, detect a first predetermined event; and in response to detecting the first predetermined event: update the display of the virtual environment to display the virtual environment at a second angle different from the first angle with respect to the reference frame based on the physical environment in which the user is located according to determining that the viewpoint of the user satisfies one or more criteria; and Based on determining that the user's viewpoint does not meet the one or more criteria, maintain the display of the virtual environment at the first angle relative to the reference frame based on the physical environment in which the user is located.

113. The method according to claim 112, wherein: Displaying the virtual environment at the first angle relative to the reference frame includes displaying a portal into the virtual environment at a first position in the three-dimensional environment in the three-dimensional environment; and Displaying the virtual environment at the second angle relative to the reference frame includes displaying the portal into the virtual environment at a second position in the three-dimensional environment that is different from the first position in the three-dimensional environment.

114. The method according to any one of claims 112 to 113, wherein the three-dimensional environment includes a first virtual object separate from the virtual environment, and the one or more criteria include criteria that are satisfied when the first predetermined event includes an input corresponding to moving the first virtual object within the three-dimensional environment.

115. The method according to any one of claims 112 to 114, wherein the one or more criteria include criteria that are satisfied based on a change in the orientation of the user of the computer system in the physical environment.

116. The method according to claim 115, wherein the change in orientation includes a change in the orientation of the body of the user of the computer system.

117. The method according to any one of claims 115 to 116, wherein the change in orientation includes a change in the orientation of the head of the user of the computer system.

118. The method according to any one of claims 115 to 117, wherein the change in orientation includes a change in the orientation of a part of the user of the computer system relative to the three-dimensional environment.

119. The method according to claim 118, wherein the criteria are satisfied when the change in the orientation of the part of the user is in a first direction, but not satisfied when the change in the orientation of the part of the user is in a second direction different from the first direction.

120. The method according to any one of claims 112 to 119, wherein the one or more criteria include criteria that are satisfied when the first predetermined event includes an input corresponding to a request to recenter virtual content in the three-dimensional environment to one or more positions in the three-dimensional environment based on the user's viewpoint.

121. The method according to claim 120, wherein the input corresponding to the request to recenter the virtual content includes the selection of a hardware input element included in the computer system and communicating with the computer system.

122. The method according to any one of claims 120 to 121, wherein the input corresponding to the request to recenter the virtual content includes the selection of a selectable element displayed in the three-dimensional environment.

123. The method according to claim 122, wherein the first predetermined event includes a change of the user's viewing point from a first viewing point to a second viewing point, when the user's viewing point is the first viewing point, the selectable element is not displayed in the three-dimensional environment, and the selectable element is displayed in the three-dimensional environment in response to the user's viewing point changing to the second viewing point.

124. The method according to any one of claims 120 to 123, wherein when the first predetermined event is detected, the three-dimensional environment includes a first virtual object at a first position outside the virtual environment, and the method further includes: In response to detecting the first predetermined event including the input corresponding to the request for re-centering the virtual content in the three-dimensional environment, moving the first virtual object from the first position to a second position different from the first position in the three-dimensional environment, wherein the second position is based on the user's second viewing point.

125. The method according to claim 112, wherein when the virtual environment is displayed at the first angle relative to the reference system and when the virtual environment is displayed at the second angle relative to the reference system, the virtual environment includes a horizon located at a corresponding position relative to the three-dimensional environment.

126. The method according to any one of claims 112 to 124, wherein when the virtual environment is displayed at the first angle relative to the reference system and when the virtual environment is displayed at the second angle relative to the reference system, the virtual environment is displayed at a corresponding immersion level.

127. The method according to any one of claims 112 to 126, wherein: Displaying the virtual environment at the first angle relative to the reference system includes displaying a portal for entering the virtual environment at a first position in the three-dimensional environment in the three-dimensional environment, wherein the portal has a first size along a first dimension; and Displaying the virtual environment at the second angle relative to the reference system includes displaying the portal for entering the virtual environment at the first position in the three-dimensional environment in the three-dimensional environment, wherein the portal has a second size different from the first size along the first dimension.

128. The method according to any one of claims 112 to 127, wherein when the first predetermined event is detected, the virtual environment includes a first virtual object other than the virtual environment, the first virtual object being at a first distance from the user's viewing point, and the method further includes: In response to detecting the first predetermined event and based on determining that the user's viewing point meets the one or more criteria, moving the first virtual object to be at a second distance from the user's viewing point different from the first distance.

129. The method according to claim 127, wherein the second distance is less than the first distance.

130. The method according to any one of claims 127 to 128, wherein when the first predetermined event is detected, the first virtual object is located at a predefined position defined by the virtual environment in the virtual environment, and in response to detecting the first predetermined event and based on the determination that the user's viewpoint satisfies the one or more criteria, the first virtual object is displayed at a first position different from the predefined position in the three-dimensional environment, the method further comprising: When the first virtual object is displayed at the first position, receiving, via the one or more input devices, an input corresponding to a request to move the first virtual object away from the first position in the three-dimensional environment; And In response to receiving the input, moving the first virtual object away from the first position in the three-dimensional environment according to the input.

131. The method according to any one of claims 112 to 130, wherein when the first predetermined event is detected, the virtual environment includes a first virtual object other than the virtual environment, the first virtual object is at a first position in the three-dimensional environment and has a first spatial relationship with respect to the user's viewpoint, the method further comprising: In response to detecting the first predetermined event and based on the determination that the user's viewpoint satisfies the one or more criteria: Moving the first virtual object to a second position different from the first position in the three-dimensional environment according to the determination that the first virtual object has a first value for a corresponding characteristic, wherein when located at the second position, after detecting the first predetermined event, the first virtual object has the first spatial relationship with respect to the user's viewpoint; And Maintaining the first virtual object at the first position in the three-dimensional environment according to the determination that the first virtual object has a second value different from the first value for the corresponding characteristic, wherein when located at the first position, after detecting the first predetermined event, the first virtual object has a second spatial relationship different from the first spatial relationship with respect to the user's viewpoint.

132. The method according to any one of claims 112 to 131, the method further comprising: Detecting a second predetermined event when the virtual environment is displayed at the second angle with respect to the reference system; And In response to detecting the second predetermined event: Updating the display of the virtual environment to display the virtual environment from a third angle different from the second angle with respect to the reference system according to the determination that the user's viewpoint satisfies the one or more criteria.

133. The method according to claim 132, wherein the first predetermined event includes a change of the user's viewpoint from a first viewpoint to a second viewpoint, and updating the display of the virtual environment to display the virtual environment from the third angle includes: Based on determining that the second predetermined event includes the user's viewpoint changing from the second viewpoint to the first viewpoint, display the virtual environment from the first angle.

134. The method according to any one of claims 132 to 133, wherein the first predetermined event includes the user's viewpoint changing from a first viewpoint to a second viewpoint, and updating the display of the virtual environment to display the virtual environment from the third angle includes: Based on determining that the second predetermined event includes the user's viewpoint changing from the second viewpoint to a third viewpoint different from the first viewpoint, display the virtual environment from the third angle different from the first angle.

135. The method according to any one of claims 132 to 134, wherein: When the first predetermined event is detected, the three-dimensional environment includes a first virtual object located at a predefined position defined by the virtual environment in the virtual environment, the first predetermined event includes the user's viewpoint changing from a first viewpoint to a second viewpoint, in response to detecting the first predetermined event and based on determining that the user's viewpoint meets the one or more criteria, display the first virtual object at a first position different from the predefined position in the three-dimensional environment, and updating the display of the virtual environment to display the virtual environment from the third angle includes: Based on determining that the second predetermined event includes the user's viewpoint changing from the second viewpoint to the first viewpoint, move the first virtual object to the predefined position defined by the virtual environment in the virtual environment.

136. A computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; And One or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, and the one or more programs include instructions for the following operations: When the viewpoint of the user of the computer system with respect to a three-dimensional environment including the displayed virtual environment is a first viewpoint, wherein the virtual environment is displayed at a first angle with respect to a reference system based on the physical environment in which the user is located, detect a first predetermined event; and In response to detecting the first predetermined event: Based on determining that the user's viewpoint meets one or more criteria, update the display of the virtual environment to display the virtual environment at a second angle different from the first angle with respect to the reference system based on the physical environment in which the user is located; And Based on determining that the user's viewpoint does not meet the one or more criteria, maintain the display of the virtual environment at the first angle with respect to the reference system based on the physical environment in which the user is located.

137. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform a method comprising the following operations: When a viewpoint of a user of the computer system with respect to a three-dimensional environment including a displayed virtual environment is a first viewpoint, wherein the virtual environment is displayed at a first angle with respect to a reference frame based on the physical environment in which the user is located, detecting a first predetermined event; and In response to detecting the first predetermined event: Based on determining that the viewpoint of the user satisfies one or more criteria, updating the display of the virtual environment to display the virtual environment at a second angle different from the first angle with respect to the reference frame based on the physical environment in which the user is located; and Based on determining that the viewpoint of the user does not satisfy the one or more criteria, maintaining the display of the virtual environment at the first angle with respect to the reference frame based on the physical environment in which the user is located.

138. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; Means for: when a viewpoint of a user of the computer system with respect to a three-dimensional environment including a displayed virtual environment is a first viewpoint, wherein the virtual environment is displayed at a first angle with respect to a reference frame based on the physical environment in which the user is located, detecting a first predetermined event; And Means for: in response to detecting the first predetermined event: Based on determining that the viewpoint of the user satisfies one or more criteria, updating the display of the virtual environment to display the virtual environment at a second angle different from the first angle with respect to the reference frame based on the physical environment in which the user is located; And Based on determining that the viewpoint of the user does not satisfy the one or more criteria, maintaining the display of the virtual environment at the first angle with respect to the reference frame based on the physical environment in which the user is located.

139. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; And One or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method according to any one of claims 112 to 135.

140. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform the method according to any one of claims 112 to 135.

141. A computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; And Means for performing the method according to any one of claims 112 to 135.

142. A method, the method comprising: At a first computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices: During a communication session, display a first virtual environment via the display generation component, wherein the communication session includes the first computer system and a second computer system different from the first computer system, and wherein the first virtual environment is a first simulated physical environment in which a conversation between a first user of the first computer system and a second user of the second computer system is taking place during the communication session; When the first virtual environment is being displayed during the communication session, receive a first input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a request to display a second virtual environment different from the first virtual environment while remaining in the communication session; and In response to receiving the first input: When remaining in the communication session, display the second virtual environment via the display generation component, wherein the second virtual environment is a second simulated physical environment in which a conversation between the first user of the first computer system and the second user of the second computer system is taking place during the communication session; and Initiate a process to display the second virtual environment at the second computer system based on determining that one or more first criteria are met, wherein the second virtual environment is the second simulated physical environment in which the conversation between the first user of the first computer system and the second user of the second computer system is taking place during the communication session.

143. The method according to claim 142, the method comprising: In response to receiving the first input: Abandon the process of initiating to display the second virtual environment at the second computer system while the first computer system and the second computer system remain in the communication session based on determining that the one or more first criteria are not met.

144. The method according to any one of claims 142 to 143, wherein the one or more first criteria include criteria that are met when the first computer system receives an input corresponding to authorizing sharing of the second virtual environment with the second computer system.

145. The method according to any one of claims 142 to 144, wherein: Displaying the second virtual environment during the communication session in response to receiving the first input includes displaying the second simulated physical environment from a predefined orientation via the display generation component, and displaying the first virtual environment during the communication session includes: Based on determining that the first computer system joined the communication session when the first virtual environment has been shared in the communication session, display the first simulated physical environment from a second orientation different from the predefined orientation via the display generation component; and Based on determining that the first computer system initiated the display of the first virtual environment during the communication session, display the first simulated physical environment from the predefined orientation via the display generation component.

146. The method according to claim 145, wherein the second orientation is based on one or more orientations in the first virtual environment associated with one or more other computer systems that have displayed the first virtual environment in the communication session.

147. The method according to any one of claims 145 to 146, wherein displaying the first virtual environment during the communication session includes: Based on determining that a first number of one or more other computer systems have displayed the first virtual environment in the communication session, display the first simulated physical environment from a third orientation via the display generation component; and Based on determining that a second number of one or more other computer systems different from the first number of one or more other computer systems have displayed the first virtual environment in the communication session, display the first simulated physical environment from a fourth orientation different from the third orientation via the display generation component.

148. The method according to any one of claims 145 to 146, wherein displaying the first simulated physical environment from the second orientation via the display generation component is based on determining that the shared activity in the communication session is a first shared activity, and the method further includes: When displaying the first simulated physical environment from the second orientation via the display generation component, detect an indication that the shared activity has changed from the first shared activity to a second shared activity; and In response to detecting that the shared activity has changed from the first shared activity to the second shared activity, display the first simulated physical environment from a third orientation via the display generation component according to the second shared activity.

149. The method according to claim 148, wherein based on determining that the second shared activity corresponds to a shared visual experience, the orientations associated with the plurality of computer systems included in the communication session, including the third orientation, are within an orientation range that is the same orientation with respect to the first simulated physical environment.

150. The method according to any one of claims 148 to 149, wherein based on determining that the second shared activity does not correspond to a shared visual experience, the orientations associated with the plurality of computer systems included in the communication session, including the third orientation, differ from each other by at least a threshold amount with respect to the first simulated physical environment.

151. The method according to any one of claims 142 to 150, wherein a first immersion level for displaying the first virtual environment or the second virtual environment at the first computer system is independent of a second immersion level for displaying a corresponding virtual environment at the second computer system during the communication session.

152. The method according to any one of claims 142 to 151, the method further comprising: In response to detecting an indication that a corresponding virtual environment shared in the communication session has changed, displaying, via the display generation component, a notification indicating the change of the corresponding virtual environment shared in the communication session.

153. The method according to claim 152, wherein the notification indicates a corresponding user associated with the communication session, the corresponding user having initiated the change of the corresponding virtual environment shared in the communication session.

154. The method according to any one of claims 152 to 153, the method further comprising: In response to detecting the indication that the corresponding virtual environment shared in the communication session has changed to a first shared virtual environment and based on determining that one or more criteria are met, including criteria met when the first shared virtual environment has not been downloaded to the first computer system, initiating a process of downloading the first shared virtual environment to the first computer system.

155. The method according to any one of claims 142 to 154, wherein displaying the second virtual environment during the communication session includes displaying the second simulated physical environment via the display generation component from a first simulated position relative to the second simulated physical environment, and the second computer system displays a corresponding virtual environment from the first simulated position relative to a corresponding simulated physical environment of the corresponding virtual environment during the communication session.

156. The method according to claim 155, wherein: Displaying the second virtual environment during the communication session includes displaying a representation of the second user of the computer system at a corresponding location in the second virtual environment, wherein the corresponding location in the second virtual environment is different from the first simulated position relative to the corresponding simulated physical environment, and A representation of the first user of the first computer system is displayed by the second computer system at a corresponding location in the corresponding virtual environment, wherein the corresponding location in the corresponding virtual environment is different from the first simulated position relative to the second simulated physical environment.

157. The method according to any one of claims 142 to 156, wherein initiating the process of displaying the second virtual environment at the second computer system includes: Initiating, based on determining that the second virtual environment is displayed at the first computer system with a first visual appearance corresponding to a time of a first day in the second simulated physical environment, the process of displaying the second virtual environment at the second computer system with the first visual appearance corresponding to the time of the first day in the second simulated physical environment; and Initiating, based on determining that the second virtual environment is displayed at the first computer system with a second visual appearance corresponding to a time of a second day in the second simulated physical environment that is different from the time of the first day, the process of displaying the second virtual environment at the second computer system with the second visual appearance corresponding to the time of the second day in the second simulated physical environment.

158. The method according to claim 157, the method further comprising: When the second virtual environment is displayed via the display generating component during the communication session with the first visual appearance corresponding to the time of the first day in the second simulated physical environment, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a second input corresponding to a request to display the second virtual environment with the second visual appearance corresponding to the time of the second day in the second simulated physical environment while remaining in the communication session; and In response to receiving the second input: Displaying the second virtual environment with the second visual appearance corresponding to the time of the second day in the second simulated physical environment while remaining in the communication session; and Initiating, based on determining that one or more second criteria are met, the process of displaying the second virtual environment at the second computer system with the second visual appearance corresponding to the time of the second day in the second simulated physical environment.

159. The method according to any one of claims 142 to 158, wherein the first input corresponding to the request to display the second virtual environment comprises an input pointing to a first virtual environment selection user interface that is displayed as part of a communication session control interface for controlling one or more aspects of the communication session.

160. The method according to any one of claims 142 to 159, wherein the first input corresponding to the request to display the second virtual environment comprises an input pointing to a first virtual environment selection user interface that is displayed as part of a main user interface of the first computer system for accessing one or more functions of the first computer system other than the communication session.

161. The method according to any one of claims 159 to 160, wherein the first virtual environment selection user interface includes a first selectable object and a second selectable object, the first selectable object being capable of being selected to display the first virtual environment during the communication session, the second selectable object being capable of being selected to display the second virtual environment during the communication session, and displaying the first virtual environment selection user interface includes: Based on determining that the first virtual environment is currently being displayed during the communication session, displaying, via the display generation component, the first selectable object together with a visual indication indicating the current selection of the first virtual environment; And Based on determining that the second virtual environment is currently being displayed during the communication session, displaying, via the display generation component, the second selectable object together with the visual indication indicating the current selection of the second virtual environment.

162. The method according to claim 161, wherein displaying the visual indication indicating the current selection of the second virtual environment includes: Based on determining that one or more first criteria are met, wherein the one or more first criteria include criteria that are met when the first virtual environment is a shared virtual environment, displaying the visual indication in a first visual appearance; And Based on determining that the one or more first criteria are not met, displaying the visual indication in a second visual appearance different from the first visual appearance.

163. The method according to any one of claims 159 to 162, wherein the first virtual environment selection user interface is displayed during the communication session as overlaid on a representation of the second user in the first virtual environment.

164. The method according to any one of claims 142 to 163, the method further comprising: Before the first computer system is part of the communication session and before displaying the first virtual environment during the communication session: Receiving, via the one or more input devices, a second input corresponding to a request to join the communication session; and In response to receiving the second input: Based on determining that the first virtual environment is shared in the communication session, joining the communication session and displaying the first virtual environment via the display generation component; and Based on determining that the first virtual environment is not shared in the communication session, joining the communication session without displaying the first virtual environment via the display generation component.

165. A computer system, the computer system communicating with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; And One or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for the following operations: During a communication session, display a first virtual environment via the display generation component, where the communication session includes the first computer system and a second computer system different from the first computer system, and where the first virtual environment is a first simulated physical environment in which a conversation between a first user of the first computer system and a second user of the second computer system is occurring during the communication session; When the first virtual environment is being displayed during the communication session, receive, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request to display a second virtual environment different from the first virtual environment while remaining in the communication session; and In response to receiving the first input: When remaining in the communication session, display the second virtual environment via the display generation component, where the second virtual environment is a second simulated physical environment in which a conversation between the first user of the first computer system and the second user of the second computer system is occurring during the communication session; and Initiate a process to display the second virtual environment at the second computer system based on determining that one or more first criteria are met, where the second virtual environment is the second simulated physical environment in which the conversation between the first user of the first computer system and the second user of the second computer system is occurring during the communication session.

166. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform a method including the following operations: During a communication session, display a first virtual environment via the display generation component, where the communication session includes the first computer system and a second computer system different from the first computer system, and where the first virtual environment is a first simulated physical environment in which a conversation between a first user of the first computer system and a second user of the second computer system is occurring during the communication session; When the first virtual environment is being displayed during the communication session, receive, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request to display a second virtual environment different from the first virtual environment while remaining in the communication session; and In response to receiving the first input: When remaining in the communication session, display the second virtual environment via the display generation component, where the second virtual environment is a second simulated physical environment in which a conversation between the first user of the first computer system and the second user of the second computer system is occurring during the communication session; and Initiate a process to display the second virtual environment at the second computer system based on determining that one or more first criteria are met, where the second virtual environment is the second simulated physical environment in which the conversation between the first user of the first computer system and the second user of the second computer system is occurring during the communication session.

167. A computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; Means for: during a communication session, displaying a first virtual environment via the display generation component, where the communication session includes the first computer system and a second computer system different from the first computer system, and where the first virtual environment is a first simulated physical environment in which a conversation between a first user of the first computer system and a second user of the second computer system is occurring during the communication session; Means for: when the first virtual environment is being displayed during the communication session, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request to display a second virtual environment different from the first virtual environment while remaining in the communication session; And Means for: in response to receiving the first input: Displaying, via the display generation component, the second virtual environment while remaining in the communication session, where the second virtual environment is a second simulated physical environment in which the conversation between the first user of the first computer system and the second user of the second computer system is occurring during the communication session; and Initiate a process to display the second virtual environment at the second computer system based on determining that one or more first criteria are met, where the second virtual environment is the second simulated physical environment in which the conversation between the first user of the first computer system and the second user of the second computer system is occurring during the communication session.

168. A computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; And One or more programs, where the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, and the one or more programs include instructions for performing the method according to any one of claims 142 to 164.

169. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform the method according to any one of claims 142 to 164.

170. A computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; And Means for performing the method according to any one of claims 142 to 164.

171. A method, the method comprising: At a computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices: Receiving, via the one or more input devices, a request to display corresponding media in a virtual three-dimensional environment; and In response to the request to display the corresponding media in the virtual three-dimensional environment, simultaneously displaying the corresponding media and an analog lighting effect based on the content of the corresponding media and one or more textures of one or more parts of the virtual three-dimensional environment in the virtual three-dimensional environment, wherein displaying the analog lighting effect includes: According to determining that the corresponding media is a first media: Displaying the first part based on the appearance of the content of the first media and the appearance of the texture of the first part of the virtual three-dimensional environment; Displaying the second part based on the appearance of the content of the first media and the appearance of the texture of the second part of the virtual three-dimensional environment; and Displaying a third part of the virtual three-dimensional environment that is between the first part and the second part independently of the appearance of the content of the first media; and According to determining that the corresponding media is a second media different from the first media: Displaying the first part based on the appearance of the content of the second media and the appearance of the texture of the first part of the virtual three-dimensional environment; Displaying the second part based on the appearance of the content of the second media and the appearance of the texture of the second part of the virtual three-dimensional environment; and Displaying the third part of the virtual three-dimensional environment that is between the first part and the second part independently of the appearance of the content of the second media.

172. The method according to claim 171, wherein the request to display the corresponding media in the virtual three-dimensional environment is received when the corresponding media is not being displayed.

173. The method according to claim 171, wherein the request to display the corresponding media in the virtual three-dimensional environment is received when the corresponding media is being displayed in a second environment different from the virtual three-dimensional environment, the method further comprising: In response to receiving the request to display the corresponding media in the virtual three-dimensional environment: Stopping the display of the second environment; And Displaying the corresponding media in the virtual three-dimensional environment via the display generation component.

174. The method according to any one of claims 171 to 173, the method further comprising: When the corresponding media is being displayed in the virtual three-dimensional environment, changing one or more visual characteristics of the content of the corresponding media; And In response to changing the one or more visual characteristics of the content of the corresponding media: changing an appearance of the first portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment based on the change of the one or more visual characteristics of the content of the corresponding media; changing an appearance of the second portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment based on the change of the one or more visual characteristics of the content of the corresponding media; and maintaining an appearance of the third portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment.

175. The method according to any one of claims 171 to 174, wherein the texture of the first portion and the texture of the second portion share one or more visual characteristics.

176. The method according to any one of claims 171 to 175, wherein displaying the simulated lighting effect includes: displaying the first portion with a smooth surface including the texture of the first portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment; and displaying the second portion with a smooth surface including the texture of the second portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment.

177. The method according to any one of claims 171 to 176, wherein the texture of the first portion and the texture of the second portion include a plurality of virtual features, the plurality of virtual features having a small relative size and having a height value within a threshold amount of each other with respect to the virtual three-dimensional environment.

178. The method according to any one of claims 171 to 177, wherein the texture of the first portion and the texture of the second portion include a plurality of virtual features, the plurality of virtual features extending in a direction within a threshold angle of a first dimension of the corresponding media.

179. The method according to any one of claims 171 to 178, the method further comprising: in response to a request to display the corresponding media in the virtual three-dimensional environment, based on determining that the corresponding media is the first media, the first media having a first aspect ratio with respect to a first axis and a second axis in the virtual three-dimensional environment: displaying the first media in the virtual three-dimensional environment in a first dimension of a first value along the first axis and a second dimension of a second value along the second axis, wherein the first value and the second value correspond to the first aspect ratio; receiving, via the one or more input devices, a request to change the display of the corresponding media in the virtual three-dimensional environment; and in response to the request to change the display of the corresponding media in the virtual three-dimensional environment, based on determining that the request is to change the display of the corresponding media in the virtual three-dimensional environment from the first media to a second media different from the first media, the second media having a second aspect ratio different from the first aspect ratio with respect to the first axis and the second axis in the three-dimensional environment: displaying the second media in the virtual three-dimensional environment in the first dimension of the first value along the first axis and the second dimension of a third value different from the second value along the second axis, wherein the first value and the third value correspond to the second aspect ratio.

180. The method according to any one of claims 171 to 179, the method further comprising: When displaying the corresponding media in the virtual three-dimensional environment at a first position in the virtual three-dimensional environment from a first viewpoint among a plurality of available viewpoints associated with the virtual three-dimensional environment, wherein the first viewpoint has a first spatial arrangement relative to the corresponding media in the virtual three-dimensional environment, receiving, via the one or more input devices, an input corresponding to a selection of a second viewpoint among the plurality of available viewpoints associated with the virtual three-dimensional environment; And In response to receiving the input, displaying the corresponding media at the first position in the virtual three-dimensional environment from the second viewpoint among the plurality of available viewpoints, wherein the second viewpoint has a second spatial arrangement different from the first spatial arrangement relative to the corresponding media in the virtual three-dimensional environment.

181. The method according to claim 180, wherein the second viewpoint is different from the first viewpoint in terms of the distance from the corresponding media in the virtual three-dimensional environment and the height relative to a part of the corresponding media in the virtual three-dimensional environment.

182. The method according to claim 181, wherein the second viewpoint is different from the first viewpoint in terms of the height relative to the corresponding media in the virtual three-dimensional environment.

183. The method according to any one of claims 181 to 182, the method further comprising: When displaying the corresponding media in the virtual three-dimensional environment, detecting a change of the current viewpoint of the user of the computer system from a first viewpoint pointing to the corresponding media to a second viewpoint not pointing to the corresponding media relative to the virtual three-dimensional environment; And In response to detecting the change of the current viewpoint of the user, stopping the display of the corresponding media, and displaying a fourth part of the virtual three-dimensional environment in an appearance independent of the simulated lighting effect and not including the texture of the first part of the virtual three-dimensional environment and the texture of the second part of the virtual three-dimensional environment.

184. The method according to claim 183, wherein displaying the fourth part of the virtual three-dimensional environment includes displaying a representation of the horizon within the fourth part of the virtual three-dimensional environment.

185. The method according to any one of claims 170 to 184, the method further comprising: In response to the request for displaying the corresponding media in the virtual three-dimensional environment, abandoning the display of the corresponding media in the virtual three-dimensional environment according to a determination that the corresponding media is a third media different from the first media and the second media.

186. The method according to any one of claims 170 to 185, wherein the third part of the virtual three-dimensional environment includes simulated blank space and does not include any virtual surface.

187. The method according to any one of claims 170 to 186, wherein displaying the corresponding media in the virtual three-dimensional environment includes displaying the corresponding media without visually differentiating between the corresponding media and the third portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment.

188. A computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; And One or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: Receiving a request to display corresponding media in a virtual three-dimensional environment via the one or more input devices; and In response to the request to display the corresponding media in the virtual three-dimensional environment, simultaneously displaying the corresponding media and a simulated lighting effect based on the content of the corresponding media and one or more textures of one or more portions of the virtual three-dimensional environment, wherein displaying the simulated lighting effect includes: Based on determining that the corresponding media is a first media: Displaying the first portion based on the appearance of the content of the first media and the appearance of the texture of the first portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment; Displaying the second portion based on the appearance of the content of the first media and the appearance of the texture of the second portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment; and Displaying the third portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment, which is between the first portion and the second portion, independently of the appearance of the content of the first media; and Based on determining that the corresponding media is a second media different from the first media: Displaying the first portion based on the appearance of the content of the second media and the appearance of the texture of the first portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment; Displaying the second portion based on the appearance of the content of the second media and the appearance of the texture of the second portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment; and Displaying the third portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment, which is between the first portion and the second portion, independently of the appearance of the content of the second media.

189. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform a method including: Receiving a request to display corresponding media in a virtual three-dimensional environment via the one or more input devices; and In response to the request to display the corresponding media in the virtual three-dimensional environment, simultaneously displaying the corresponding media and a simulated lighting effect based on the content of the corresponding media and one or more textures of one or more portions of the virtual three-dimensional environment, wherein displaying the simulated lighting effect includes: Based on determining that the corresponding media is a first media: Display the first portion based on the appearance of the content of the first medium and the appearance of the texture of the first portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment; Display the second portion based on the appearance of the content of the first medium and the appearance of the texture of the second portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment; And Display a third portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment that is independent of the appearance of the content of the first medium, the third portion being between the first portion and the second portion; And According to determining that the corresponding medium is a second medium different from the first medium: Display the first portion based on the appearance of the content of the second medium and the appearance of the texture of the first portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment; Display the second portion based on the appearance of the content of the second medium and the appearance of the texture of the second portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment; And Display the third portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment that is independent of the appearance of the content of the second medium, the third portion being between the first portion and the second portion.

190. A computer system, the computer system communicating with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; Means for receiving, via the one or more input devices, a request to display a corresponding medium in a virtual three-dimensional environment; And Means for: in response to the request to display the corresponding medium in the virtual three-dimensional environment, simultaneously display in the virtual three-dimensional environment the corresponding medium and a simulated lighting effect based on the content of the corresponding medium and one or more textures of one or more portions of the virtual three-dimensional environment, wherein displaying the simulated lighting effect comprises: According to determining that the corresponding medium is the first medium: Display the first portion based on the appearance of the content of the first medium and the appearance of the texture of the first portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment; Display the second portion based on the appearance of the content of the first medium and the appearance of the texture of the second portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment; and Display a third portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment that is independent of the appearance of the content of the first medium, the third portion being between the first portion and the second portion; and According to determining that the corresponding medium is a second medium different from the first medium: Display the first portion based on the appearance of the content of the second medium and the appearance of the texture of the first portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment; Display the second portion based on the appearance of the content of the second medium and the appearance of the texture of the second portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment; and Display a third portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment that is independent of the appearance of the content of the second medium, the third portion being between the first portion and the second portion.

191. A computer system, the computer system communicating with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; And One or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, and the one or more programs include instructions for performing the method according to any one of claims 170 to 187.

192. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform the method according to any one of claims 170 to 187.

193. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; Memory; And Means for performing the method according to any one of claims 170 to 187.

194. A method, the method comprising: At a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices: Displaying media at a first position in a virtual environment from a current viewpoint of a user of the computer system via the display generation component, wherein the current viewpoint of the user is a first viewpoint among a plurality of available viewpoints associated with the virtual environment, and the first viewpoint has a first spatial arrangement relative to the media in the virtual environment; Receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a selection of a second viewpoint in the three-dimensional environment when the media is displayed from the first viewpoint among the plurality of available viewpoints, wherein the second viewpoint has a second spatial arrangement relative to the media in the virtual environment; And In response to receiving the first input, displaying the media at the first position in the virtual environment from the second viewpoint among the plurality of available viewpoints via the display generation component.

195. The method according to claim 194, wherein the first viewpoint includes a first distance from the media relative to the virtual environment, and the second viewpoint includes a second distance from the media relative to the virtual environment that is different from the first distance.

196. The method according to any one of claims 194 to 195, wherein the first viewpoint includes a first viewing angle of the media in the virtual environment, and the second viewpoint includes a second viewing angle of the media in the virtual environment that is different from the first viewing angle.

197. The method according to claim 196, wherein the second viewing angle of the media is from a position in the virtual environment below a vector perpendicular to the surface of the media.

198. The method according to claim 196, wherein the second viewing angle of the media is from a position in the virtual environment that includes a vector perpendicular to the surface of the media.

199. The method according to claim 196, wherein the second viewing angle of the media is from a position above a vector perpendicular to the surface of the media in the virtual environment.

200. The method according to any one of claims 194 to 199, wherein the first viewing point includes a first distance from the media relative to the virtual environment and a first viewing angle of the media, and the second viewing point includes a second distance from the media relative to the virtual environment different from the first distance and a second viewing angle of the media different from the first viewing angle.

201. The method according to any one of claims 194 to 200, wherein displaying the media at the first position in the virtual environment from the second viewpoint in response to receiving the first input comprises: When changing the current viewing point of the user from the first viewing point to the second viewing point, the display of the media at the first position in the virtual environment is maintained.

202. The method according to any one of claims 194 to 201, wherein displaying the media at the first position in the virtual environment includes simultaneously displaying the media and a simulated lighting effect based on the content of the media and one or more textures of one or more parts of the virtual environment, wherein displaying the simulated lighting effect includes: displaying the first part based on the appearance of the content of the media and the appearance of the texture of the first part of the virtual environment; displaying the second part based on the appearance of the content of the media and the appearance of the texture of the second part of the virtual environment; and displaying a third part of the virtual environment between the first part and the second part independently of the appearance of the content of the media.

203. The method according to any one of claims 194 to 202, the method further comprising: when displaying the media at the first position in the virtual environment from the second viewing point, receiving a second input corresponding to a request to display the media in a second environment different from the virtual environment via the one or more input devices; and in response to receiving the second input, stopping the display of the media at the first position in the virtual environment and displaying the media in the second environment.

204. The method according to any one of claims 194 to 203, wherein the second input includes selecting a selectable option displayed in a content control user interface displayed in the virtual environment to display the second environment, and the content control user interface further includes one or more selectable options for controlling the playback of the media.

205. The method according to claim 204, the method further comprising: in response to receiving the second input, displaying an environment selection user interface via the display generation component, wherein the environment selection user interface includes one or more visual representations of one or more environments that can be used for display, including a selectable visual representation that can be selected to display the second environment.

206. The method according to any one of claims 204 to 205, wherein displaying the environment selection user interface includes: When the media is displayed at the first position in the corresponding virtual environment from the corresponding viewpoint, in accordance with determining that the corresponding virtual environment is the virtual environment, a plurality of selectable options are displayed, the plurality of selectable options being able to be selected to initiate display of the media from the plurality of available viewpoints associated with the virtual environment.

207. The method according to claim 206, wherein the plurality of selectable options are able to be selected to change a spatial distance of the corresponding viewpoint from the media.

208. The method according to any one of claims 206 to 207, wherein the plurality of selectable options are able to be selected to change a viewing angle of the corresponding viewpoint with respect to the media.

209. The method according to any one of claims 206 to 208, wherein displaying the environment selection user interface includes: In accordance with determining that the corresponding virtual environment is different from the virtual environment, displaying the environment selection user interface without displaying the plurality of selectable options that are able to be selected to initiate display of the media from the plurality of different viewpoints in the corresponding virtual environment.

210. The method according to any one of claims 206 to 209, wherein the environment selection user interface includes a selectable option that is able to be selected to stop display of the media in the virtual environment.

211. The method according to any one of claims 204 to 210, wherein displaying the content control user interface in the virtual environment includes: In accordance with determining that the current environment in which the media is displayed is the virtual environment, displaying the content control user interface having one or more visual indications representing the current environment in which the media is displayed and the user's current viewpoint among the plurality of available viewpoints in the virtual environment; And In accordance with determining that the current environment in which the media is displayed is the second environment different from the virtual environment, displaying the content control user interface having one or more visual indications representing the current environment in which the media is displayed without displaying an indication of the user's current viewpoint in the second environment.

212. The method according to any one of claims 194 to 211, wherein displaying the media at the first position in the virtual environment from the second viewpoint in response to receiving the first input comprises: Display an animated transition from displaying the media from the first viewpoint at the first position in the virtual environment to displaying the media from the second viewpoint at the first position in the virtual environment, wherein the animated transition includes gradually changing the current viewpoint from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint.

213. The method according to claim 212, wherein gradually changing the current viewpoint from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint includes non-linearly changing the current viewpoint from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint.

214. The method according to any one of claims 194 to 213, wherein displaying the media at the first position in the virtual environment from the second viewpoint in response to receiving the first input comprises: Maintain playback of the media in the virtual environment while changing the user's current viewpoint from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint.

215. The method according to any one of claims 194 to 214, wherein displaying the media at the first position in the virtual environment from the second viewpoint in response to receiving the first input comprises: Maintain display of the virtual environment while changing the user's current viewpoint from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint.

216. A computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; And One or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: Displaying media at a first position in a virtual environment from a current viewpoint of a user of the computer system via the display generation component, wherein the current viewpoint of the user is a first viewpoint among a plurality of available viewpoints associated with the virtual environment, and the first viewpoint has a first spatial arrangement relative to the media in the virtual environment; Receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a selection of a second viewpoint in the three-dimensional environment when the media is displayed from the first viewpoint among the plurality of available viewpoints, wherein the second viewpoint has a second spatial arrangement relative to the media in the virtual environment; And In response to receiving the first input, displaying the media at the first position in the virtual environment from the second viewpoint among the plurality of available viewpoints via the display generation component.

217. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform a method including: Displaying media at a first position in a virtual environment from a current viewpoint of a user of the computer system via the display generation component, wherein the current viewpoint of the user is a first viewpoint among a plurality of available viewpoints associated with the virtual environment, and the first viewpoint has a first spatial arrangement relative to the media in the virtual environment; Receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a selection of a second viewpoint in the three-dimensional environment when the media is displayed from the first viewpoint among the plurality of available viewpoints, wherein the second viewpoint has a second spatial arrangement relative to the media in the virtual environment; And In response to receiving the first input, displaying the media at the first position in the virtual environment from the second viewpoint among the plurality of available viewpoints via the display generation component.

218. A computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; Means for: displaying media at a first position in a virtual environment from a current viewpoint of a user of the computer system via the display generation component, wherein the current viewpoint of the user is a first viewpoint among a plurality of available viewpoints associated with the virtual environment, and the first viewpoint has a first spatial arrangement relative to the media in the virtual environment; Apparatus for: when displaying the media from the first viewpoint among the plurality of available viewpoints, receiving a first input corresponding to the selection of a second viewpoint in the three-dimensional environment via the one or more input devices, wherein the second viewpoint has a second spatial arrangement relative to the media in the virtual environment; and Apparatus for: in response to receiving the first input, displaying the media at the first position in the virtual environment from the second viewpoint among the plurality of available viewpoints via the display generating component.

219. A computer system, the computer system communicating with a display generating component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; and One or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method according to any one of claims 194 to 215.

220. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system communicating with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform the method according to any one of claims 194 to 215.

221. A computer system, the computer system communicating with a display generating component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; and Apparatus for performing the method according to any one of claims 194 to 215.

222. The method according to any one of claims 55 to 69, wherein: The view of the three-dimensional environment visible via the display generating component when receiving the first user input is a first view corresponding to the first viewpoint of the user, and includes a first portion of the three-dimensional environment visible via the display generating component at a first position in the first view that is different from the corresponding media content, and the method includes: In response to receiving the first user input: Reducing the visual salience of the first portion of the three-dimensional environment visible via the display generating component at the first position in the first view; and After reducing the visual salience of the first portion of the three-dimensional environment visible via the display generating component at the first position in the first view, presenting, via the display generating component, a second portion of the three-dimensional environment that is different from the first portion and different from the corresponding media content at the first position in a second view of the three-dimensional environment corresponding to a second viewpoint of the user different from the first viewpoint, wherein: The first position in the second view of the three-dimensional environment is the same as the first position in the first view of the three-dimensional environment.

223. A method, the method comprising: At a first computer system in communication with one or more input devices and a display generation component: When a first three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generation component, detect a first event via the one or more input devices; And In response to detecting the first event: Based on determining that the first event meets one or more first criteria, including a first criterion met when the first event includes initiating the first communication session between a user of the first computer system and a participant different from the user in the first communication session, and a second criterion met when the first communication session is associated with a second three-dimensional environment different from the first three-dimensional environment: Stop the visibility of the first three-dimensional environment via the display generation component; and Initiate a process of displaying the second three-dimensional environment via the display generation component, wherein when the user's viewpoint changes, the appearance of the part of the second three-dimensional environment visible to the user changes for the user; And Based on determining that the first event does not meet the one or more first criteria, maintain the visibility of the first three-dimensional environment via the display generation component.

224. The method according to claim 223, wherein initiating the process of displaying the second three-dimensional environment includes sharing the second three-dimensional environment with the participant and includes displaying a visual representation of the participant in the second three-dimensional environment via the display generation component.

225. The method according to any one of claims 223 to 224, wherein the second three-dimensional environment is displayed in conjunction with the start of the first communication.

226. The method according to any one of claims 223 to 225, the method further comprising: When the first three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generation component, detect a second event different from the first event via the one or more input devices; And In response to detecting the second event: Based on determining that the second event meets one or more second criteria different from the one or more first criteria, including a criterion met when the second event includes detecting an indication that a second participant has joined the first communication session: Stop the visibility of the first three-dimensional environment via the display generation component; And Initiate a process of displaying a third three-dimensional environment different from the first three-dimensional environment via the display generation component, wherein when the user's viewpoint changes, the appearance of the part of the third three-dimensional environment visible to the user changes for the user; And Based on determining that the second event does not meet the one or more second criteria, Maintain the visibility of the first three-dimensional environment via the display generation component.

227. The method according to any one of claims 223 to 226, the method further comprising: When the first three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generation component, detect a second event different from the first event via the one or more input devices; And In response to detecting the second event, and based on determining that the second event is an event that will cause a change in the three-dimensional environment visible via the display generating component, before initiating the change in the three-dimensional environment visible via the display generating component, display a visual indication via the display generating component indicating the change in the three-dimensional environment visible via the display generating component.

228. The method according to claim 227, wherein the change in the three-dimensional environment visible via the display generating component includes a change from the first three-dimensional environment being visible via the display generating component to the second three-dimensional environment being visible via the display generating component.

229. The method according to any one of claims 227 to 228, wherein the change in the three-dimensional environment visible via the display generating component includes changing the time-of-day setting for the three-dimensional environment.

230. The method according to any one of claims 227 to 228, wherein the visual indication includes the identification of the corresponding participant of the first communication session that initiated the change in the three-dimensional environment visible via the display generating component.

231. The method according to any one of claims 223 to 230, wherein the process of displaying the second three-dimensional environment includes displaying, via the display generating component, a visual indication associated with the change in the currently visible three-dimensional environment, and the method further includes: In response to detecting the first event, and based on the determination that the first event does not meet the one or more first criteria and the first event meets one or more second criteria different from the one or more first criteria, including criteria met when the first event includes a request to share the first three-dimensional environment in the first communication session, abandon the display of the visual indication associated with the change in the currently visible three-dimensional environment.

232. The method according to any one of claims 223 to 231, the method further includes: In response to detecting the first event, and based on the determination that the first event does not meet the one or more first criteria, and meets one or more second criteria different from the one or more first criteria, including criteria met when the second event corresponds to a request by the participant to display a third three-dimensional environment in the first communication session: Stop the visibility of the first three-dimensional environment via the display generating component; And Initiate a process of displaying the third three-dimensional environment via the display generating component, wherein when the viewpoint of the user changes, the appearance of the part of the third three-dimensional environment visible to the user changes for the user.

233. The method according to any one of claims 223 to 232, the method further includes: When the first three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generating component, detect, via the one or more input devices, a second event different from the first event; And In response to detecting the second event and based on determining that the second event includes a request to change the corresponding three-dimensional environment displayed in the first communication session, display information via the generating component, the information notifying the user of the first computer system that the corresponding three-dimensional environment displayed at the second computer system associated with the participant will change.

234. The method according to any one of claims 223 to 233, the method further comprising: When the first three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generating component and when the user of the first computer system is in the first communication session with the participant, detect, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request to display one or more visual representations of one or more three-dimensional environments that can be shared with the participant of the first communication session; And In response to receiving the first input, display, via the display generating component, a three-dimensional environment selection user interface, the three-dimensional environment selection user interface including visual indications indicating which three-dimensional environments can be shared with the participant of the first communication session.

235. The method according to any one of claims 223 to 234, wherein the three-dimensional environment selection user interface includes a representation of the corresponding three-dimensional environment, and wherein: Based on determining that the corresponding three-dimensional environment is available for the participant in the first communication session, the representation of the corresponding three-dimensional environment can be selected to initiate a process of sharing the corresponding three-dimensional environment with the first communication session; and Based on determining that the corresponding three-dimensional environment is not available for one or more participants in the first communication session, the representation of the corresponding three-dimensional environment cannot be selected to initiate the process of sharing the corresponding three-dimensional environment with the first communication session.

236. The method according to any one of claims 223 to 235, wherein: The first event includes detecting a request to initiate the first communication session received from a second computer system different from the first computer system and associated with the participant, and When the request to initiate the first communication session is detected, the second three-dimensional environment corresponds to the corresponding three-dimensional environment displayed at the second computer system.

237. The method according to any one of claims 223 to 236, the method further comprising: When the first three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generating component, detect, via the one or more input devices, a second event different from the first event, wherein the second event includes a first participant joining the first communication session and a second participant joining the first communication session; And In response to detecting the second event: Based on determining that the first participant joined the first communication session before the second participant and the corresponding computer system associated with the first participant is associated with a first corresponding three-dimensional environment, display, via the display generating component, a third three-dimensional environment corresponding to the first corresponding three-dimensional environment in the first communication session; and Based on determining that the second participant joined the first communication session before the first participant, and that the corresponding computer system associated with the second participant is associated with a second corresponding three-dimensional environment, display, via the display generating component, a fourth three-dimensional environment corresponding to the second corresponding three-dimensional environment in the first communication session.

238. The method according to any one of claims 223 to 237, wherein the one or more first criteria include a third criterion that is satisfied when all participants in the first communication session have access to the second three-dimensional environment.

239. The method according to claim 238, the method further comprising: In response to detecting the first event, and based on the determination that the one or more first criteria are not satisfied: Based on determining that one or more second criteria are satisfied, including criteria that are satisfied when all participants in the first communication session do not have access to the second three-dimensional environment, initiate a process of displaying, via the display generating component, a third three-dimensional environment that is different from the first three-dimensional environment and the second three-dimensional environment, wherein the third three-dimensional environment is a default three-dimensional environment that is available for all of the participants in the first communication session.

240. The method according to claim 239, wherein the process of displaying the third three-dimensional environment includes displaying information that indicates that the third three-dimensional environment will be displayed in the first communication session.

241. The method according to any one of claims 223 to 240, wherein the one or more first criteria comprise: Criteria that are satisfied when the participant initiated the first communication session with the user of the first computer system; Criteria that are satisfied when the second three-dimensional environment was being displayed by a second computer system associated with the participant in the first communication session when the participant initiated the first communication session with the user; And criteria that are satisfied when all participants in the first communication session have access to the second three-dimensional environment, the method further comprising: In response to detecting the first event: Based on the determination that the first event does not satisfy the one or more first criteria, and based on determining that the first event satisfies one or more second criteria, including criteria that are satisfied when the second three-dimensional environment is not available for one or more participants in the first communication session: Stop the visibility of the first three-dimensional environment via the display generating component; And Initiate a process of displaying, via the display generating component, a third three-dimensional environment that is different from the first three-dimensional environment and the second three-dimensional environment, wherein when the viewpoint of the user changes, the appearance of the portion of the third three-dimensional environment that is visible to the user changes for the user, and wherein the third three-dimensional environment is a default three-dimensional environment that is available for all participants in the first communication session.

242. The method according to any one of claims 223 to 241, wherein After detecting the first event and based on the determination that the first event satisfies the one or more first criteria: The second three-dimensional environment is displayed at a first immersion level, and In a view of the first communication session from the perspective of the participant, which includes a corresponding three-dimensional environment, the corresponding three-dimensional environment is displayed at a second immersion level different from the first immersion level.

243. The method according to any one of claims 223 to 242, wherein before detecting the first event, the first three-dimensional environment is visible at a first immersion level, and In response to detecting the first event and based on the determination that the one or more first criteria are met, the process of displaying the second three-dimensional environment includes displaying the second three-dimensional environment at a second immersion level different from the first immersion level, wherein the second immersion level is a default immersion level.

244. The method according to any one of claims 223 to 243, wherein: Before detecting the first event, the first three-dimensional environment has a first immersion level, and The process of displaying the second three-dimensional environment includes: Displaying the second three-dimensional environment at the second immersion level based on the determination that shared content is being displayed in the first communication session and the shared content requires a second immersion level greater than the first immersion level, and Displaying the second three-dimensional environment at the first immersion level based on the determination that the shared content requiring the second immersion level is not being displayed in the first communication session.

245. The method according to any one of claims 223 to 244, wherein displaying the second three-dimensional environment comprises: Display the second three-dimensional environment with a first visual appearance, the first visual appearance being based on a simulated time-of-day setting corresponding to a simulated time-of-day setting of a corresponding three-dimensional environment displayed at a second computer system associated with the participant in the first communication session.

246. The method according to claim 245, the method further comprising: When displaying the second three-dimensional environment with the first visual appearance, obtaining information corresponding to a request from the participant to modify the simulated time-of-day setting of the corresponding three-dimensional environment; And In response to obtaining the information corresponding to the request from the participant to modify the simulated time-of-day setting of the corresponding three-dimensional environment, changing the visual appearance of the second three-dimensional environment to a second visual appearance different from the first visual appearance corresponding to the modified simulated time-of-day setting.

247. The method according to claim 246, wherein the request from the participant to modify the simulated time-of-day setting of the corresponding three-dimensional environment corresponds to an explicit input for changing the time-of-day setting.

248. The method according to any one of claims 246 to 247, wherein the request from the participant to modify the simulated time-of-day setting of the corresponding three-dimensional environment corresponds to a request to modify the display of media content within the corresponding three-dimensional environment.

249. The method according to any one of claims 223 to 248, the method further comprising: When displaying the second three-dimensional environment, detect, via the one or more input devices, a second event different from the first event, including a request to modify the second three-dimensional environment based on a modification of virtual content displayed within the second three-dimensional environment; and In response to detecting the second event: Initiate a process to modify a corresponding three-dimensional environment displayed at a second computer system associated with the participant based on the modification of the virtual content displayed within the second three-dimensional environment, according to a determination that the virtual content is shared virtual content of the first communication session; and Abstain from initiating the process to modify the corresponding three-dimensional environment displayed at the second computer system, according to a determination that the virtual content is private virtual content.

250. The method according to claim 249, the method further comprising: When displaying the private virtual content, obtain information that a corresponding three-dimensional environment shared in the first communication session has been modified; and In response to obtaining the information that the corresponding three-dimensional environment has been modified, display, via the display generating component, information associated with the modification of the corresponding three-dimensional environment.

251. A computer system, the computer system communicating with a display generating component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; and One or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: When a first three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generating component, detect a first event via the one or more input devices; and In response to detecting the first event: According to a determination that the first event meets one or more first criteria, including a first criterion met when the first event includes initiating the first communication session between a user of the first computer system and a participant different from the user in the first communication session, and a second criterion met when the first communication session is associated with a second three-dimensional environment different from the first three-dimensional environment: Stop the visibility of the first three-dimensional environment via the display generating component; and Initiate a process to display the second three-dimensional environment via the display generating component, wherein when the viewpoint of the user changes, the appearance of a visible portion of the second three-dimensional environment changes for the user; and According to a determination that the first event does not meet the one or more first criteria, Maintain the visibility of the first three-dimensional environment via the display generating component.

252. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system communicating with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform a method including the following operations: When the first three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generating component, a first event is detected via the one or more input devices; and In response to detecting the first event: Based on determining that the first event meets one or more first criteria, including a first criterion met when the first event includes initiating the first communication session between a user of the first computer system and a participant different from the user in the first communication session, and a second criterion met when the first communication session is associated with a second three-dimensional environment different from the first three-dimensional environment: Stop the visibility of the first three-dimensional environment via the display generating component; and Initiate a process of displaying the second three-dimensional environment via the display generating component, wherein when the viewpoint of the user changes, the appearance of the part of the second three-dimensional environment visible to the user changes for the user; And Based on determining that the first event does not meet the one or more first criteria, Maintain the visibility of the first three-dimensional environment via the display generating component.

253. A computer system that communicates with a display generating component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; Means for: when a first three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generating component, detecting a first event via the one or more input devices; And Means for: in response to detecting the first event: Based on determining that the first event meets one or more first criteria, including a first criterion met when the first event includes initiating the first communication session between a user of the first computer system and a participant different from the user in the first communication session, and a second criterion met when the first communication session is associated with a second three-dimensional environment different from the first three-dimensional environment: Stop the visibility of the first three-dimensional environment via the display generating component; and Initiate a process of displaying the second three-dimensional environment via the display generating component, wherein when the viewpoint of the user changes, the appearance of the part of the second three-dimensional environment visible to the user changes for the user; And Based on determining that the first event does not meet the one or more first criteria, Maintain the visibility of the first three-dimensional environment via the display generating component.

254. A computer system that communicates with a display generating component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; And One or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method according to any one of claims 223 to 250.

255. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system that communicates with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform the method according to any one of claims 223 to 250.

256. A computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; And Means for performing the method according to any one of claims 223 to 250.

257. A method, the method comprising: At a first computer system that communicates with one or more input devices and a display generation component: When a first user of the first computer system is in the communication session with a corresponding participant other than the first user in the communication session, and when a first three-dimensional environment associated with the first user in the communication session is visible via the display generation component: Based on determining that the communication session meets a set of one or more criteria, where the set of one or more criteria includes a requirement to display corresponding media content in the three-dimensional environment that meets a second set of one or more criteria in order to meet the set of one or more criteria: In the view of the communication session obtained from the perspective of the first user: The viewpoint of the first user has a first pose in the first three-dimensional environment relative to the position of the corresponding media content in the first three-dimensional environment; and The representation of the corresponding participant has a second pose in the first three-dimensional environment relative to the position of the corresponding media content in the first three-dimensional environment, and the second pose in the first three-dimensional environment is different from the first pose in the first three-dimensional environment; and In the view of the communication session including a second three-dimensional environment obtained from the perspective of the corresponding participant, the viewpoint of the corresponding participant has a first pose in the second three-dimensional environment relative to the position of the corresponding media content in the second three-dimensional environment, where the first pose in the second three-dimensional environment is different from the second pose in the first three-dimensional environment.

258. The method according to claim 257, wherein: The corresponding participant is a first participant, and The communication session further includes a second participant.

259. The method according to claim 258 or 3, wherein: The set of one or more criteria includes a requirement that the corresponding media content is being played back in order to meet the set of one or more criteria.

260. The method according to any one of claims 257 to 259, wherein: When the first user of the first computer system is in the communication session with the corresponding participant other than the first user in the communication session, and when the first three-dimensional environment associated with the first user in the communication session is visible via the display generation component: Based on determining that the communication session does not meet the set of one or more criteria: In the view of the communication session obtained from the perspective of the first user: The viewpoint of the first user has a third pose in the first three-dimensional environment relative to the position of the corresponding media content in the first three-dimensional environment; and The representation of the corresponding participant has a fourth pose in the first three-dimensional environment relative to the position of the corresponding media content in the first three-dimensional environment; and In the view of the communication session including the second three-dimensional environment obtained from the perspective of the corresponding participant, the viewpoint of the corresponding participant has the fourth pose in the second three-dimensional environment relative to the position of the corresponding media content in the second three-dimensional environment, where the fourth pose in the second three-dimensional environment and the fourth pose in the first three-dimensional environment are the same pose relative to the corresponding position of the media content.

261. The method according to claim 260, wherein: Based on the determination that the communication session does not meet the set of one or more criteria: In the view of the communication session obtained from the perspective of the first user, the fourth pose of the representation of the corresponding participant is spatially offset from a predefined viewing position of the first three-dimensional environment, and In the view of the communication session obtained from the perspective of the corresponding participant, the representation of the first user is spatially offset from a predefined viewing position of the second three-dimensional environment.

262. The method according to any one of claims 257 to 261, wherein the first three-dimensional environment and the second three-dimensional environment are the same three-dimensional environment.

263. The method according to any one of claims 257 to 262, wherein: Based on the determination that the communication session meets the set of one or more criteria: In the view of the communication session obtained from the perspective of the first user: The first pose relative to the position of the corresponding media content in the first three-dimensional environment is within a threshold range of one or more poses relative to the position of the corresponding media content in the first three-dimensional environment; and In the view of the communication session including the second three-dimensional environment obtained from the perspective of the corresponding participant: The first pose relative to the position of the corresponding media content in the first three-dimensional environment is within the threshold range of one or more poses relative to the corresponding position of the media content in the second three-dimensional environment.

264. The method according to claim 263, wherein: Based on the determination that the communication session meets the set of one or more criteria: In the view of the communication session obtained from the perspective of the first user: The first pose of the viewpoint of the first user corresponds to a first viewing angle relative to the corresponding media content; and The second pose of the representation of the corresponding participant corresponds to a second viewing angle different from the first viewing angle relative to the corresponding media content.

265. The method according to any one of claims 257 to 264, wherein: When the first user of the first computer system is in the communication session with the corresponding participant other than the first user in the communication session, and when the first three-dimensional environment associated with the first user in the communication session is visible via the display generation component: Based on the determination that the communication session meets the set of one or more criteria, where the set of criteria includes the requirement that the corresponding media content displayed in the three-dimensional environment is non-immersive, in order to meet the second set of criteria, in the view of the communication session obtained from the perspective of the first user, the first three-dimensional environment includes the corresponding representation of the corresponding participant; and Based on the determination that the communication session meets a second set of one or more criteria different from the set of criteria, where the second set of one or more criteria includes the requirement that the corresponding media content displayed in the three-dimensional environment is immersive content, in order to meet the second set of one or more criteria: The view of the communication session obtained from the perspective of the first user does not include the representation of the corresponding participant; and The view of the communication session including the second three-dimensional environment obtained from the perspective of the corresponding participant does not include the representation of the first user.

266. The method according to claim 265, wherein: When the first user of the first computer system is in the communication session with the corresponding participant other than the first user in the communication session, when the first three-dimensional environment associated with the first user in the communication session is visible via the display generation component, and based on the determination that the second set of one or more criteria is met, present audio corresponding to the corresponding participant in the communication session.

267. The method according to any one of claims 257 to 266, the method comprising: When the first user of the first computer system is in the communication session with the corresponding participant other than the first user in the communication session, when the first three-dimensional environment associated with the first user in the communication session is visible via the display generation component, and based on the determination that a second set of one or more criteria is met, where the second set of one or more criteria includes the requirement that the corresponding media content, which is immersive content, is displayed in the three-dimensional environment, in order to meet the second set of one or more criteria: Detect, via the one or more input devices, an event corresponding to a change in the viewpoint of the first user; And In response to detecting the event corresponding to the change in the viewpoint of the first user: Based on the determination that the event corresponds to a change in the viewpoint from a first viewpoint to a second viewpoint, where the second viewpoint is outside a threshold viewpoint range of the first viewpoint, reset the corresponding media content in the first three-dimensional environment with respect to the second viewpoint of the first user.

268. The method according to any one of claims 257 to 267, wherein: The set of one or more criteria includes a requirement to display corresponding media content at a corresponding location for the media content in the three-dimensional environment in order to meet the set of one or more criteria. When the first user of the first computer system is in the communication session with the corresponding participant other than the first user in the communication session, when the first three-dimensional environment associated with the first user in the communication session is visible via the display generation component, and based on the determination that the set of one or more criteria is not met: In the view of the communication session obtained from the perspective of the first user: The viewpoint of the first user has a third pose in the first three-dimensional environment relative to the location of the corresponding media content in the first three-dimensional environment; and The representation of the corresponding participant has a fourth pose in the first three-dimensional environment relative to the location of the corresponding media content in the first three-dimensional environment; and In the view of the communication session including the second three-dimensional environment obtained from the perspective of the corresponding participant, the viewpoint of the corresponding participant has the fourth pose in the second three-dimensional environment relative to the location of the corresponding media content in the second three-dimensional environment, where the fourth pose in the second three-dimensional environment and the fourth pose in the first three-dimensional environment are the same pose relative to the corresponding location for the media content. And The method includes: When the first user of the first computer system is in the communication session with the corresponding participant other than the first user in the communication session, when the first three-dimensional environment associated with the first user in the communication session is visible via the display generation component, and based on the determination that the set of one or more criteria is not met: Obtain information corresponding to a request to display the corresponding media content at the corresponding location for the media content in the first three-dimensional environment; and; In response to obtaining the information corresponding to the request to display the corresponding media content at the corresponding location for the media content in the first three-dimensional environment: Meet the set of one or more criteria; and In the view of the communication session obtained from the perspective of the first user: The viewpoint of the first user has the first pose in the first three-dimensional environment relative to the location of the corresponding media content in the first three-dimensional environment; and The representation of the corresponding participant has a second pose in the first three-dimensional environment relative to the location of the corresponding media content in the first three-dimensional environment, the second pose being different from the first pose in the first three-dimensional environment; and In a view of the communication session including the second three-dimensional environment obtained from the perspective of the respective participant, the viewpoint of the respective participant has a first pose in the second three-dimensional environment relative to the position of the respective media content in the second three-dimensional environment, wherein the first pose in the second three-dimensional environment is different from the second pose in the first three-dimensional environment.

269. The method according to claim 268, the method comprising: In response to obtaining the information corresponding to the request to display the respective media content at the respective position of the media content in the first three-dimensional environment: Reducing the visual salience of the first three-dimensional environment includes reducing the visual salience of the representation of the respective participant, wherein when reducing the visual salience of the first three-dimensional environment: In the view of the communication session obtained from the perspective of the first user: The viewpoint of the first user has a third pose in the first three-dimensional environment relative to the position of the respective media content in the first three-dimensional environment; and The representation of the respective participant has a fourth pose in the first three-dimensional environment relative to the position of the respective media content in the first three-dimensional environment; and In a view of the communication session including the second three-dimensional environment obtained from the perspective of the respective participant, the viewpoint of the respective participant has the fourth pose in the second three-dimensional environment relative to the position of the respective media content in the second three-dimensional environment, wherein the fourth pose in the second three-dimensional environment and the fourth pose in the first three-dimensional environment are the same pose relative to the respective position of the media content; And After reducing the visual salience of the first three-dimensional environment, including reducing the visual salience of the representation of the respective participant having the fourth pose in the first three-dimensional environment, increasing the visual salience of the first three-dimensional environment, including increasing the visual salience of the representation of the respective participant, wherein when increasing the visual salience of the first three-dimensional environment, including increasing the visual salience of the representation of the respective participant: The set of one or more criteria is satisfied; and In the view of the communication session obtained from the perspective of the first user: The viewpoint of the first user has the first pose in the first three-dimensional environment relative to the position of the respective media content in the first three-dimensional environment; and The representation of the respective participant has a second pose in the first three-dimensional environment relative to the position of the respective media content in the first three-dimensional environment, the second pose being different from the first pose in the first three-dimensional environment; And In a view of the communication session that includes the second three-dimensional environment and is obtained from the perspective of the corresponding participant, the viewpoint of the corresponding participant has a first pose in the second three-dimensional environment relative to the position of the corresponding media content in the second three-dimensional environment, wherein the first pose in the second three-dimensional environment is different from the second pose in the first three-dimensional environment.

270. A computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; And One or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and are configured to be executed by the one or more processors, and the one or more programs include instructions for the following operations: When a first user of the first computer system is in the communication session with a corresponding participant other than the first user in the communication session, and when a first three-dimensional environment associated with the first user in the communication session is visible via the display generation component: According to determining that the communication session meets a set of one or more criteria, wherein the set of one or more criteria includes a requirement to display corresponding media content that meets a second set of one or more criteria in a three-dimensional environment so as to meet the set of one or more criteria: In a view of the communication session obtained from the perspective of the first user: The viewpoint of the first user has a first pose in the first three-dimensional environment relative to the position of the corresponding media content in the first three-dimensional environment; and The representation of the corresponding participant has a second pose in the first three-dimensional environment relative to the position of the corresponding media content in the first three-dimensional environment, and the second pose in the first three-dimensional environment is different from the first pose in the first three-dimensional environment; and In a view of the communication session that includes the second three-dimensional environment and is obtained from the perspective of the corresponding participant, the viewpoint of the corresponding participant has a first pose in the second three-dimensional environment relative to the position of the corresponding media content in the second three-dimensional environment, wherein the first pose in the second three-dimensional environment is different from the second pose in the first three-dimensional environment.

271. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform a method including the following operations: When a first user of the first computer system is in the communication session with a corresponding participant other than the first user in the communication session, and when a first three-dimensional environment associated with the first user in the communication session is visible via the display generation component: Based on determining that the communication session meets a set of one or more criteria, where the set of one or more criteria includes a requirement to display corresponding media content that meets a second set of one or more criteria in a three-dimensional environment in order to meet the set of one or more criteria: In a view of the communication session obtained from the perspective of the first user: The viewpoint of the first user has a first pose in the first three-dimensional environment relative to the position of the corresponding media content in the first three-dimensional environment; and The representation of the corresponding participant has a second pose in the first three-dimensional environment relative to the position of the corresponding media content in the first three-dimensional environment, and the second pose in the first three-dimensional environment is different from the first pose in the first three-dimensional environment; and In a view of the communication session including a second three-dimensional environment obtained from the perspective of the corresponding participant, the viewpoint of the corresponding participant has a first pose in the second three-dimensional environment relative to the position of the corresponding media content in the second three-dimensional environment, where the first pose in the second three-dimensional environment is different from the second pose in the first three-dimensional environment.

272. A computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; Memory; Means for: when a first user of the first computer system is in the communication session with a corresponding participant other than the first user in the communication session, and when a first three-dimensional environment associated with the first user in the communication session is visible via the display generation component: Based on determining that the communication session meets a set of one or more criteria, where the set of one or more criteria includes a requirement to display corresponding media content that meets a second set of one or more criteria in a three-dimensional environment in order to meet the set of one or more criteria: In a view of the communication session obtained from the perspective of the first user: The viewpoint of the first user has a first pose in the first three-dimensional environment relative to the position of the corresponding media content in the first three-dimensional environment; and The representation of the corresponding participant has a second pose in the first three-dimensional environment relative to the position of the corresponding media content in the first three-dimensional environment, and the second pose in the first three-dimensional environment is different from the first pose in the first three-dimensional environment; and In a view of the communication session including a second three-dimensional environment obtained from the perspective of the corresponding participant, the viewpoint of the corresponding participant has a first pose in the second three-dimensional environment relative to the position of the corresponding media content in the second three-dimensional environment, where the first pose in the second three-dimensional environment is different from the second pose in the first three-dimensional environment.

273. A computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; Memory; And One or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, and the one or more programs include instructions for performing the method according to any one of claims 257 to 269.

274. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform the method according to any one of claims 257 to 269.

275. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; Memory; And Means for performing the method according to any one of claims 257 to 269.

276. A method, the method comprising: At a computer system in communication with one or more input devices and a display generation component: Receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request by a user of the computer system to join a communication session, the communication session including first shared content accessible by one or more participants other than the user of the computer system in the communication session; And In response to receiving the first input, joining the communication session, including: Displaying, in the three-dimensional environment and via the display generation component, first one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session according to determining that a first set of one or more criteria is satisfied, wherein the first set of one or more criteria includes a requirement that a first parameter of the first shared content has a first value so as to satisfy the first set of one or more criteria; And Displaying, in the three-dimensional environment and via the display generation component, second one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session according to determining that a second set of one or more criteria is satisfied, wherein the one or more criteria includes a requirement that the first parameter of the first shared content has a second value different from the first value so as to satisfy the second set of one or more criteria, wherein the second one or more representations are different from the first one or more representations.

277. The method according to claim 276, wherein the first value of the first parameter of the first shared content indicates that the first shared content includes an application window, and wherein the method includes: In response to receiving the first input, joining the communication session, including: Presenting third one or more representations of the one or more participants without displaying representations of the one or more participants in the three-dimensional environment according to determining that a third set of one or more criteria is satisfied, wherein the third set of one or more criteria includes a requirement that the first parameter of the first shared content has a third value so as to satisfy the third set of one or more criteria, wherein the third value indicates that the first shared content is immersive content.

278. The method according to claim 276 or 277, wherein: the first value of the first parameter of the first shared content indicates that the computer system has the right to view the first shared content, the first one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session include a first representation of a first participant among the one or more participants with a first amount of visual detail, the second value of the first parameter of the first shared content indicates that the computer system has no right to view the first shared content, and the second one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session include a second representation of the first participant among the one or more participants with a second amount of visual detail, the second amount of visual detail being less than the first amount of visual detail.

279. The method according to claim 278, wherein: the first representation of the first participant among the one or more participants includes a first visual element having an appearance of a representation of a head corresponding to the first participant and / or a second visual element having an appearance of a representation of a hand corresponding to the first participant.

280. The method according to claim 278 or 279, wherein: the first visual element having an appearance of the representation of the head corresponding to the first participant moves relative to the second visual element having an appearance of the representation of the hand corresponding to the first participant.

281. The method according to any one of claims 278 to 280, wherein: the second representation of the first participant among the one or more participants in the communication session does not include a visual element having an appearance of a representation of a head corresponding to the first participant and / or a visual element having an appearance of a representation of a hand corresponding to the first participant.

282. The method according to any one of claims 278 to 281, wherein: the second representation of the first participant among the one or more participants in the communication session is a representation of a geometric shape or a combination of letters.

283. The method according to any one of claims 276 to 282, wherein: the first one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session include a first representation of a first participant among the one or more participants with a first amount of visual detail, the second one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session include a second representation of the first participant among the one or more participants with a second amount of visual detail, the second amount of visual detail being less than the first amount of visual detail, and the second value of the first parameter of the first shared content indicates that the first shared content is displayed at a corresponding position for media content in the three-dimensional environment.

284. The method according to claim 283, the method comprising: When the first shared content is displayed at the corresponding position of the media content in the three-dimensional environment, a second input corresponding to a request to stop displaying the first shared content at the corresponding position of the media content in the three-dimensional environment is received via the one or more input devices, wherein when the second input is received, the second one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session are displayed, including the second representation of the first participant; And In response to receiving the second input via the one or more input devices: Stop displaying the first shared content at the corresponding position of the media content in the three-dimensional environment; Display the first shared content at a position different from the corresponding position of the media content in the three-dimensional environment via the display generation component in the three-dimensional environment; And Display the first one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session via the display generation component, including the first representation of the first participant among the one or more participants.

285. The method according to any one of claims 276 to 284, the method comprising: In response to receiving the first input, join the communication session, including: According to a determination that a third set of one or more criteria is satisfied, wherein the third set of one or more criteria includes a requirement that the first parameter of the first shared content has a third value different from the first value and the second value, and refrain from displaying the representations of the one or more participants in the communication session, wherein the third value indicates that the first shared content is immersive content.

286. The method according to any one of claims 276 to 285, wherein: The first one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session include a first representation of the first participant among the one or more participants having a first amount of visual detail, The second one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session include a second representation of the first participant among the one or more participants having a second amount of visual detail, the second amount of visual detail being less than the first amount of visual detail, When the first representation of the first participant among the one or more participants in the communication session is displayed as having the first amount of visual detail in the view of the communication session from the perspective of the user of the computer system: In the view of the communication session from the perspective of the first participant, the representation of the user of the computer system is displayed as having the first amount of visual detail, and When the first representation of the first participant among the one or more participants in the communication session is displayed as having the second amount of visual detail in the view of the communication session from the perspective of the user of the computer system: In a view of the communication session obtained from the perspective of the first participant, a representation of the user of the computer system is displayed with the second amount of visual detail.

287. The method according to any one of claims 276 to 286, the method comprising: When the first shared content is displayed in windows that can be positioned at a plurality of different locations within the three-dimensional environment based on user input: Meeting the one or more criteria of the first group and / or the one or more criteria of the second group, regardless of whether the computer system has the right to display the first shared content.

288. The method according to claim 287, the method comprising: In response to receiving the first input, joining the communication session, including: Based on determining that the computer system has the right to display the first shared content, displaying the first shared content in the three-dimensional environment and via the display generation component; and Based on determining that the computer system has no right to view the first shared content, displaying a representation of the location of the first shared content in the three-dimensional environment and via the display generation component, without fully displaying the first shared content, the display of the first shared content.

289. A computer system, the computer system communicating with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; And One or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: Receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request by a user of the computer system to join a communication session, the communication session including first shared content accessible by one or more participants other than the user of the computer system in the communication session; And In response to receiving the first input, joining the communication session, including: Based on determining that a first group of one or more criteria is met, wherein the first group of one or more criteria includes a requirement that a first parameter of the first shared content has a first value, in order to meet the first group of one or more criteria, displaying in the three-dimensional environment and via the display generation component one or more first representations of the one or more participants in the communication session; And Based on determining that a second group of one or more criteria is met, wherein the one or more criteria includes a requirement that the first parameter of the first shared content has a second value different from the first value, in order to meet the second group of one or more criteria, displaying in the three-dimensional environment and via the display generation component one or more second representations of the one or more participants in the communication session, wherein the one or more second representations are different from the one or more first representations.

290. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform a method including the following operations: Receiving, via the one or more input devices, first input corresponding to a request for a user of the computer system to join a communication session, the communication session including first shared content accessible by one or more participants in the communication session other than the user of the computer system; And In response to receiving the first input, join the communication session, including: Based on determining that a first set of one or more criteria is satisfied, where the first set of one or more criteria includes a requirement that a first parameter of the first shared content has a first value, in order to satisfy the first set of one or more criteria, display, in the three-dimensional environment and via the display generation component, first one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session; And Based on determining that a second set of one or more criteria is satisfied, where the one or more criteria includes a requirement that the first parameter of the first shared content has a second value different from the first value, in order to satisfy the second set of one or more criteria, display, in the three-dimensional environment and via the display generation component, second one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session, where the second one or more representations are different from the first one or more representations.

291. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system including: One or more processors; A memory; Means for: receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request by a user of the computer system to join a communication session, the communication session including first shared content accessible by one or more participants other than the user of the computer system in the communication session; And In response to receiving the first input, join the communication session, including: Based on determining that a first set of one or more criteria is satisfied, where the first set of one or more criteria includes a requirement that a first parameter of the first shared content has a first value, in order to satisfy the first set of one or more criteria, display, in the three-dimensional environment and via the display generation component, first one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session; And Based on determining that a second set of one or more criteria is satisfied, where the one or more criteria includes a requirement that the first parameter of the first shared content has a second value different from the first value, in order to satisfy the second set of one or more criteria, display, in the three-dimensional environment and via the display generation component, second one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session, where the second one or more representations are different from the first one or more representations.

292. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system including: One or more processors; A memory; And One or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, and the one or more programs include instructions for performing the method according to any one of claims 276 to 288.

293. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform the method according to any one of claims 276 to 288.

294. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; Memory; And Means for performing the method according to any one of claims 276 to 288.

295. A method, the method comprising: At a computer system in communication with one or more input devices and a display generation component: When media content is displayed in a three-dimensional environment via the display generation component, Detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request to display one or more first selectable options that can be selected to modify the appearance of the three-dimensional environment; And In response to detecting the first input, displaying, via the display generation component, the one or more first selectable options, wherein the one or more first selectable options include: A first selectable option that can be selected to initiate a process of displaying the media content in a system environment associated with the operating system of the computer system, wherein the system environment is configured to be displayed by the computer system for a variety of different types of virtual content; And A second selectable option different from the first selectable option, the Second selectable option that can be selected to initiate a process of displaying the media content in a media playback environment different from the system environment, wherein the media playback environment is restricted to being displayed by the computer system when the computer system is displaying media content.

296. The method according to claim 295, the method further comprising: When displaying the one or more first selectable options, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a selection input pointing to a corresponding one of the one or more selectable options; And In response to detecting the selection input: Displaying the media content in the system environment via the display generation component according to determining that the corresponding selectable option is the first selectable option; And Displaying the media content in the media playback environment via the display generation component according to determining that the corresponding selectable option is the second selectable option.

297. The method according to any one of claims 295 to 296, the method further comprising: Before displaying the media content in the three-dimensional environment, detect a second input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a request to display and modify one or more second selectable options associated with modifying the appearance of the three-dimensional environment; And In response to detecting the second input, and based on determining that one or more criteria are met, including criteria met when no media content is being displayed in the three-dimensional environment when the second input is detected, display, by the display generation component, one or more second selectable options that can be selected to initiate a process of modifying the visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment, excluding the corresponding selectable options that can be selected to initiate the process of displaying the media playback environment.

298. The method according to any one of claims 295 to 297, wherein the one or more first selectable options are displayed in a virtual object including the media content. The options include a light mode / dark mode option.

299. The method according to any one of claims 295 to 298, wherein: The process of displaying the media content in the system environment in response to selecting the first selectable option includes displaying the system environment with a first visual appearance corresponding to a first time setting of the day in the system environment, and The one or more first selectable items include a third selectable option different from the first selectable option and the second selectable option, the third selectable option being able to be selected to initiate a process of displaying the media content in the system environment with a second visual appearance, the second visual appearance being different from the first visual appearance and corresponding to a second time setting of the day in the system environment.

300. The method according to any one of claims 295 to 299, the method further comprising: Before detecting the first input, detect a second input different from the input via the one or more input devices, the second input corresponding to a request to display the three-dimensional environment with a first visual appearance corresponding to a first time setting of the day in the three-dimensional environment; In response to detecting the second input, display, via the display generation component, the media content in the three-dimensional environment having the first visual appearance corresponding to the first time setting of the day in the three-dimensional environment, wherein the first input is detected when the three-dimensional environment has the first visual appearance in response to detecting the second input; When the media content is being displayed in a second three-dimensional environment having a corresponding first visual appearance corresponding to the first time setting of the day in the second three-dimensional environment, detect a third input different from the first input and the second input via the one or more input devices, the third input corresponding to a request to initiate a process of displaying the second three-dimensional environment with a corresponding second visual appearance, the corresponding second visual appearance being different from the corresponding first visual appearance and corresponding to a second time setting of the day in the second three-dimensional environment; In response to detecting the third input, initiate a process of displaying the media content in the second three-dimensional environment having the corresponding second visual appearance via the display generation component; When the media content is displayed in the second three-dimensional environment having the corresponding second visual appearance, detect, via the one or more input devices, a fourth input different from the first input, the second input, and the third input, the fourth input corresponding to a request to change the display of the media content in the second three-dimensional environment; And In response to detecting the fourth input: According to determining that the third input meets one or more criteria, including criteria met when the third input points to a user interface displayed in response to an input pointing to a region corresponding to the media content in the second three-dimensional environment, display the media content in the third three-dimensional environment having a corresponding first visual appearance corresponding to the time setting of the first day of the third three-dimensional environment via the display generation component; And According to determining that the third input does not meet the one or more criteria because the third input points to a system user interface associated with controlling one or more system functions of the computer system, display the media content in the third three-dimensional environment having a corresponding second visual appearance corresponding to the time setting of the second day of the third three-dimensional environment via the display generation component.

301. The method according to claim 300, wherein the system user interface includes a visual indication of the time setting of the currently active day, and the method further includes: In response to detecting the third input that meets the one or more criteria and before detecting the fourth input, display the second three-dimensional environment with the second visual appearance, wherein displaying the media content in the second three-dimensional environment with the second visual appearance in response to the third input is performed according to determining that the third input meets the one or more criteria; And When the second three-dimensional environment is displayed with the second visual appearance, display the system user interface, the system user interface including a visual indication indicating that the time setting of the second day corresponding to the second visual appearance is currently active.

302. The method according to any one of claims 295 to 301, the method further includes: When the one or more first selectable options are displayed, detect, via the one or more input devices, a second input different from the first input, including a first selection of the first selectable option; And In response to detecting the second input, initiate the process of displaying the media content in the system environment, wherein the process includes displaying the media content at a corresponding location for the media content in the system environment.

303. The method according to claim 302, the method further includes: When displaying the one or more first selectable options and displaying the media content at the corresponding location for the media content in the system environment, detect, via the one or more input devices, a third input that is different from the first input and the second input, the third input including a second selection of the first selectable option; and In response to detecting the third input, initiate a process of displaying the media content at an updated location in the system environment that is different from the corresponding location for the media content.

304. The method according to any one of claims 295 to 303, the method further comprising: Before displaying the media content and when displaying a first system environment associated with the operating system of the computer system: Detect, via the one or more input devices, a first one or more inputs including a request to initiate the display of the media content; and In response to detecting the first one or more inputs including the request, display the media content in the first system environment.

305. The method according to any one of claims 295 to 304, the method further comprising: Before detecting the first input and when the media content is displayed in the system environment, display, via the display generation component, a system user interface associated with the operating system of the computer system, wherein the system user interface includes one or more second selectable options that are different from the one or more first selectable options, the one or more second selectable options including a third selectable option that is different from the first selectable option and the second selectable option, the third selectable option being selectable to initiate a process of displaying the media content in an alternative system environment associated with the operating system of the computer system; When displaying the one or more second selectable options including the third selectable option, detect, via the one or more input devices, a corresponding input for selecting the third selectable option; and In response to detecting the corresponding input, display the media content in the alternative system environment via the display generation component.

306. The method according to claim 305, wherein the system user interface includes a fourth selectable option that is different from the first selectable option, the second selectable option, and the third selectable option, the fourth selectable option being selectable to set the visual appearance of the visible three-dimensional environment to correspond to the time of day at the computer system, and the one or more first selectable options do not include a corresponding selectable option that is selectable to set the visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment to correspond to the time of day at the computer system.

307. The method according to any one of claims 295 to 306, the method further comprising: Detect, via the one or more input devices, a first selection input pointing to the second selectable option; and In response to detecting the first selection input, display the media content in the media playback environment via the display generation component; and When the media content is displayed in the media playback environment, display a media control user interface via the display generation component, the media control user interface including a third selectable option different from the first selectable option and the second selectable option, and the third selectable option can be selected to initiate a process of changing the spatial relationship between the user's viewing point and the media content in the media playback environment.

308. The method according to any one of claims 295 to 307, the method further comprising: When the media content is displayed in the three-dimensional environment via the display generation component before detecting the first input, detect a second input different from the first input via the one or more input devices; and In response to detecting the second input, display one or more second selectable options different from the one or more first selectable options via the display generation component, wherein the one or more second selectable options include: According to the determination that the second input is detected when the media content is not displayed at the corresponding location for the media content in the three-dimensional environment, and the media content cannot be moved from the corresponding location in the three-dimensional environment, a third selectable option that can be selected to initiate a process of displaying the corresponding three-dimensional environment; and According to the determination that the second input is detected when the media content is displayed at the corresponding location, the second one or more first selectable options do not include the third selectable option that can be selected to initiate a process of presenting one or more alternative three-dimensional environments.

309. The method according to claim 308, the method further comprising: When the media content is displayed at the corresponding location for the media content, detect a third input different from the first input and the second input via the one or more input devices, the third input corresponding to a request to stop displaying the media content at the corresponding location for the media content; In response to the third input, display the media content at an updated location in the three-dimensional environment via the display generation component; When the media content is displayed at the updated location, detect a fourth input different from the first input, the second input, and the third input via the one or more input devices, the fourth input corresponding to a request to display the one or more first selectable options that can be selected to modify the appearance of the three-dimensional environment; and In response to detecting the fourth input, display the one or more second selectable options including the third selectable option via the display generation component.

310. The method according to any one of claims 295 to 309, the method further comprising: When displaying the media content in the system environment, a second input different from the first input is detected via the one or more input devices, and the second input corresponds to a request to modify the immersion level of the system environment; In response to detecting the second input, modify the immersion level of the system environment according to the second input; When displaying the media content in the media playback environment, a third input different from the first input and the second input is detected via the one or more input devices, and the third input corresponds to a request to modify the immersion level of the media playback environment; And In response to detecting the third input, abandon the modification of the immersion level of the media playback environment according to the second input.

311. The method according to any one of claims 295 to 310, the method further comprising: When displaying the media content at a corresponding location for the media content in a corresponding three-dimensional environment, a second input different from the first input is detected via the one or more input devices, and the second input corresponds to a request to display a main user interface associated with the computer system; In response to detecting the second input, stop displaying the media content and the corresponding three-dimensional environment, and display the main user interface including corresponding selectable options associated with a plurality of system environments via the display generation component; When the corresponding selectable options are displayed in the main user interface, a third input different from the first input and the second input is detected via the one or more input devices, and the third input corresponds to a selection of the corresponding selectable options; And In response to detecting the third input, display a plurality of selectable representations corresponding to the plurality of system environments via the display generation component, and the plurality of selectable representations can be selected to initiate a process of displaying the media content in a corresponding system environment, wherein when the media content is displayed at the corresponding location for the media content in the corresponding three-dimensional environment, the process of displaying the media content in the system environment cannot be initiated.

312. The method according to any one of claims 295 to 311, the method further comprising: When displaying the media content in the system environment, wherein the system environment is displayed at a corresponding immersion level, a second one or more inputs different from the first input are detected via the one or more input devices, including a request to display the media playback environment; In response to detecting the second one or more inputs: Stop displaying the system environment; and Initiate a display of the media playback environment including the media content at a first immersion level different from the corresponding immersion level; When displaying the media playback environment including the media content at the first immersion level, a third one or more inputs different from the first input and the second one or more inputs are detected via the one or more input devices, including a request to display the system environment; AndIn response to the third one or more inputs: ​ In response to determining that the corresponding immersion level is the second immersion level, display the system environment including the media content at the second immersion level via the display generation component; and In response to determining that the corresponding immersion level is a third immersion level different from the second immersion level, display the system environment including the media content at the third immersion level via the display generation component.

313. The method according to any one of claims 295 to 312, the method further comprising: When displaying the first one or more first selectable options and displaying the media content at a location in the three-dimensional environment other than the corresponding location of the media content in the three-dimensional environment, detect, via the one or more input devices, a second input different from the first input, the second input corresponding to a selection of the second selectable option, wherein the process of displaying the media content in the media playback environment includes displaying the media content at the corresponding location of the media content in the media playback environment.

314. The method according to any one of claims 295 to 313, the method further comprising: When displaying the media content in the three-dimensional environment having a visual appearance corresponding to a first time-of-day setting for the three-dimensional environment: Detect, via the one or more input devices, a second input different from the first input; In response to detecting the second input, display, via the display generation component, a system user interface associated with an operating system of the computer system, wherein the system user interface includes one or more second selectable options different from the one or more first selectable options, the one or more second selectable options including a third selectable option different from the first selectable option and the second selectable option, the third selectable option being selectable to initiate a process of changing a time-of-day setting of the three-dimensional environment from the first time-of-day setting to a second time-of-day setting different from the first time-of-day setting; When displaying the second one or more first selectable options including the third selectable option, detect, via the one or more input devices, a third input different from the first input and the second input that points to the third selectable option; and In response to detecting the third input, change the visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment to correspond to a second time-of-day setting different from the first time-of-day setting.

315. The method according to claim 314, wherein the second input includes an air gesture associated with a system function of the computer system.

316. The method according to any one of claims 314 to 315, wherein when the system user interface is displayed, the third selectable option is displayed in the system user interface without additional user input.

317. The method according to any one of claims 314 to 316, wherein the system user interface includes a control element corresponding to environmental audio volume control of the three-dimensional environment, and the method further includes: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a third input different from the first input and the second input, the third input pointing to the control element and corresponding to a request to change the environmental audio volume level of the three-dimensional environment; and in response to detecting the third input, changing the environmental audio volume level of the three-dimensional environment from a first level to a second level without changing the audio volume of the media content.

318. The method according to any one of claims 314 to 317, wherein the system user interface includes a control element corresponding to system audio volume control of the three-dimensional environment, and the method further includes: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a third input different from the first input and the second input, the third input pointing to the control element and corresponding to a request to change the level of the system audio volume; and in response to detecting the third input, changing the environmental audio volume level of the three-dimensional environment from a first level to a second level and changing the audio volume of the media content from a third level to a fourth level.

319. A computer system, the computer system communicating with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system including: one or more processors; a memory; and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: when displaying media content in a three-dimensional environment via the display generation component, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request to display one or more first selectable options that can be selected to modify the appearance of the three-dimensional environment; and in response to detecting the first input, displaying, via the display generation component, the one or more first selectable options, wherein the one or more first selectable options include: a first selectable option that can be selected to initiate a process of displaying the media content in a system environment associated with the operating system of the computer system, wherein the system environment is configured to be displayed by the computer system for a variety of different types of virtual content; and a second selectable option different from the first selectable option, the second selectable option that can be selected to initiate a process of displaying the media content in a media playback environment different from the system environment, wherein the media playback environment is restricted to being displayed by the computer system when the computer system is displaying media content.

320. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform a method including the following operations: When displaying media content in a three-dimensional environment via the display generation component, detect a first input corresponding to a request to display, via the one or more input devices, one or more first selectable options that can be selected to modify the appearance of the three-dimensional environment; And In response to detecting the first input, display, via the display generation component, the one or more first selectable options, wherein the one or more first selectable options include: A first selectable option that can be selected to initiate a process of displaying the media content in a system environment associated with the operating system of the computer system, wherein the system environment is configured to be displayed by the computer system for a variety of different types of virtual content; And A second selectable option different from the first selectable option that can be selected to initiate a process of displaying the media content in a media playback environment different from the system environment, wherein the media playback environment is restricted to be displayed by the computer system when the computer system is displaying media content.

321. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system including: One or more processors; A memory; Means for: when displaying media content in a three-dimensional environment via the display generation component, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request to display one or more first selectable options that can be selected to modify the appearance of the three-dimensional environment; And Means for: in response to detecting the first input, displaying, via the display generation component, the one or more first selectable options, wherein the one or more first selectable options include: A first selectable option that can be selected to initiate a process of displaying the media content in a system environment associated with the operating system of the computer system, wherein the system environment is configured to be displayed by the computer system for a variety of different types of virtual content; And A second selectable option different from the first selectable option that can be selected to initiate a process of displaying the media content in a media playback environment different from the system environment, wherein the media playback environment is restricted to be displayed by the computer system when the computer system is displaying media content.

322. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system including: One or more processors; A memory; And One or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method according to any one of claims 295 to 318.

323. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform the method according to any one of claims 295 to 318.

324. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; a memory; and means for performing the method according to any one of claims 295 to 318.

325. A method comprising: at a computer system in communication with one or more input devices and a display generation component: displaying, via the display generation component, a three-dimensional environment including content in a first presentation mode, wherein when the three-dimensional environment including the content is displayed: an environment mode for controlling a visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment external to the content is a corresponding environment mode, and the three-dimensional environment external to the content has a corresponding visual appearance based on the corresponding environment mode; when the three-dimensional environment external to the content having the corresponding visual appearance based on the corresponding environment mode is displayed via the display generation component in the corresponding environment mode, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first input for displaying the content in a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode; and in response to detecting the first input via the one or more input devices: displaying, via the display generation component, the content in a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode; displaying, via the display generation component, the three-dimensional environment including the content, based on determining that the corresponding environment mode is a first environment mode and the corresponding visual appearance is a first visual appearance when the first input is detected, wherein when the three-dimensional environment including the content is displayed, the three-dimensional environment external to the content is displayed with a second visual appearance different from the first visual appearance based on the first environment mode; and continuing to display, via the display generation component, the three-dimensional environment including the content, based on determining that the corresponding environment mode is a second environment mode different from the first environment mode and the corresponding visual appearance is the first visual appearance when the first input is detected, wherein when the three-dimensional environment including the content is displayed, the three-dimensional environment external to the content is displayed with the first visual appearance.

326. The method according to claim 325, the method comprising: in response to detecting the first input via the one or more input devices: Continuing to display the three-dimensional environment including the content via the display generating component based on determining that when the first input is detected, the corresponding environmental mode is a third environmental mode different from the first environmental mode and the second environmental mode, and the corresponding visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment outside the content is the second visual appearance, wherein the three-dimensional environment outside the content has the second visual appearance.

327. The method according to claim 325 or 326, the method comprising: In response to detecting the first input via the one or more input devices: Continuing to display the three-dimensional environment including the content via the display generating component based on determining that when the first input is detected, the corresponding environmental mode is the first environmental mode and the corresponding visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment outside the content is the second visual appearance, wherein the three-dimensional environment outside the content has the second visual appearance.

328. The method according to any one of claims 325 to 327, the method comprising: In response to detecting the first input via the one or more input devices: Based on determining that the corresponding visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment outside the content is the first visual appearance and the mode for reducing the visual salience of the three-dimensional environment outside the content is active: Reducing the visual salience of the first visual appearance for displaying the three-dimensional environment outside the content; And Based on determining that the corresponding visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment outside the content is the second visual appearance, refraining from reducing the visual salience of the second visual appearance for displaying the three-dimensional environment outside the content.

329. The method according to any one of claims 325 to 328, wherein: When displaying the three-dimensional environment including the content: Based on determining that when the corresponding environmental mode is the first environmental mode, the time of day at the computer system is a first time of day, the corresponding visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment outside the content is the first visual appearance; And Based on determining that when the corresponding environmental mode is the first environmental mode, the time of day at the computer system is a second time of day different from the first time of day, the corresponding visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment outside the content is the second visual appearance.

330. The method according to any one of claims 325 to 329, the method comprising: In response to detecting the first input via the one or more input devices: Based on determining that the corresponding visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment outside the content is the first visual appearance and based on determining that the mode for reducing the visual salience of the first visual appearance for displaying the three-dimensional environment outside the content is active, reducing the visual salience of the first visual appearance for displaying the three-dimensional environment outside the content.

331. The method according to claim 330, wherein the mode for reducing the visual salience of the first visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment outside the content being displayed is active, and wherein the method further comprises: displaying a user interface element that can be selected to change the activation state of the mode for reducing the visual salience of the first visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment outside the content being displayed; when the user interface element is displayed, detecting an input pointing to the user interface element via the one or more input devices, the user interface element being able to be selected to change the activation state of the mode for reducing the visual salience of the first visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment outside the content being displayed; and in response to detecting the input pointing to the user interface element via the one or more input devices, changing the activation state of the mode for reducing the visual salience of the first visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment outside the content being displayed.

332. The method according to any one of claims 325 to 331, wherein the second presentation mode comprises playback of the content.

333. The method according to any one of claims 325 to 332, wherein the second presentation mode comprises presenting the content at a corresponding location in the three-dimensional environment for media content.

334. The method according to any one of claims 325 to 333, wherein the first input for displaying the content in the second presentation mode comprises the user's attention being directed to the content displayed in the first presentation mode.

335. The method according to any one of claims 325 to 334, wherein: when the content is displayed in the first presentation mode: the content has a first size and / or visual salience in the three-dimensional environment, and the three-dimensional environment outside the content has a first amount of visual salience, and when the content is displayed in the second presentation mode: the content has a second size and / or visual salience in the three-dimensional environment, the second size and / or visual salience being greater than the first size and / or visual salience when the content is displayed in the first presentation mode, and the three-dimensional environment outside the content has a second amount of visual salience, the second amount of visual salience being less than the first amount of visual salience that the three-dimensional environment outside the content has when the content is displayed in the first presentation mode.

336. The method according to any one of claims 325 to 335, the method comprising: when the environment mode is the corresponding environment mode: detecting a second input for displaying a system user interface associated with the operating system of the computer system via the one or more input devices; In response to detecting the second input for displaying the system user interface associated with the operating system of the computer system, display, via the display generating component, the system user interface associated with the operating system of the computer system, wherein the system user interface includes one or more first selectable options, and the one or more first selectable options include a first selectable option that can be selected to initiate a process of changing the environmental mode from the corresponding environmental mode to an environmental mode different from the corresponding environmental mode; When displaying the one or more first selectable options including the first selectable option, detect, via the one or more input devices, a third input requesting to change the environmental mode from the corresponding environmental mode to the environmental mode different from the corresponding environmental mode; And In response to detecting the third input requesting to change the environmental mode from the corresponding environmental mode to the environmental mode different from the corresponding environmental mode, initiate the process of changing the environmental mode from the corresponding environmental mode to the environmental mode different from the corresponding environmental mode.

337. The method according to claim 336, wherein the system user interface is displayed in response to detecting the user's attention directed to a corresponding portion of the viewport being used to view the three-dimensional environment.

338. The method according to claim 336 or 337, the method comprising: When displaying a first user interface of a first application, detect, via the one or more input devices, a third input for displaying the system user interface associated with the operating system of the computer system; In response to detecting, when displaying the first user interface of the first application, the third input for displaying the system user interface associated with the operating system of the computer system via the one or more input devices, display, via the display generating component, the system user interface associated with the operating system of the computer system; When displaying a first user interface of a second application different from the first application, detect, via the one or more input devices, a fourth input for displaying the system user interface associated with the operating system of the computer system; And In response to detecting, when displaying the first user interface of the second application, the fourth input for displaying the system user interface associated with the operating system of the computer system via the one or more input devices, display, via the display generating component, the system user interface associated with the operating system of the computer system.

339. The method according to any one of claims 325 to 338, wherein the three-dimensional environment includes a portion different from the content, and the method includes: When displaying the three-dimensional environment including the content, detect, via the one or more input devices, an input corresponding to a request to display a system user interface associated with an operating system of the computer system, the system user interface including at least a control element for controlling an ambient audio volume level corresponding to a portion of the three-dimensional environment; In response to detecting the input corresponding to the request to display the system user interface associated with the operating system of the computer system, display, via the display generating component, the system user interface, the system user interface including at least displaying the control element for controlling the ambient audio volume level corresponding to a portion of the three-dimensional environment; Detect, via the one or more input devices, an input corresponding to a request to change a level of an ambient audio volume level corresponding to a portion of the three-dimensional environment; And In response to detecting the input corresponding to the request to change the level of the ambient audio volume level corresponding to a portion of the three-dimensional environment, change the ambient audio volume level corresponding to a portion of the three-dimensional environment from a first level to a second level different from the first level without changing an audio volume level of the content.

340. The method according to any one of claims 325 to 339, the method comprising: When displaying the three-dimensional environment external to the content in the second environmental mode with the first visual appearance: Receive, via the one or more input devices, an input corresponding to a request to change an environmental mode for displaying the three-dimensional environment external to the content from the second environmental mode to the first environmental mode; And In response to receiving the input corresponding to the request to change the environmental mode for displaying the three-dimensional environment external to the content from the second environmental mode to the first environmental mode: Before displaying the three-dimensional environment external to the content in the second visual appearance and based on determining that the computer system meets one or more criteria, where the one or more criteria are met when the computer system is in the first environmental mode and displaying the three-dimensional environment needs to display the three-dimensional environment in the second visual appearance in response to receiving the input corresponding to the selection of the first environmental mode, present a notification indicating that the three-dimensional environment external to the content will be displayed in the second visual appearance.

341. The method according to any one of claims 325 to 340, the method comprising: When displaying the content in the second presentation mode: Display, via the display generating component, the content in the three-dimensional environment with an analog self-luminous effect around the content.

342. The method according to any one of claims 325 to 341, When displaying the content in the second presentation mode and when an environmental mode of the three-dimensional environment for controlling a visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment external to the content is the corresponding environmental mode: Display the content in the three-dimensional environment with a simulated self-luminous effect around the content via the display generation component according to a determination that a pattern for reducing the visual salience of the three-dimensional environment external to the content is active; and Display the content via the display generation component without displaying the simulated self-luminous effect around the content in the three-dimensional environment according to a determination that the pattern for reducing the visual salience of the three-dimensional environment external to the content is inactive.

343. A computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; And One or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: Displaying a three-dimensional environment including content in a first presentation mode via the display generation component, wherein when the three-dimensional environment including the content is displayed: The environmental mode for controlling the visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment external to the content of the three-dimensional environment is a corresponding environmental mode, and The three-dimensional environment external to the content has a corresponding visual appearance based on the corresponding environmental mode; When the three-dimensional environment external to the content with the corresponding visual appearance based on the corresponding environmental mode is displayed in the corresponding environmental mode via the display generation component, detecting a first input for displaying the content in a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode via the one or more input devices; And In response to detecting the first input via the one or more input devices: Display the content in a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode via the display generation component; According to a determination that when the first input is detected, the corresponding environmental mode is a first environmental mode and the corresponding visual appearance is a first visual appearance, display the three-dimensional environment including the content via the display generation component, wherein when the three-dimensional environment including the content is displayed, display the three-dimensional environment external to the content with a second visual appearance different from the first visual appearance based on the first environmental mode; And According to a determination that when the first input is detected, the corresponding environmental mode is a second environmental mode different from the first environmental mode and the corresponding visual appearance is the first visual appearance, continue to display the three-dimensional environment including the content via the display generation component, wherein when the three-dimensional environment including the content is displayed, display the three-dimensional environment external to the content with the first visual appearance.

344. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform a method including the following operations: Display a three - dimensional environment including content in a first presentation mode via the display generation component, wherein when displaying the three - dimensional environment including the content: The environment mode for controlling the visual appearance of the three - dimensional environment outside the content of the three - dimensional environment is the corresponding environment mode, and The three - dimensional environment outside the content has a corresponding visual appearance based on the corresponding environment mode; When displaying the three - dimensional environment outside the content with the corresponding visual appearance based on the corresponding environment mode in the corresponding environment mode via the display generation component, detect a first input for displaying the content in a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode via the one or more input devices; And In response to detecting the first input via the one or more input devices: Display the content in a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode via the display generation component; According to the determination that when the first input is detected, the corresponding environment mode is the first environment mode and the corresponding visual appearance is the first visual appearance, display the three - dimensional environment including the content via the display generation component, wherein when displaying the three - dimensional environment including the content, display the three - dimensional environment outside the content with a second visual appearance different from the first visual appearance based on the first environment mode; And According to the determination that when the first input is detected, the corresponding environment mode is a second environment mode different from the first environment mode and the corresponding visual appearance is the first visual appearance, continue to display the three - dimensional environment including the content via the display generation component, wherein when displaying the three - dimensional environment including the content, display the three - dimensional environment outside the content with the first visual appearance.

345. A computer system that communicates with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; Means for displaying a three - dimensional environment including content in a first presentation mode via the display generation component, wherein when displaying the three - dimensional environment including the content: The environment mode for controlling the visual appearance of the three - dimensional environment outside the content of the three - dimensional environment is the corresponding environment mode, and The three - dimensional environment outside the content has a corresponding visual appearance based on the corresponding environment mode; Means for: when displaying the three - dimensional environment outside the content with the corresponding visual appearance based on the corresponding environment mode in the corresponding environment mode via the display generation component, detecting a first input for displaying the content in a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode via the one or more input devices; And Means for: in response to detecting the first input via the one or more input devices: Display the content in a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode via the display generation component; Based on determining that when the first input is detected, the corresponding environmental mode is the first environmental mode and the corresponding visual appearance is the first visual appearance, display the three-dimensional environment including the content via the display generating component, wherein when the three-dimensional environment including the content is displayed, the three-dimensional environment outside the content is displayed with a second visual appearance different from the first visual appearance based on the first environmental mode; and Based on determining that when the first input is detected, the corresponding environmental mode is a second environmental mode different from the first environmental mode and the corresponding visual appearance is the first visual appearance, continue the display of the three-dimensional environment including the content via the display generating component, wherein when the three-dimensional environment including the content is displayed, the three-dimensional environment outside the content is displayed with the first visual appearance.

346. A computer system, the computer system communicating with a display generating component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; and One or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method according to any one of claims 325 to 342.

347. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system communicating with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform the method according to any one of claims 325 to 342.

348. A computer system, the computer system communicating with a display generating component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: One or more processors; A memory; and Means for performing the method according to any one of claims 325 to 342.

Images